Home

User Manual User Manual - Ber

Contents

1. Table 210 Help menu Help Topics Select to display Help topics About Diagnostic Viewer Select to display a dialog box describing version information Preferences Use the Preferences form accessed on the File menu of the Diagnostic Viewer application toolbar to set options for the Diagnostic Viewer program 383 384 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 152 Diagnostic Viewer Preferences Preferences C Open today s log file when program starts Prompt before deleting contents Use small toolbar Max entry limit tooo Read from beginning of file O Read from end of file Table 211 Form fields Element Description Open today s log file when program starts Enable this option if you would like the current day s log file to automatically load when the Diagnostic Viewer program is started Prompt before deleting contents Enable this option if you would like a prompt to appear before deleting the contents of the current log file Use small toolbar Enable this option to decrease the size of the toolbar Max entry limit Enter the number of entries you would like to view You may display up to 50 000 entries from the beginning of the file or the last 50 000 entries from the end of the file based on your selection of one of the radio buttons below your entry This option is useful if a log file is extremely large Read from beginning of file Enable this option to open
2. Revert to Original If you changed a setting during this session and have not yet saved click to retain the colors previously assigned No changes are applied Reset System Defaults If you presently have colors assigned to alarms displaying on the Alarm Monitor form click to reset the colors to the system defaults of a white background with black font That is all alarms default to a white background with black font and not just the alarm that is currently displaying in the Alarm Priority form Save Click to update an adjusted priority configuration OK Click to save any changes made and close this form The newly assigned colors display on the Alarm Monitor form in real time if there are existing alarms Cancel Click to close this form without making any changes How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 101 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 185 186 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define alarm category The Alarm Category tab in the Alarms amp Events group lets you define new alarm categories for alarms When the alarm is generated a description of the category associated with each alarm will be displayed in the Alarm Monitor in the Category column Figure 79 Alarm Category tab Alarm Priority SR Alarm Priority Alarm Category L Category List Description Doctor call 4 Category Description Doctor call Add
3. Mi i ete Credentials Maximum number of PIN digits 4 ACU Protocol C Enable Controller for New Protocol Only Table 19 Form fields Element Description Company Site Code Enter the 8 digit number e This number is a combination of a 4 digit company code number with preceding zeros if appropriate and a 4 digit site code number with preceding zeros if appropriate e This number can be all zeros e This field accepts only numeric digits and must be 8 digits e This number corresponds to the number that is encoded in your access cards Example 00670010 The first four digits indicate your company number 67 with preceding zeros 0067 The second set of four digits indicate your company site number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 Arrows Click to move your new code number from the input field into the list box of existing code numbers Listbox This is a display of existing company codes Delete A numeric code can be deleted only if it is not being used in your FCWnx system Default Company Site Code Select a company site code to be used as the default entry Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 19 Form fields continued Element Description Credentials Max number of PIN digits Enter or select a number between 4 and 6 as the number of allowable digits used as a credential PIN The maximum number of PIN digits is 6 This number is assigned on the Credential form ACU Protocol Ena
4. How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 65 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 137 138 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Reader Type Schedules tab Micro controller systems Use the Reader Type Schedules tab to select the events that are used to determine when a reader is used as a Normal Credential Keypad or Credential and PIN reader Events define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with an event Therefore that event stays in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually ACU controller systems Use the Reader Type Schedules tab to select the time schedules that are used to determine when a reader is used as a Normal Credential Keypad Credential and PIN reader Access with Site Code and Access with Company Code After the time schedule is expired it will go back to the default physical type Note To change the reader to a Credential or Keypad physical type you must configure the Keypad Entry Card Number Length on the Reader tab of the Reader form Figure 49 Reader Type Schedules tab Al Reader e Descriptiom Facility v Reader I Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Normal Credential Only SSS ie Credential and PIN Required v Credential or Keypad Entry v Access with Site Code vi Access wit
5. Menu Buttons The Menu Buttons option determines whether or not the graphics display beside options in the drop down menus Note Clear the check box to hide the graphics from view Split The Split option lets you increase or decrease the horizontal size of the tabs and windowpanes on a form Next Pane The Next Pane option moves the cursor between the main form the tabs and the search results window if there is one Application Group This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Application Group pane displays along the left side of the application window Additionally you can drag the docked Application Group pane to an alternative position on your application window Application Toolbar This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Application toolbar displays at the top of the application window Record Toolbar This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Record toolbar displays at the top of the application window Select Facility The Select Facility option opens the Set Active Facilities form that lets you change the facilities currently in use Table 8 Enable Alarm Video Popup View menu continued Element Description Chapter 1 Introduction Select this item to enable disable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs with an associated alarm trigger By default this is a toggle option and is not selected This option must also b
6. Columns in Windowpane Description Description of the Alarm DI in the database Controller Controller on which the Alarm DI is located Monitored Displays ON or OFF Status Displays status of the alarm as Open Closed Cut or Short SCIF Workstation ACU only If a SCIF area is assigned the name of the SCIF workstation displays here Controller Type Displays the type as a Micro controller or ACU controller Area ACU only Secure area associated with the controller 344 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 197 Form fields continued Element Description Set state to Note The names of the buttons change depending on the DI type Alarm or Other selected If an Alarm or Alarm Group is selected click e Monitor On To monitor the selected alarms or alarm groups Setting Monitor On displays the alarms on the Alarm Monitor form e Monitor Off To immediately discontinue monitoring the selected alarms or alarm groups Setting Monitor Off does not display alarms on the Alarm Monitor form e Indefinite To make the change permanent This selection does not allow it to be overridden by a schedule can be monitor ON or OFF e Sched Can Override for Micro controller systems only To change the state of the monitoring by a schedule override For example use Sched Can Override to monitor an alarm until a schedule overrides it If you don t want the schedule to stop the monitoring click Indefinite
7. Imaging Information Licenses Used The number of clients currently given Imaging permissions Imaging Licenses The total number of Imaging licenses authorized Client Monitor toolbar Table 188 Form fields Element Description Disconnect Client Chapter 9 Monitor and control Disconnect the selected client Launch Client Select this icon to launch a CCTV interface other than integrated CCTV This option also displays on the shortcut menu for this form The shortcut menu displays when you click the right mouse button on the Client Monitor form Help Displays the Help system Client Monitor shortcut menu Table 189 Form fields Element Description Disconnect Launch Select this icon to disconnect the selected client Select this icon to enable a CCTV interface other than integrated CCTV Client Recover To display the Client form to add a client to this application network To initiate recovery of a host that failed was taken over by a backup client and is now able to host its original devices When the default client is running a manual recovery procedure is required to bring all its devices back to itself Also refer to Backup Clients tab on page 54 e A notification message informs you of a successful recovery Control of devices is returned to the default host e A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery Verify communication with the defa
8. Table 207 Edit menu Copy Select this option to copy the contents of the selected rows into the Windows Clipboard Table 208 View menu Toolbar Select to display the toolbar menu This is a toggle selection Status Bar Select to display the status bar This is a toggle selection Auto Scroll Select this option to automatically scroll to the last of the incoming messages at the bottom of the viewer As new messages come in while you have Diagnostic Viewer open the viewer scrolls so that the most recent message always displays in the viewer If the scroll option is disabled new entries do not scroll the currently displayed entries off the screen Pause Select this option to stop the scrolling of incoming messages in the viewer When paused select this option again to resume scrolling Find Select this option to search for specific text in the log file Table 209 Filter menu Info Select this option to enable disable the display of informational messages Informational messages indicate normal system operation They are always written to the log On the main Filter drop down menu this item is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled the messages are displayed This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Table 209 Filter menu Debug Select this option to enable disable the display of DE
9. When an alarm configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short its internal process state is Active When an alarm configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and is acknowledged see 1 above its internal process state becomes Pending This displays on the Alarm Monitor form as Alarm with a process state of Acknowledged preceded by a check When an alarm not configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and is acknowledged its internal process state becomes Inactive and the alarm is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and its internal process state is Pending displayed as Acknowledged preceded by a check on the Alarm Monitor form and the alarm is Purged individually or Reset see 2 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and the alarm is reset see 3 its internal process state is Completed This displays on the Alarm Monitor as Alarm in reset When an alarm is in reset and the alarm is either acknowledged or purged see 4 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and the Purge All featu
10. 1 The top section or pane lists the alarms 2 The second pane lists any instructions assigned to the current highlighted alarm 3 The third pane lets you respond to an alarm by either selecting a predefined response or entering text Table 184 Form fields Element Description are as follows Alarm State Displays a colored icon associated with an alarm process state The four possible states Alarm Red The point is in the active alarm state either closed or opened The Active Priority alarm state for an alarm is defined on the Alarm form Reset Green The point is no longer in the active alarm state Cut Yellow The wiring to the alarm point has been cut Short Blue The wiring to the alarm point has been short circuited Displays the priority of the alarm The priority tells the system in which order it should alert the operator when multiple alarms occur simultaneously The priority range is 0 to 19 The lower the number the higher the priority of the alarm Also refer to Alarm Priority on page 184 321 322 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 184 Form fields continued Element Description Category Displays the category assigned to this alarm Description Displays the alarm description Refer to the following examples e Tamper Alarm Micro controller mmmmm bb pp Tamper ACU controller mmmmm na pp Tamper where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this read
11. Element Description Archive Database Select an option to schedule archiving history Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions leaving your history database empty The default value for this option is Monthly If you select Daily The archive is appended every day beginning at 11 59 58 p m Weekly The archive is appended every week on the day that you select beginning at 11 59 58 p m You must select a day of the week Any change in the scheduling occurs immediately For example if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is revised to archive on Wednesday the archiving occurs one day later on Wednesday Monthly The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11 59 58 p m The FCWnx services do not have to be running Archiving occurs as long as SQL Server Agent services are running When FCWnx is installed with SQL 2008 Express the SQL Agent does not run The windows scheduler runs instead and is responsible for executing the archiving application tasks Database Connection This feature lets you configure the amount of time that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that your database is not accessible Timeout sec The default is 30 seconds The minimum is 3 seconds the maximum is 120 seconds 1 In an FCWnx Global configuration this is the amount of time until a Regional failover begins 2 In a typical FCWnx configuration this is the amount of
12. Element Description Database Connection Heartbeat The FCWnx system validates communication with backup clients by pinging sending continuous broadcast messages If there is a communication failure between the default client and the backup client the backup client looks for a Heartbeat time stamp in the database as an indication that the default client is online and connected a If a Heartbeat exists the default client is alive and the backup client does not initiate takeover of the devices from the default client b If a Heartbeat does not exist the backup client initiates takeover of devices from the default client The backup client uses the following values e Heartbeat seconds Select a computer from the Backup Clients list box and assign an interval of seconds the range is 10 to 180 between Heartbeat checks The default number is 60 seconds This number can be reset at any time e Heartbeat Retries Select the number of times the range is 1 to 3 this backup client checks for a Heartbeat stamp in the database before initiating takeover of devices from the default client The default number of retries is 2 Assign Controller Phone s This button is only available after completing the following e Backup clients have been assigned e The currently displayed client is host to Dial up and or Network Dial up controllers In the event of a system failure the controllers associated with the failed client must have a
13. How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 5 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Time Zone tab Use the Time Zone tab to select the time zone of this controller Figure 35 Time Zone tab e Description Facility xi Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Set the time zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada v E Automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving Time Table 52 Form fields Chapter 4 109 Devices Element Description Zone Drop down List Select the time zone of this controller from the drop down list of available time zones Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes savings time changes time change The host and controller can operate independently in different time zones If you want the controller to recognize and implement daylight savings time select this check box e The default of this check box is checked and the controller recognizes daylight e If the check box is not checked the controller does not adjust for daylight savings How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 52 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Comments tab The Comments tab and windowpane are provided to enter a location description reason for creating this group or special considerations for thi
14. Instruction Enter the text you want to display when the associated transaction occurs The instruction can be 1 to 500 alphanumeric characters in length 164 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 86 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define alarm responses The Response form Alarms amp Events group lets you create a list of frequently used predefined responses to an alarm and reduces the need to type an entry A response describes a reaction to an alarm The response entries that you create display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Table 87 Form fields Element Description Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Alarm Response tab Use the Alarm Response tab to enter a predefined alarm response This multiple line dialog box accepts 64 alphanumeric characters The responses you create and save display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Figure 65 Alarm Response tab Alarm Response aS Facility gnore Facilities Alarm Response Response E 911 How to 1 Complete the field on this tab Examples Police are on their way Maintenance is cleaning up 2 Click Save between each entry and before you exit this tab Chapter 4 Devices Define alarms The A
15. e Intrusion zones can be assigned to an access right allowing the ability to arm disarm the zone and access to a particular zone For systems using ACU controllers e For ACU controller readers assign the readers to an area first Then assign the area to the access right using the Area tab e Assign areas to an access right and then assign a time schedule and dates to the area access right 1 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the type of controllers in your system Following the creation of access rights create departments Now you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records 4 If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image qs 18 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task Application Group e Persons Personnel Person Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and S credentials on page 258 1 Click the add icon ET begin a new record Create a record of an employee s personal information Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields 2 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image Sele
16. Date Time Format ddmm yyy hh mm ss x Header Footer Alarm Information Add Alarm Instruction Alarm Text Reset Text ES lt gt secure Table 44 Form fields Element Description Date Time Format Select a date time format from the drop down list Header Select this check box to display a header greeting In the Header field enter text up to 256 alphanumeric characters This could be additional details explaining the alarm condition e if you do not enter a header greeting an equivalent white space displays at the beginning of the e mail notification e if you do not select the check box any header message you create is not included in your e mail Footer Select this check box to display a footer closing In the Footer field enter text up to 256 alphanumeric characters This space could provide a name and number to contact if the receiver has a question e If you do not enter a foot or closing an equivalent white space displays at the end of the e mail notification e Ifyou do not select the check box any footer message you create is not included in your e mail Table 44 Form fields continued Chapter 3 Schedules Element Description Alarm Information How to Add Alarm Instruction Select this check box to include the alarm instruction associated with this alarm in this e mail notification e If this check box is not selected any
17. FCWnx has six services that run on all computers The default Startup Type for services is set to Manual You are instructed to set the FCWnx services for an Automatic startup during the FCWnx installation process which means that they start as soon as the computer is started Once set to Automatic we recommend that you do not change these settings 1 FCWnx Diagnostics handles all diagnostics on all computers 2 FCWnx System Manager manages communication between computers and licensing This service also starts the WebService FCWnx Manager is the main service and handles controller communications and alarms 4 FCWnx Webservice handles the video media service This service is dependent on the System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts 5 FCWnx Media Server is handled entirely by FCWnx Webservice This service requires no user intervention and starts and stops automatically 6 FCWnx API Service is used when using an API interface This service is used when an external system is sending or receiving transactions by way of the Application Program Interface to this application This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Note Changing the state of a service without a good working knowledge of its purpose can cause the computer to act erratically Services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets all of the following criteria Does no
18. FCWnx supports the following three kinds of multi drop links The multi drop loop can support up to 6 ACUs e LAN Multi drop Network e Dial up Multi drop e Serial Multi drop Direct LAN Multi drop configuration You can multi drop any ACU from an ACUXL connected to the LAN using RS 485 up to a maximum of 4 000 feet to the last ACU from the ACUXL Note SW3 DIP switch 1 must be ON to enable the LAN connection When the LAN connection is enabled only host Port 2 may be used to multi drop additional ACUs ACURS2 or ACURS4 may also be connected to the RS 485 port With the multi drop LAN settings additional panels must be configured in the controller settings with the same IP address as the Head of Line panel Dial up Multi drop configuration The dial up ACUXL ACURS panel may support up to five additional ACUXL ACURS panels multi dropped to its RS485 port Rotary switch SW4 is used to set each controller s dialing address The additional panels must be configured in the controller settings as dial up panels with the same phone numbers as the panel with the dial up modem card configured All panels must be configured as head of line on the Controller Definition tab If the panel with dial up modem is installed as multi drop it must be set as address 1 Each additional multi drop panel on the RS485 port must be addressed starting with 2 and then 3 and so on 100 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Serial Multi drop configura
19. Figure 48 Routing Schedule tab Table 65 Form fields Reader e Routing Schedule Chapter 4 Devices Description Facility v Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Valid transactions to history Time schedule o E O Yes O No Valid transactions to monitor Time schedule Oves ONo Valid transactions to printer Time schedule O Yes O No Element Description Valid transactions to history Valid transactions to monitor Valid transactions to printer Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be saved to the history file or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be saved to the history file Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be displayed on the Activity Monitor form or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be displayed on the Activity Monitor form Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be sent to the printer or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be sent to the printer
20. Note The Header Fields and Group Fields buttons are disabled on some of the reports Filters tab Alarm History report form Use the Filters tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt e Alarm Select the alarm you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all alarms select lt ALL gt e Priority Select the alarm priority you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all alarm priorities select lt ALL gt e Alarm State Select the alarm state you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all alarm states select lt ALL gt Area History report form Use the Filters tab to limit the person or credentialholder records printed on this report e Credential Number Enter the range of credential numbers you want listed on this report Leave blank for all credentials Employee Name Enter the range of employee last names on which you want to generate a report Leave blank for all names Employee Number Enter the range of employee numbers on which you want to report Leave blank for all numbers 359 360 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Area report form Use the Filters tab to generate an Area report Use this tab to select criteria by which this report is generated allowing you to narrow the select
21. The Controller Preference Networking tab displays only if the system identified your controller as a network controller and lets you change the network preferences for the controller Controller Preference Credential Format The Credential Format tab opens to display the custom credential formats that are currently in the controller If there are no custom formats the fields are empty If a format in the database does not match what is available in the controller the window list displays a message Unrecognized Format To change the credential format e Magnetic stripe Select the type of magnetic stripe format from the drop down list e Wiegand Click Assign formats to display a list of available Wiegand credential formats from which to choose and assign to this controller e Clear formats in controller Click to clear all custom credential formats from the controller Credentials associated with those formats no longer work If you change the credential format any format that existed in the controller previously is replaced 2 Start flashing controllers This option starts flashing the selected controllers with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request The flashing process time varies depending on the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller and the controller connection type 122 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 3 View edit flash files Use this option
22. e Alarm means that this digital input is being used to trigger an alarm e Elevator means this digital input is being used for elevator control e Inactive means this digital input is not being used at this time e Digital Output means this digital input is being used to trigger a digital output and no alarm is generated Note Arm Disarm type applies to ACU controller systems only e Arm Disarm means this digital input arms disarms an intrusion zone for Micro controllers or an area Note Intrusion and Guard Tour types apply to Micro controller systems only e Intrusion means this digital input arms disarms an intrusion zone e Guard Tour means this digital input is a point along a pre determined inspection tour of your premises by a security officer Note REX Alarm type applies to ACU controller systems only e REX Alarm means this digital input is associated with the REX Alarm for an ACU Note Digital Input type of intrusion can only be made if the previous type was Inactive meaning no other access control digital input was active For example you cannot assign Intrusion type to a DI that was previously set as an Alarm the DI type must first be Inactive Be aware that selection of this type overrides any access control You cannot assign any access control digital outputs digital output groups schedules or events for this record Active State Micro only The active state of a selected digital input can be either Cl
23. n Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Areas Assigned Intrusion Zones Transactions J Arm C Disarm C Invalid Tag Selection None Tag only O Tag as event Assign Intrusion Zones Table 127 Form fields Element Description Transactions Select any one or all of the types of intrusion zone transactions that trigger an event Arm Intrusion zone arm transaction in progress Disarm Intrusion zone disarm transaction in progress Invalid Intrusion zone arm disarm transaction failed for one of the following reasons e Device or badging failed The zones are not secure e The time period allowed for completion of the arm disarm process at keypad and reader has expired e The presented credential does not have access rights for transactions in the selected intrusion zones Tag Selection Select one of the options None No tag is sent for marking a recorded video or manipulating the record rate Tag only A tag is sent for marking recorded video at the camera s current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the camera s record rate to its event record rate settings Assigned Intrusion Zones This list box displays those intrusion zones that you have assigned to this event trigger 223 224 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 127 Form fields continued Element Description Assign Intrus
24. 2 Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off ANAL OP Chapter 4 129 Devices 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Present a valid credential to the reader Enter your Personal Identification Number PIN on the keypad Press the end key lt gt or lt x gt Credential or Keypad reader Note Only reader module door inputs and 20D module input points can be shunted from a keypad To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 01 1 01 Reader To identify a 20D module input point look for a default description that follows this format 01 1 01 DI Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a controller connected to a keypad reader 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Enter your credential number on the keypad or present your badge to the reader Press the end key lt gt or lt x gt Normal type reader Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a c
25. All selected rows are highlighted Changing a field value changes it for all selected records 4 Make the necessary changes to the form 5 Complete the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the Form Fields table for each form in this guide Not all fields may display on your form or they may display as read only and disabled When all required information is complete you are able to save the record 6 Click Save fed If you are unable to save or additional information is required a message displays informing you of the additional requirements in order to save this record Complete the additions or necessary changes and click Save again Deleting records To delete a record 1 From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item and then click the appropriate tab For example the Personnel Person or Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty 2 From the tool bar click Search So A record list window displays with all of the existing records or displays the results of search operations and lets you quickly navigate through the records found by a search 3 Select a record from the list e Click a single record in the record list to select that record for deletion The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next e Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record dragging the m
26. Click to display a Find Credential dialog box select a reader and present a credential at that reader The record displays that is associated with the credential presented Select a reader from the drop down list of the Find Credential dialog box present a credential at that reader and this form displays the record that is associated with the credential presented If a record is not currently in this application you can add it This is a convenient way of finding the credential record for a card without searching all 289 290 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 167 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Also see Mass update on page 293 for simultaneously updating properties on a group of records within this application 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Credential Status tab Note The Credential Status tab is for Micro controller systems only A credential record must be selected in order to enable the Credential Status tab This windowpane provides an immediate status of the selected credential according to the information in the controller database Note This is a diagnostic tool The status displayed here is verification that a credential modification has actually taken place in the database according to a change in the Status as modified on the Credential Definition tab Figure 127 Credential status tab amp Credential e Description Facility Credent
27. Form fields Element Description Add Remove Click to display the CCTV Alarm Assignment dialog box that lets you add or remove items from the list This dialog box lets you select and assign CCTV alarms to alarms for this application Only CCTV alarms in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 96 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Refer to the Facility Commander Wnx Installation Manual CCTV Interfaces appendix for additional information about CCTV interfaces 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Adding sound to an alarm If you would like to hear a sound from this application computer when an alarm occurs follow the steps below Note You must have a sound card in your computer Click Start Settings and then Control Panel From the Control Panel window double click the Sounds and Multimedia icon In Sound Events scroll to this application Select the alarm to which you want to assign sound then select the sound you want for that alarm Click OK to save the change and exit the window or Apply to save that change and add more sounds Start this application select Administration and then Preferences ot aay PA A es a On the System Settings tab of the Preferences form verify that the Console a
28. Green There are no unacknolwedged alarms 19 20 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Creating editing and deleting records FCWnx forms use a standard method to add edit or delete records Creating records To create a record 1 From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item and then click the appropriate tab For example the Personnel Person or Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty 2 From the tool bar click Search to verify that a record does not already exist A record list window displays with all of the existing records or displays the results of search operations and lets you quickly navigate through the records found by a search 3 Click New g The New Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data The New Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given permission to update records The Add Record icon on the Record toolbar has the same features as the New Record menu option 4 Complete the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the form fields table for each form in this guide Not all fields may display on your form or they may display as read only and disabled When all required information is complete you are able to
29. Note There may be schedules in effect that override manually controlled changes if schedule override is selected otherwise the manual control selection is truly indefinite Chapter 9 343 Monitor and control Figure 143 Alarm Digital Input tab EA Manual Control DEAR e Select Controller All By Controller Description Controller Status 0018 0 01 Tamper PXN 18 0018 0 02 Power PXN 18 0018 1 01 Reader Lost Credential PXN 18 0018 1 01 Reader Invalid Credential PXN 18 0018 1 01 Duress PXN 18 0018 1 01 Reader Forced PXN 18 0018 1 01 Reader Held PXN 18 0018 1 01 Supervised Exit PXN 18 0018 1 01 Supervised Reader PXN 18 0018 1 02 Reader Lost Credential PXN 18 0018 1 02 Reader Invalid Credential PXN 18 0018 1 02 Duress PXN 18 0018 1 02 Reader Forced PXN 18 M1 9 1 0 Resder Hald PAN 19 lt Set state to Purpose Table 197 Form fields Element Description Select type Select one of the alarm DI types from the drop down list e Alarms e Micro only Alarm Groups e Digital Input Only digital output types of Digital Input will be displayed Note Nothing displays in the list box until you choose a controller option Select controller Select a controller option e All displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator s facilities for all controllers e By Controller displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator s facilities for a specific controller
30. On the Security tab add ANONYMOUS LOGON or NETWORK to the Security permissions Note Printers can be connected to the server or any client computers The defaults of the activity printer selections are cleared on any newly configured system Any system with a newly converted database requires reconfiguration of these activity printer selections at each client workstation 53 54 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 27 Form fields continued Element Description Alarm and Guard Tour DI Activity Printing Credential and Area or Zone Activity Printing You must enable select a printer and route alarms to a printer in order for alarm activity to print e Enable Select this check box to print alarm activity If you select to enable alarm activity printing you must select a printer in order to save this record e Printer Displays the currently selected printer to which alarm activity prints This may be the same or a different printer than that used for credential transactions e Select Printer Click this button to select a printer to which alarm activity prints Note Print Alarms At Host must be selected on the Alarm form in order for alarm activity to print You must enable select a printer and route credential activity to a printer in order to print credential transactions e Enable Select this check box to print credential activity If you select to enable credential and zone activity printing
31. Places amp Policies group to define facilities Your database can be partitioned and related records can be grouped These groupings are called facilities If facilities are used you must create Facility definitions in the FCWnx system e Usually the system administrator is assigned to all facilities e Operators can be assigned to one or more facilities and can choose which facilities to be active at any given time e All records have the default Ignore Facilities which means the records are not under facility protection therefore those records are visible to all operators Note A facility option can be designated on most forms throughout the system and any number of facilities can be defined Also refer to an expanded facility definition in the Glossary on page 405 Facility tab Use the Description field on the Facility tab to create facility records Chapter 2 49 System preferences Figure 13 Facility tab UD Facity ITA e Facility Description Table 25 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a description that uniquely identifies location or function of the facility How to 1 Click the Add icon to begin a new facility record 2 Enter a unique description in the Description field This may be a building name or location such as FAU Campus Office Building 3 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Identify and configure
32. Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to refresh the data Note A status refresh on a controller that is offline is never returned Define digital outputs Use the Digital Output form Security Devices group to search and view or modify an existing digital output record A digital output represents an external device such as lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Refer to your controller installation manual for information on how to connect a digital output device to the controller The digital outputs available depend on the controller setup and readers used NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 76 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmmm bb pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital output is associated bb represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number Micro Example 00001 01 01 DO ACU Example 00001 01 01 DO This digital output is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep
33. Select the alarm and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected windowpane Selected Alarm Windowpane The alarms that display are those that are currently assigned to this record Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an available alarm Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list e None is selected by default e If there are none listed create a time schedule on the Time Schedule form under the Schedules group Link Only If Offline The default of this check box is not selected and this link functions during the time schedule regardless of the status of the alarm If selected the link between the digital output and alarm functions only when the controller is offline This alarm does not function during the selected time schedule Use this when multiple alarms are to be linked to a single output Ignore Alarm Monitor State If selected the output relay triggers even when the alarm that has the digital output is not monitored How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 81 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define digital output groups Use the Digital Output Group form Security Devices group to assign digital outputs to a group and schedules to digital output groups Digital output groups provide an easy convenient way of scheduling many digital outputs at once To create digital output groups manually create the groups and then a
34. Select the search type The options are Alarm Event or Text If you select a Text search enter the text such as camera name in the Text field Click Search The Results display with number of matches found camera name start date and time end date and time and type Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console Click Clear to return to the default settings and remove any matches in the Results pane How to search by time and date Investigators and other operators may want to view previously recorded video for a specific date and time which is not necessarily when the event occurs The Video Console lets you retrieve recorded video from the DVR which differs from only retrieving a marked video clip from an alarm event To search for video clips 1 2 3 Use the navigation pane to locate the DVR storing the video event From the File menu select Video Search The Video Search window displays Select the DVR General Playback tab The search criteria includes recorder camera date and time Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR Use the Camera drop down list to select the appropriate camera The current date displays in the Video Search window To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to sel
35. The maximum number of minutes is 1440 once per day History Database Synchronization Interval min License Info How to This database contains current history including credential transactions and operator history The default and minimum number of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes The maximum number of minutes is 1440 once per day Note A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated It defines what publications are received where and when The time that it takes to complete this process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be synchronized This list informs the operator of the current licensing capabilities of the selected Region Example This information is helpful to an operator when attempting to add an additional feature to a Region A message may display informing the operator that addition of the feature is in excess of the license limit for that Region The operator consults this form to review the license capabilities If limits for that feature have been reached additional devices cannot be added at this time 1 Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait between database synchronization Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait between history database synchronization 2 3 Verify the license information 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Backup
36. and 6 small anes making a total of 11 viewing panes Center and Perimeter C p C it ick to divide the video display area into 1 large pane with 12 small panes surrounding making a total of 13 display panes Save Custom View C the selected camera view configuration for future use All saved views are displayed in the Custom Views tab of the Navigation pane ick to display the Save User View dialog where you can enter a view name and save Remove Custom View Click to delete the currently selected view from the Custom Views tab You will be asked to confirm Click Ok to continue or Cancel to exit the dialog Upload Views Click to upload all views to the database for centralized storage a nd backup Download Views Click to download all views from the database to the local computer Close Video Streams Click to close all currently selected live or recorded video 231 232 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Window menu The Window menu contains the following commands Table 135 Form fields Element Description Save Position Select this option to have the Video Console window display in the same position of your desktop every time it is launched Always On Top Select this option to have the Video Console window remain on top even when it is not the active window on your desktop Search for video When investigating al
37. configured for discovery would you like to configure now Click No to close the window and return to the main screen for IT Assistant Installing MS SQL Server 2005 2008 on the RAID server Refer to the appropriate chapter in the installation manual for details and instruction to configure SQL Server Software Question What software and firmware versions are supported in FCWnx components The following are minimum requirements for FCWnx system components Element Description NET Framework 3 5 automatically installs with FCWnx if not already there Acrobat Reader 5 x or later to view manuals online Acrobat Reader is provided on the FCWnx Documentation disk for your convenience DVR Refer to Define digital video recorders on page 204 for a list of devices and supported firmware versions Internet Explorer 6 1 or later with applicable service pack MDAC 2 8 or later with applicable service pack MS SQL SQL Server 2005 2008 Standard or Enterprise Edition Service Pack 2 or later Question Can I customize the toolbars and add more buttons No The toolbars cannot be customized Question How do I perform a search on a specific item The Search button can be found on any form that provides search capabilities If you click this button when the current form is blank all records are returned To specify criteria fill in the information Example If you want to find all credentialholders with the last name Smith enter Smith in th
38. continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Alarm State Alarm This alarm point is in an active state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block The following alarm states display in the selected color Alarm Cut Short Reset This alarm point has reset and is no longer in the active alarm state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Reset state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block Any alarm in Reset state displays in this color Alarm Bumped Alarm The notification for this alarm point has been bumped to an additional location Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Bumped state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block The following bumped alarm states display in the selected color Alarm Cut Short Reset The notification for this alarm point has been bumped to an additional location has reset and is no longer in the active alarm state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Bumped Reset state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block Help Click to open the Help system
39. e Start stop a guard tour e Change the mode of a client Refer to the individual tab controls for additional information regarding the available functions Reader Digital Output tab Note Functions associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form Exception ACU only If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller functions can be controlled Manually lock or unlock doors and turn on or off DO digital output points depending on the current operator s facilities and permissions Note Schedules override manual changes unless Indefinite Unlock has been selected Controllers always run schedules defined previously in its database Therefore if there was a schedule set to be in effect at the current time the manual change would be overridden and the schedule would be enforced 340 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 142 Reader Digital Output tab Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas Zones Mode Threat Guard Tour Select DO type Select Controller OReader Floor O Other All O By Controller Elevator Description Floor Description Floor Number Floor Status Area El Secure Al 1 2 2 Unsecure Al Elevator 2 1 Elevator 2 2 si Set state to Refresh Status Purpose Unsecure Floor Table 196 Form fields Element Description Select controller Note A controller must be selected before the sy
40. e Event Notifier e Video Event Trigger e Mode Event Trigger Security Devices Click to display items in the Security Devices group The following items display in the Security Devices group pane e Controller e Reader e Digital Input e Digital Output e Digital Output Group e DVR e Camera e Camera Preset Elevators Click to display items in the Elevators group The following items display in the Elevators group pane e Elevator e Floor Guard Tours Click to display items in the Guard Tours group The following items display in the Guard Tours group pane e Guard Tour e Guard Tour Point If your system is licensed for Micro controllers this item displays Chapter 1 Introduction Table 5 Application Group pane continued Element Description Graphics Click to display items in the Graphic Maps group The following items display in the Graphic Maps group pane e Graphics Map Editor e Graphics Symbol Editor e Graphics Preference Schedules Click to display items in the Schedules group The following items display in the Schedules group pane e Time Schedule e Event Schedule If your system is licensed for Micro controllers this item displays e Mode Schedule Gateways amp Interfaces Administration Click to display items in the Gateways amp Interfaces group The following items display in the Gateways amp Interfaces group pane e CCTV Interface e API Con
41. e Timed APB on the reader takes precedence over the timed ABP setting on the Area form APB with door contact e The user must open the door to be placed in the area e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity monitor The User is recorded as IN the area If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door not opened Valid No Passage is displayed on the Activity monitor The User is not recorded as in the area If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door is opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the area e If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door is not opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is not recorded as in the area APB without a door contact e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the area e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is not opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the area e If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door is opened Valid is displayed on the Activity monitor The user is recorded as IN the area e If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door is not opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The user is recorded as IN the area Note By default all readers are created with a door contact DI defined archi
42. minutes the display changes from the IP address to COM port When a failover occurs a yellow LED displays in the COM address column e If this is a network network controller the Primary IP address displays If the controller loses network connection fails over to a secondary network IP address the display changes to the secondary IP address When a failover occurs a yellow LED displays in the COM address column e If this is a network dial up controller the text Dial Up is displayed Note Ifa host computer is licensed for Client Redundancy has assigned a backup client and a failover occurs a failover COM port displays e ifthe controller is defined as head of line this field is blank e If the selected controller is not head of line this field contains a description of the controller that is the head of this line Mode Threat Level Access Message Count This displays the current mode or threat level of the controller The mode is assigned on the Mode Schedule form or by a manual control command The mode and threat level default labels are Normal Mode 1 Mode 2 or Mode 3 and Threat Level O Normal Threat Level 1 Low Threat Level 2 Medium Threat Level 3 High or as re labeled on the Preferences form This field displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to a selected controller By default this column is not displayed Controller Monitor toolbar Note Fora shortcut menu to functions
43. such as readers alarms and Dis added with the controller belong to the same facility as the controller If you edit the Facility option on an existing controller record a message displays Do other devices change to the same facility as the controller If you select Yes all associated devices and alarms change to the newly assigned facility If you select No the facility change takes place only on the controller record The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Records generation You can configure your controller record to match the controller s physical module configuration Only those records that are needed are configured Controller record generation For Micro controller systems When you select a controller type on the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form a Power Comm module is automatically added to the Configuration column on the Controller Configuration tab of the Controller form The following records are created Alarm Records e Tamper e Power e Host Comm e If this is a network Micro a controller comm encryption alarm is created Note Micro PX 2000 modules shipped after November 1 2003 support the 11th DI as a low battery alarm for the controller Digital Input Records e Tamper e Power Chapter 4 93 Devices Digital Output Records Sixteen 16 Alarm Group Records As mentioned above all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 You can
44. 4 Facility Commander Wnx ServiceS 00 ccc cece cee ene e eee eect e ene eee e een eee eenees 4 Simple File Sharing on WinXP 2 cece cece eee eee eee ene eee nee teen eee eee ee EE eens 5 Configuring firewall and DCOM settings with SecurityCnfg 0 cece ccc cece e cnet ene e eens 5 NAVIGATION asinen dal batesediacdsadaneg eens doe sehGiegatieae et natasereetedueas ateaesaaeeeasad 7 Log on log off or Shut down the computer 0 0 2 occ cece cece tet beet eet rrr eee 8 AA ded etcmmavnnecdcdeeh E E 8 SAUNG GOWN eea A Aida 8 MGNUS wx sie iodo ene aiden A 8 Status Da donada o aaa ee ae 19 Creating editing and deleting records oooooooccoccccocccccra cnc rr 20 ao II O 20 EIN ECOS ci a A A A AA EA 20 Chapter 2 System preferencesS oocoocoocccccncoccnnrr rc 23 OVEIVIEW pcia rra lA AI A e DA AA esOee a bee ede 24 Configure preferences 22 sce eee i Hewes 24 System Settings tab ii ES 24 USAS TA a E EAE alee EN EAAS a e a 28 M de Threat Labels taba rca iaa iia 29 Address Fields tarda dd illa 30 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 3 Communications tab cvs obs 31 CIGGRAPCHIVE 10D i sieve see sb ids opens ann dg sega EEE NEE EEE EE EA 33 Backing UP OGG A aaa aaes Gu 34 A O AN 34 Appending Archive databases 0 cece nen eben b ene b ete n teen tees 35 Restoring database rd bbs 36 Secum Datos 37 ACW Settings tab ACW lloc ogden eeade ye ee EEEO EE ARE 39 Co
45. 73 Event Schedules TOD 0 556 ccciaci vacated cada ddanene we tad 73 Configure event Notifier ooocooiicinosiaoria icon ciar dara dada ideas 75 Alarm Selection tics A A idad lalala 76 Person Selection abi A cosa 77 Message Format tab a IA alt 78 Define mode schedules ocio cita o a A A ai 80 Modest idad dE ds 81 Mode Event Trigger forM oovcioiciniac rs a e ii RETES ERES 86 Chapter 4 Controller tucan Moab woes sodmodddd ceaeeeaaiunts 86 Whats NENT asi asis a A iia 87 AM ii A Aa e 87 DEVICES A IO A O ane R Rb adweeesss aos 89 OVERVIEWS ai td A A A id 90 Device configuration oomiicos iii A A V eve deb eave Me EEN EKER beads 90 Controllers OVErVIeW 0c ci ccese senda sdabsierdeds edeosetese sede bende te eae tedede a 90 Define Controllers 2 v cave terinin cias teen ode a A edad Vee Dee Te eke wea ewe beat 92 Records TAN ai A eee ee 92 Controller Defimtiom ta Dik oie E eben 99 SOCUNIY AOD ma a ada dddidhodnie E A anaemia 106 TIME ZONE AOD iene hts dada eneas so ce conattas AN 108 COMMENTS TOD si c5acncaces Wate ke A td 109 EVENTS TOD A A A E EEA E a 110 Status tada anodino icac 111 Controller Contiguration toba dw wend hada a E EEE 113 Global Area Control tab ai idad 115 Pont Settings AD ai 116 Settings to Reach HOSttd D enei E A EEE a E R EEEE LE 118 Settings to Reach Controller tab 2 2 0 0 cence rr ete eben ene eens 119 Controller flash and controller preference configuration cece eee cece en
46. A th OR ha Ea Cae R eRe eae Ee 238 ENE CICS AAA Swe ha aay 238 Overview intrusion ZONES 605 6 eg chee che nea eben eae taras 249 Delne PTO ON DER A aie es wen S 251 WHEE SFM a a 255 238 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview areas The Area form Places amp Policies group is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers The Intrusion Zone form Places amp Policies group is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Define areas Note The Area form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use the Area form Places amp Polices group to configure secure areas Your system supports up to 8 192 areas Complete the steps in the order presented 1 You must first configure ACU controllers Reader records are automatically created when you configure an ACU controller The controllers must be connected and online to arm disarm if the area spans controllers An area can contain alarm points entry and exit points readers neutral readers and digital outputs relays Areas can be local does not span controllers or global spans controllers Create areas The intended application is for arming and disarming areas from outside or inside the monitored areas Area is defined as a physical area with security controls Readers control access to the areas based on whether the cardholder has been given privilege to enter that area at that t
47. Administration group opens with a default record already displaying Use the Transaction Override form to manually enter an In or Out status for credential transactions that you want to enter into the selected database This information can be used by those who create reports to track view and verify employee transactions pair In and Out transactions or review total transactions Example This form may be appropriate for tailgaters Polite employees card in to unlock and exit a door and then hold the door for another person exiting the building The second person may not present their card If the reader is an APB or T A reader you may want to track pair transactions for selected credentials as a record of those that do not card when exiting Override tab Chapter 9 Monitor and control Use the Override tab to set up the credential transaction that you want to enter into history Figure 147 Override tab Table 201 Form fields Transaction Override Override ejes Person Credential Time Date Reader Type APB Neutral OAPB In O APB Out O T A Neutral O T A In O TXA Out 07 27 48 Gaeta Database Selection Reader 0018 1 01 Reader 10 13 08 Update Controller C FCWhs History FCWnx Archive Element Description Person Select a person from the drop down list Credential Select a credential from the drop down list of credentials currently in
48. Arm Disarm Select to allow arm disarm of this area using the reader keypad or manual control This feature is associated with IKE Readers designed for keypad arming disarming This feature also works with regular keypad readers by adding 10 20 None Arm Disarm by keypad is not enabled in this area Local Arm disarm is local to one ACU controller one area Global Arm disarm spans multiple ACU controllers and areas Complete the association by configuring the reader for Arm Disarm Type on the Reader form and assigning credential holders to this area How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 141 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital Output tab Note This tab is enabled for SCIF areas only Use the Digital Output tab to assign or unassign digital outputs associated with this area record This is a multiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available digital output points not already assigned to another area 247 248 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 107 Digital Output tab e Description amp Facility 7 Y Area Reader Alarm Digital Output Digital Outputs v lt a Table 142 Form fields Element Description Digital Outputs windowpane The list box on the right displays digital outputs assigned to this area Assign Click to display a Digital Output Assig
49. Click Save before you exit this tab Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab Note The Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab displays only if you select Floor Tracking By Input from the Floor Tracking field on the Elevator tab Select Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab to link a digital output and a digital input to a floor Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller Figure 88 Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab EE Elevator e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Digital Input Assigned Floor Digital Output Digital Input Digital Output Area Digital Input Add Chapter 4 Devices Table 111 Form fields Element Description Assigned Floor Digital This windowpane lists the currently assigned floors digital outputs digital inputs and area for ACU Output Digital Input controller systems Edit To edit a floor digital output digital input link select an entry from the list and click this button The Floor Digital Output Digital Input Selection dialog displays Add To add a floor digital output digital input link click this button The Floor Digital Output Digital Input Selection dialog displays Use this dialog box to create or edit a floor to digital output to digital input link e Floor Select a floor from the drop down list of availab
50. Description acility v Digital Output Schedule Manual Control amp Status Alarm Control DO Status lt Press Refresh gt Table 79 Form fields Element Description DO Status Displays the digital output status Click the Refresh button for updated status Manual Control Set state to e On for Duration Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state for the On time specified on the Digital Output tab e On Indefinite Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state until it is manually set to its inactive state The only way to turn it off is by selecting Off on this tab or Off on the Manual Door DO Control form e Off Click to set the selected digital output to its inactive state e Sched Can Override Use this option to change the state of the DO if you want the schedule to override its setting For example use Sched Override to unlock a door if you want a schedule at a later time to lock this door If you don t want the scheduler to lock your door use the On Indefinite selection Purpose Enter the reason for manually changing the state of the specified digital output The text entered here is recorded in Operator History How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 79 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 159 Devices Alarm Control tab Note The options on the Alarm Control tab are available and enabled fo
51. Edit Click Edit to display the Preset Camera Selection window You are able to edit an existing Preset and Camera combination associated with this event This option is disabled if there are no existing records Add Click Add to select a camera and corresponding preset The available presets for a camera display after you select the camera Click OK The addition now displays in the Assigned Preset Camera box Remove Select then click Remove to remove a Preset and Camera combination from the list of available combinations in the Assigned Preset Camera box This option is disabled if there are no existing records How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 124 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 220 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Readers tab Select readers and transaction types that become the source for initiating the event trigger Figure 97 Readers tab Video Event Trigger e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Areas Assigned Readers taaan 0018 1 01 Reader Valid Invalid Unknown Lost Tag Selection O None O Tag only Tag as event Assign Readers Table 125 Form fields Element Description Assigned Readers This pane displays readers assigned to this event trigger record Assign Readers Click to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assig
52. Edit the file path name as appropriate for the folder that you have created to receive the database Do not change the database name Click OK 7 Inthe Select a page pane click Options On the Options page select either Overwrite all existing backup sets or Append to the existing backup set We recommend that you append to the file 8 We recommend that you select Verify backup when finished Click OK to start the backup 9 Click OK when the Backup operation has been completed successfully message displays 10 Repeat these steps for each of the three FCWnx databases qs 22 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to accomplish administrator tasks Table 2 Administrator tasks Task Description Create controller records Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 92 Additional device records can be configured after creating controller records e Direct Connect Controller Record Click the Security Devices group Click the Controller icon Select connection type as Direct on the Definition tab PANE Complete all applicable fields and enabled tabs according to the type of controller e Dial up Controller Record that you are configuring Click the Security Devices group Click the Controller icon Select connection type as Dialup on the Definition tab Complete the Settings to Reach Host tab MnP wn pe Complete the Settings to Reach Controller tab Configure devices Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 90
53. FCWnx WebService FCWnx Manager is the main service and handles controller communications and alarms FCWnx Webservice handles the video media service This service is dependent on the System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts FCWnx Media Server is handled entirely by FCWnx Webservice This service requires no user intervention and starts and stops automatically FCWnx API Service is used when using an API interface This service is used when an external system is sending or receiving transactions by way of Application Program Interface to this application This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Note Changing the state of services without a good working knowledge of the purpose can cause the computer to act erratically Refer to Facility Commander Wnx services on page 4 411 412 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description Swipe and Show Note Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time If readers have not been selected the program does not start If Imaging is not licensed for the system this option is not available The Swipe and Show program is a monitoring and validation option available on the Activity Monitor form When properly configured and following a credential transaction the operator is able to observe a credential photo and text descript
54. Friday are required to present their credential and then key in a PIN number to enter the building Remember that an event stays in effect until another event occurs to change it Therefore in our example a second event needs to be scheduled to change that reader back to Normal on Monday morning Alarms amp Events Event Notifier Refer to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 75 1 Enter a unique description in the Description field for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters A facility option can be designated Review Table 42 and assign alarms that are to trigger e mail notifications Select one or both Transaction Type options Review Table 43 and assign people to receive notification A PWN Review Table 44 and format the e mail message qs 6 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Task Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Mode schedules Application Group Schedules Mode Schedule Refer to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 80 Es Click the add icon to begin a new record Enter a unique description in the Description field for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines in Table 46 and complete this tab Select the date 03 16 2006 from the calendar Date control Click Edit in the Assigned Controllers group box Select the controller ACU19588 from the controller list
55. Ignore Facilities v Controllers Alarms Assigned Alarms 0022 Host Comm Alarm Assign Alarms Table 48 Alarms tab Element Description Assigned Alarms Displays a list of assigned alarms Assign Alarms Opens the Alarm Assignment dialog Click on an Available alarm to select it and then click on the right arrow to move it to the Assigned window Click the left arrow to remove an assigned alarm from the list How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 47 and Table 48 to complete these tabs 2 Click Save before you exit these tabs To configure a Mode Event Trigger 1 On the Controllers tab click Add to select a controller a particular schedule Mode Optional and Micro only and a Threat Level 2 On the Alarms tab click Assign Alarms to assign a particular alarm or alarms that will cause these controllers to go to that threat level What s next Proceed to Devices on page 89 88 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 4 Devices This chapter provides an overview when defining configuring and assigning devices In this chapter CATIA oon cha aad te i Pee ae Pee Pee He Be 90 DIES CONGUE 3 cee ce ds Os SD bas COE ae eek we A eos 90 Controllers OVETVEETE sacra nise oe hee ha Gees Shaw Uh haw dia ed 90 Demne con oner e 65 ie a BO ee ORR AR eae wee 92 Controller flash and controller preference configuration 121 Derne FOOR ETS ok a emea a libe a Heb y Gees 12
56. Interfaces e Administration A Diagnostics Element Description Menu Bar Select a menu bar item to display a drop down group of related options Enabled options on the drop down menus are preceded with a check w icon File Click to display File menu selections See Table 6 on page 13 Search Click to display Search menu selections See Table 7 on page 15 View Click to display View menu selections See Table 8 on page 16 Reports Click to display Reports menu selections See Table 9 on page 17 Window Click to display Window menu selections See Table 10 on page 18 Help Click to display Help menu selections See Table 11 on page 19 Application Toolbar Click to access frequently used forms Person Opens the Person form Activity Monitor Opens the Activity Monitor Alarm Monitor Opens the Alarm Monitor 9 10 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 4 Form fields continued Element Description Graphics Console Opens the Graphics Console application If your system is licensed for this feature the icon displays Video Console Opens the Video Console application If your system is licensed for this feature the icon displays Manual Control Opens Manual Control Help With an application form displaying you can click the icon and then drag the over any area and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section o
57. Normal Shutdown Table 28 Form fields Element Description Backup Clients This list box displays those clients you have assigned to take over control of any nondirect controllers and DVRs in the event of a failure at the default client computer The order in which the client names display determines which client is next in line to take over The timing of the takeover is a variable see Takeover and recovery timing on page 57 Backup clients must be online FCWnx services are running In the event of a failover the client entry includes the client computer name and then the total combined number of DVRs and controllers of the default client and backup client e Move Up Select and click to move this client up the list e Move Down Select and click to move this client down the list e Assign Click to display a Backup Clients Assignment dialog box listing client computers found on your FCWnx system Those computers selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in the Backup Clients list box Backup clients must be configured correctly otherwise backup will fail Correct configuration of backup clients e Client B is the backup for Client A e Client C is the backup for both Client A and Client B Incorrect configuration of backup clients e Client B is the backup for Client A e Client C is the backup for Client B 55 56 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 28 Form fields continued
58. On s Open 10 10 2008 11 17 29 AM 3 0018 1 03 Reader PXN 18 O On a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 31 AM 3 0018 1 03 Supervised Exit PXN 18 Off a Open 4 0018 1 04 D PXN 18 On a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 29 AM 4 0018 1 04 Reader PXN 18 O On s Open 10 10 2008 11 17 31 AM 4 0018 1 04 Supervised Exit PXN 18 O Off a Open 5 0018 1 05 D PXN 18 On a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 29 AM 5 0018 1 05 Reader PXN 18 On s Open 10 10 2008 11 17 31 AM 5 0018 1 05 Sunervised Exit PXN 18 Off fa Open Table 194 Form fields Element Description Select controller e Select All to display the status for all digital inputs on all controllers e Select By controller to display the status for all digital inputs on a selected controller Click the drop down arrow to display a list of active controllers Refresh Click to get an updated status on the digital inputs A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes A reader and associated Dis are grouped together by reader number Note A refresh selected for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned and message is displayed 336 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 194 Form fields continued Element Description Column Headings Number Displays the number of the digital input assigned by the system Description Displays the description of the digital input A r
59. PIN entered on the keypad to gain access Credential or Keypad Entry This reader requires you to enter either a valid credential number on the keypad or a valid credential to gain access 125 126 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 61 Form fields continued Element Description Logical Type The following options are available for selection if this reader is associated with an ACU controller or Micro controller Normal Allows as many successive accesses as needed as long as the credential is valid Elevator This type of reader is used for elevator control For Micro controllers this type of reader is configured when the reader is assigned to an elevator record This is set up using the Elevator tab of the Elevator form For ACU controllers this type of reader is configured when the controller is changed to an Elevator controller Note For Micro controller systems The Elevator radio button is enabled when you assign this reader to an elevator on the Elevator form When you delete the elevator or unassign the elevator reader the reader logical type returns to Normal The following option is available for selection if this reader is associated with an ACU controller only APB Anti passback This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is used in an exiting area reader All controllers are updated For ACU controller systems when configuring an area for APB the entering and exiting
60. RAID Virtual Disk Size to Maximum Click Configure RAID Note If a window opens asking if you want to delete the existing virtual disk click Yes You are then prompted to reboot Click OK Installing the operating system Refer to appropriate section of the installation manual for details and instruction to configure the operating system Installing Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager Follow the instructions below to install and configure the Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager 1 Insert the Dell OpenManage Applications CD in the CD drive The CD autoruns unless this function has been disabled If disabled click Start Run Browse to navigate to the drive containing the CD and then select setup exe to display the Dell OpenManage Installation window 2 Click Next 3 At the Software License Agreement click Accept to continue the installation The OpenManage Installation Wizard displays 4 At the Select setup type screen click Express Setup 5 At the Select system type screen click Both to indicate that you are installing both Managed Node and Management Station A summary window displays the installation options you have selected and gives you an opportunity to verify the installation criteria make corrections or abort the installation When you are satisfied with the summary click Next 6 You are prompted to verify all options by asking Are you sure Click Yes to begin the installation A progress monitor displays listin
61. Regions tab Global Edition systems can be configured for database redundancy at the Regional level A Regional database server can assign another for backup in the event of a failure at the default Regional database server Regional database redundancy and file server redundancy operate independently One or the other or both can fail at the same time whether they reside on the same server computer or are configured to reside on separate computers FCWnx initiates three tries to fail over to another file server This process is taking place in the Chapter 2 System preferences background After three tries with no success an FCWnx FileServer interface attempts to locate an available file server If all attempts fail the interface generates an alarm Note If you select a failover Regional server and want your clients to failover to the backup server you must also select the Client Region Failover check box on the Client form Client tab Figure 11 Backup Regions tab Table 22 Form fields Bean PT e Description Region Backup Regions Backup Regions Element Description Backup Regions This list box displays those Regional database server computers that you have assigned to take over control in the event of a failure at the default Regional database server The order in which the computer names display determines which server is next in line to take over Backup Region Assignment Move Up S
62. SCIF features will be disabled on all other workstations Example e When armed readers do not allow access to anyone alarm points are monitored and readers ignore schedules e When disarmed readers allow access and alarms are not monitored Figure 144 Areas and Zones tab EA Manual Control e Reader Digital Output Alam DigitalInput reas Zones Mode Threat Guard Tour Cescription State Refresh List Refresh State Expand Expand All Collapse All is Sat state to Purpose Table 198 Form fields Element Description Navigation Windowpane Micro controllers Displays configured Intrusion Zones controllers and their associated alarms in a hierarchal structure Immediately following selection of a Micro controller the system searches and displays associated intrusion zone records in the list box ACU controllers Displays configured Areas controllers and their associated alarms in a hierarchical structure Immediately following selection of a controller the system searches and displays associated Area records in the list box 346 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 198 Form fields continued Element Description Columns in Windowpane Description Description of the elements in this application database e Armed Area Zone description displays current condition in red font e Disarmed Area Zone description displays c
63. Select the check box for Mode 7 from the Available Modes group box Click Save before you exit this tab Example modes LO 00 NOY a A Normal This mode is day of the week dependent and it is the default mode for the FCWnx system The remaining modes are not day of the week dependent Both schedules and events can be defined in terms of modes Sunday through Saturday configurations are only in effect in Normal mode Next you could define other modes such as Mode 1 as Half Day Holiday Mode 2 as Full Day Holiday Mode 3 might be Return to Normal Modes do not end Rather one mode replaces another as the active mode For systems using ACU controllers these additional modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Note Mode schedules created on the Mode Schedule form display as schedule options on the Event Schedule form and Time Schedule form You can change the label of your modes on the Preferences form Mode Threat Labels tab You must restart the FCWnx program for any changes to the Preferences form to take effect Quick Setup guide qs7 Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task 7 Configure devices e Controllers e Readers Application Group Security Devices Controller Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 92 B 1 Controller records can be created within FCWnx without having the controllers attached and configured Additional device records can be configured after
64. Select the operator you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all operators select lt ALL gt Form Name Select the forms you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all forms select lt ALL gt Person report form Use the Filters tab to generate a Person report Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated allowing you to narrow the selection of information displayed on your report Employee Last Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you want to list all persons leave these fields blank Department To provide additional filtering you can select to run a report on only those persons in a selected department Personnel Type To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those persons assigned a selected personnel type Schedule report form Use the Filters tab to generate a Schedule report Filter or select specific information you want to display on the report Controller From the drop down list select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt 361 362 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Time and Attendance History report form Use the Filters tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Employee Last Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you
65. Update Delete Table 102 Form fields Element Description Category Description Enter a description for the new category Then click the Add button This description will appear in the drop down list for the Category selection on the Alarm tab of the Alarm form Category List Displays a list of existing categories in alphabetical order Help Click to open the Help system Add Click the Add button to add a new category description to the Category List Update Select an existing category to change its description Then click Update to update the description in the Category List display Save Click to update an adjusted priority configuration OK Click to save any changes made and close this form The newly created Categories can be assigned to Alarms by using the Alarm Form Category Descriptions will be displayed in the Alarm Monitor when Alarms having assigned Categories occur Cancel Click to close this form without making any changes How to Chapter 4 187 Devices 1 Review the guidelines in Table 101 and complete the fields on this tab Click Save before you exit this tab Configure routing and bumping The Routing and Bumping form in the Alarms amp Events group lets you configure the routing of alarms to one or more client groups by time schedule or at all times Bumping is a term used to describe forwarding the alarms to an additional location e You must have client groups conf
66. a drop down list of threat levels to assign to this person Threat Level O A person assigned at this level can only access items that are at level 0 Threat Level 1 A person assigned at this level can access items at both level 0 and level 1 Threat Level 2 A person assigned at this level can access items at levels 0 1 and 2 Threat Level 3 A person assigned at this level can access items at all levels 275 276 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 160 Form fields continued Element Description Assigned access rights This windowpane lists any currently assigned access rights For Micro controller systems access rights define the readers that a credential may access For ACU controller systems access rights define the areas a credential may access Assign Area Exception Assignments Assign Click to display the Access Rights Assignment dialog box enabling you to select the access rights you want to assign or unassign for this credentialholder Select from the Available list those access rights you want to assign to this person The access rights that display in this list are those that were previously set up on the Access Right form Only access rights in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available access right e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an access right This windowpane lists
67. accuracy of the revised records Definition tab Use the Definition tab to assign or edit a bus address type host computer or poll time Figure 89 Definition tab Table 114 Form fields Chapter 5 207 Video Digital Video Recorder e Description Facility v Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status _ DWA Type v DVR Hostname v DYA Address Bus Address Host Computer Default Hostname Poll Time seconds Poll Interval Timeout 4 v mY Retry Interval Retry Count Element Description DVR Type DVR Hostname Select a DVR type from the drop down list This field is not available for edit on existing records When you click Save the number of camera records are created equivalent to the type of DVR you selected Select a DVR hostname from the drop down list This field is only used when configuring Host Computer IP Cameras DVR Address Enter a DVR Address a unique logical address associated with this DVR This field is not available to edit existing records This number is used in this software to uniquely identify the DVR and its related records Bus Address The bus address is a 2 digit field in the range of 1 to 32 The bus address refers to the physical DVR device address on the RS 485 bus and must be entered when multiple DVRs exist on a single bus and or for controlling cameras with PTZ capability When conf
68. active readers allowed by your license you receive a warning message e The reader record controls both the physical reader and how the door locks and unlocks See your controller and reader installation manual for information on how to connect readers to a controller Use the Reader form to modify the reader configuration e ACU only If this reader is associated with SCIF ACU only you cannot control this reader record unless you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting this reader For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 60 Form fields Element Description Description When reader records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmmm bb pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the reader number Example Micro record 00001 01 01 Reader This reader is on controller 1 module 1 reader 1 To change or add to this description select and enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each reader displayed to aid in locating the reader points on the physical
69. alarm graphics DVR Digital Video Recorder DVR Equipment that can provide digital video multiplexing and or recording The Video Console system program accessible from the Monitors and Controls group lets you monitor and control video multiple DVRs and their associated cameras The Video Console can also be accessed from the Application toolbar by clicking this icon 206 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Note On the Video Console window click Help for information about the program For additional information refer to the User Manual that came with your DVR for specific installation configuration and operation instructions Digital Video Recorder form Use the Digital Video Recorder form in the Security Devices group to configure DVRs NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Table 113 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique descriptive name for your DVR in the Description field Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new DVR from the Facility drop down list When you change a facility designation it changes the facility for the DVR only You receive a message displaying Do other devices change to the same facility as the digital video recorder Select Yes or No If you select Yes the alarm record and camera records change as well You need to verify the
70. and DOs In order for changes to migrate to additional form windows that may be open at the time of a change the open windows should be closed and then re opened before the device description is able to be seen Facility A facility option can be assigned for the camera from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Definition tab The Definition tab displays the camera channel address with which DVR this camera is associated and camera type configurable for Fixed or PTZ The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing from within this application Use the Camera form to edit the preferences of the selected camera record 216 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 94 Definition tab E Description A Description Address Enable T Facility Definition Presets Address DVMR Camera Type v Enable Camera 14 4 P Di Records o Table 121 Form fields Element Description Address This is a read only field for all cameras except IP Cameras The address of the camera is automatically assigned The address is a 2 digit number that corresponds to the camera channel on the back of the DVR When configuring IP Cameras edit the Address number to match the IP input number configured on the hosting DVR for this camera DVMR This is a read only
71. and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 The door opens b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 The door opens e Duress Valid No Passage Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the Preferences form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 The unlock time expired and the door did not open e Valid Open Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader A valid credential read occurs and the door opens e Valid No Passage Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader A valid credential read occurs but the door did not open within the configured unlock time This may be an indication of someone deciding not to pass through the door or an accidental read as someone passes a reader Invalid PIN A credential was presented at a reader and an invalid PIN was entered This message displays for as many times as you enter an invalid PIN unless Max Invalid Pin is configured on the Reader form Reader tab The creden
72. any currently assigned area exceptions This defines the access capabilities allowed denied allowed by schedule for a specific area Click to display the Person Area Exception Assignment dialog box enabling you to select areas to override the currently assigned access rights for this credential holder or add additional areas for access Figure 122 Person Area Exception Assignment dialog Person Area Exception Assignment x Area exception assignments Always Weally schedule Allow access at al times Deny access at al times Chapter 7 277 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 161 Form fields Element Description Available Areas Select from the Available Areas windowpane those areas you want to override the currently assigned access rights Select the area and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected Areas windowpane Selected Area Windowpane The areas that display are those that are currently assigned to override this record Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an available area Allow access at all times The default of this check box is selected An override area that is selected with this check box will allow access to this area at all times Deny access at all times An override area that is selected with this check box will deny access to this area at all times Allow access by schedule An override area that s selected with this check box wil
73. associated alarm instruction is not included in the message e If this check box is selected and there are no alarm instructions no instructions are included in the message Alarm Reset Text This text is how you want the alarm State to display to the receiver You can do one of the following e Accept the default alarm state entry as displayed in the language of the current operator e Select and replace the existing text with alarm state text in another language such as the language of the receiver You can also add to the text with additional text no more than 32 alphanumeric characters total describing the state Alarm Text Default alarm state text is Alarm displayed in the language of the current operator Reset Text Default alarm reset state text is Reset displayed in the language of the current operator 1 Review the guidelines in Table 44 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Example Alarm Information The information displayed on the e mail message may look similar to 0151 1 01 DI Alarm 10 16 02 15 20 59 where 0151 1 01 DI Alarm The controller module and reader The alarm state 10 16 01 15 20 59 The controller date and time 79 80 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define mode schedules Use the Mode Schedules form Schedules group to define the date and time a mode goes into effect The purpose of a mode is to allow the controllers o
74. at a reader or DI point Tour Ended Manually A guard tour was ended manually at the control station and not by presenting a credential at a reader or DI point e Tour Activity A tour point was hit along a guard tour Invalid Tour Activity e Double hit of any assigned tour point e A tour point is hit during a paused tour e If a tour has not started and its points are hit an invalid tour activity transaction is not generated e Tour Paused This previously started tour has been paused The clock time to complete this tour is temporarily stopped e Tour Resumed This previously paused tour has resumed The clock time to complete this tour is resumed Activity Monitor toolbar Area Zone When an area or zone is armed disarmed this column displays the description of the area or zone Location e Displays the DI or reader description e If an event trigger has been defined for associating video with transactions from specified readers a camera icon displays as part of the reader description When selecting a credential transaction identified with a camera icon right click to display the shortcut menu and then select a video option e If this credential is a guard tour credential this field displays the description of the tour point e If activity is manual control Client name displays Name e If this credential is assigned to a person the name of the person displays e If this ac
75. available within the Controller Monitor form select a controller from the list and right click For icon functionality on the Controller Monitor toolbar refer to Table 191 Table 191 Form fields Element Description Select Columns Display the Select Columns dialog box This option lets you select columns that you want to display on the Controller Monitor form by putting a check next to the column name When you click OK the selected columns are saved so you do not have to select again the next time the form is opened Note If you are licensed for Client Redundancy the column Default Hostname is available for selection If not licensed for Client Redundancy this selection is unavailable Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 191 Form fields continued Element Description Search Display the Search Criteria and Controller Selection dialog box allowing you to search and select controllers that you want to display on the Controller Monitor form Refer to Search criteria and controller selection below The Recall Search check box when selected recalls the last search criteria from the Search Controller form Help Display the Help system Search criteria and controller selection This dialog box lets you enter search criteria for available controllers from facilities to which you have access that you want to add to your view or remove from the list of displayed controllers based on the r
76. causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A refresh selected for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned and message is displayed Column Descriptions DO Number Number of the digital output e Description Description of the door DO in the database e Controller Description of the controller on which this digital output is found e Current State Displays the state of the digital output e Date Displays the date that the status was requested e Time Displays the time that the status was requested If this is a reader DO the states are e Lock The door is locked Unlock The door is unlocked Lock No Access The door locks and does not allow access If this is any other DO the states are e Active The digital output is in the Active state defined on the Digital Output form e Inactive The digital output is not in the Active state 338 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 195 and select the options you require Graphics Console Note This feature is available if you are licensed for graphics console Note The Graphics Console features are covered in detail in the Graphics Management Console GMC User Manual The Graphics Console option Monitors and Controls group opens the Graphics Console application that lets you view the maps of your facility that were create
77. change this on the Alarm Group form Note By default none of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section In addition all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 You can change the Alarm Group on the Alarm Group form For ACU controller systems Common alarm records Tamper e Power e Low battery e Host Comm e Controller COMM encryption ACURS controllers e Reader records e Alarm records e Input records e Output records ACU2XL ACU2XL Plus controllers 12 Aux DI records 12 Aux DO records Reader module record generation The reader modules listed in the Modules column on the Controller Configuration tab depend on the Controller Type you selected on the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form When you add a reader module certain records are automatically created For Micro controller systems e Reader records If adding a 2RP or 2SRP module two reader records are generated By default these readers are active and able to accept credential transactions Readers marked as Active count against your reader limit e Alarm records An alarm record is generated for each reader record If you selected Supervised when you added the module an additional alarm record is generated for each reader called Supervised Reader If you are adding a 2SRP mo
78. client on more computers than you have licenses for If not all computers require the license at the same time you can enable and disable the option for the appropriate computers Note Torun the License program click in this sequence Start Programs Facility Commander Wnx and then FCWnx License The License Setup window opens Follow instructions as displayed License has a separate Help system The license that you purchase determines what items display in the Application Group pane For example if you are not licensed for guard tours the Guard Tours group does not display 3 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Client server architecture FCWnx servers client workstations and network enabled controllers communicate over 10 100Mb Ethernet LAN WAN topologies Refer to Controller Definition tab on page 99 for a list of supported controller types Refer to the Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 Installation Manual Professional Enterprise or Global Edition Facility Commander Wnx services Windows uses special programs called services A service is a process that can start automatically when the system boots and remains running as a background process independently of anyone being logged in It runs regardless of whether anyone is logged into Windows or FCWnx In other words the computer must be turned on but no one needs to be logged in SQL Server 2005 2008 must be running for network clients to connect and share the SQL database
79. controllers The Digital Output Groups tab lets you assign groups of digital outputs to access rights 261 262 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 112 Digital Output Groups tab i Access Right Table 149 Form fields e Description A Facility v Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Digital Output Groups Assign Digital Output Groups ES Element Description Assigned Digital Output Groups This windowpane displays a list of assigned output groups for the current access right Assign Digital Output Groups Click this button to display and assign digital output groups to the selected access right Only DO Groups that are related to the same controller as the readers selected in the Access Right tab are available for assignment If no digital output groups display verify that digital output groups were set up on the Digital Output Group form The Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box displays when you click Assign DO Groups allowing you to select and assign DO groups you want to associate with the selected record Only DO groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group Click OK to display results in the Outputs Groups windowpane How to 1 Review the guidel
80. create personnel types and assign a default credential design to each personnel type Figure 116 Personnel Type tab Personnel Type Personnel Type Description Il Credential Table 153 Form fields Element Description Search Click to display a list of existing types Three personnel types come standard with this application e Permanent e Contractor e Temporary Description This field is required and accepts 64 alphanumeric characters Enter a basic description of the personnel type Credential Design Select a default credential design from the drop down list of available designs Your selected design prints whenever credentials are sent to the printer for people assigned the current personnel type Credential designs are created on the Credential Design form If you do not want the credential to imprint the default design the design can be changed when the credential is printed How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 153 and complete the fields on this tab Example You may want all Permanent Personnel to have a Portrait credential e Assign the Description as Permanent e Assign the Credential design as Portrait 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 267 268 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define departments The Department form Personnel group lets you create a department that you can then assign to a person record using the Person form Department selection
81. creating controller records Click the add icon B begin a new record The description of the controller should be unique and include where the controller is located and or how it is used For example 1 Building A2 North Telco Closet could represent Controller 1 located in Building A2 North in the Telco Closet This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 4 A facility option can be assigned for your new controller record from the Facility drop down list All devices such as readers alarms DOs and Dis added with the controller belong to the same facility as the controller If you edit the Facility option on an existing controller record a messages displays Do other devices change to the same facility as the controller If you select Yes all associated devices and alarms change to the newly assigned facility If you select No the facility change takes place only on the controller record The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 5 This form contains the basic information about the controller When configuring a controller complete the definition tab first Other tabs display depending on the selections you make on this tab 6 Review the guidelines and complete the fields on this form according to the controller type that you are configuring Security Devices Reader Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 123 E 1 When a controller record is created reader records are also created The
82. dependent on the size of the Archive database and the hardware components of your computer How to 1 Click Show Date to display the Earliest Date in Current Archive DB and Latest Date in Current Archive DB 2 Set the Start Date and End Date for the dates that you want removed from your database archive 3 Click Delete to clean that portion of your database archive The removal takes place in the background 33 34 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Backing up data A backup is a copy of selected data Since this application does not contain a backup option you can use any method you like to back up the data Because the server computer contains the database there is no need to back up your application folder on your client computers You should keep two sets of backups of the following server computer files e Database Contains configuration data such as credentials and controllers e History Contains current history including credential transactions and operator history e Archive Contains the latest copy of this application history data e Images Contains the picture files of credential holders e Signatures Contains the signature files of credential holders e Graphics Backup of this data is needed if you are using Graphics Console Contains the alarm graphics maps e Video Backup needed if you are using video surveillance options Contains the video files Note The server program must not be
83. display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to this operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Administration Figure 17 Permission form gt Permission e Description l Permission Forms Action File Reports None Personnel Credentials O Read Table 33 Form fields Places amp Policies Monitors amp Controls Alarms amp Events Security Devices Elevators Graphics Schedules Gateways amp Interfaces Administration Diagnostics TRE DA i Element Description Forms The information in the Forms windowpane can be viewed one of two ways 1 If a displays to the left of the form name then additional items are available Click to display additional forms You can also double click the Forms menu item to view the additional forms 2 Right click the windowpane to display the shortcut menu with these options Actions Four types of actions can be assigned Show by Action lists the actions None Read Update All followed by the forms assigned to them Operator displays the Operator form which shows permissions assigned to existing operators None means that no access is given to that form Read means that read only access is given The form and th
84. does not display displays improperly or items are missing lt MC Client Media f there is a problem playing live or recorded video from a camera and the problem exists on the user interface client side VMC Server Media f there is a problem playing live or recorded video from a camera and the problem exists on the server side database application or device errors VMC Clip Recording f there is a problem with recording or playing back video clips 379 380 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 205 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor continued Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages VMC Drivers Client If there is a user interface client side problem that seems to be related to a particular driver For example everything for a GE video recorder works well but there is no video for a camera on a Pelco recorder VMC Drivers Server If there is a problem on the server that seems to be related to a particular driver For example everything for a GE video recorder works well but there is no video for a camera on a Pelco recorder Diagnostic Viewer program When you select Diagnostic Viewer in the Diagnostics group the Diagnostic Viewer program opens The activities of your selected component are displayed Those items with the COM and Line as part of the component name have the highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage The Diagnos
85. drive with another hard drive with the same capacity and then restart the system The RAID controller automatically rebuilds the mirror hard drive For instructions on replacing a failed hard drive refer to the documentation shipped with your Dell PowerEdge System Installing OpenManage Server Assistant The OpenManage Server Assistant software provides tools to set up and configure the PowerEdge system components and software Installation includes drivers diagnostics and utilities Refer to the documentation and instructions shipped with your Dell PowerEdge System If you have a complete system failure where both hard drives are damaged or your system has no operating system installed follow the steps below 1 Set up the speakers monitor mouse and keyboard as directed by the documentation provided by Dell Attach the AC adapter and plug the power cable into a grounded power outlet Insert the Dell OpenManage Server Assistant CD into the CD drive If prompted select the appropriate language Accept the terms of the Software License Ho Pr q Pr e When the Welcome to Dell OpenManage Server Assistant window opens verify that the language is correct and then click Server Setup A The Server Setup window displays 8 Set the Time Zone and Day Date and Time and then click Start Server Setup Appendix A 395 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 9 When the Configure RAID Controller window opens select RAID 1 and set the
86. drop down list associated with this operator Select a language from the drop down list associated with this operator NM On WN Using the guidelines in Table 35 complete the field for FCWnx Password Authentication or the field for Active Directory Password Authentication qs 4 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Task 6 Define schedules e Time schedules y EY Schedules Time Schedule Refer to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 70 Click the add icon ET begin a new record Enter a unique description in the Description field This is a required field and accepts 64 characters A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines in Table 38 and complete this tab similar to the following steps Create 5 intervals for the five days of the week Monday through Friday from 8 00am 08 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this time schedule to a device such as a reader Example BocaHQ Normal Workweek would indicate a facility specific time schedule where BocaHg refers to a geographic location For example you can create a time schedule that is active Monday through Friday 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m This particular time schedule perhaps called Normal Workweek can be applied to the Access Right for Permanent Employees and you may want to turn off alarm monitoring during those hours
87. e Description Facility Ignore Facilities Y tt 08 30 ma aes 05 30 a to rife A E pa hie O CN Eaa cl REE ena al IE O EI METTET a H Element Description Time chart Click on the time chart to create and day of the week mode This creates a diamond that indicates that the event occurs at that time and that day of the week mode Note that the current event s diamond is selected Time is displayed in half hour increments by default To change the display increment click and hold the left mouse button on the right end of the bottom time bar then move the cursor to the left until you are at the desired time increment Then click the desired time If the point is incorrectly located you can drag and drop the point to the exact location you want Event Displays the number assigned to each event in the order the event is created The number assigned increments consecutively New Click to create a new event Each new event is created at 08 00 a m Sunday Delete Click to delete an event You can delete a schedule that is currently in effect The Delete button removes the most recent point you have created If you continue to click Delete additional calendar points disappear in the order they were created Deleting a schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is associated Any devices currently under the effect of the deleted schedule remain in
88. e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client group Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Routing Client Groups windowpane Select one of the following options Always Time Schedule BUMPING Select this option if you always want this client group to receive alarms Select this option to enable the Time Schedule drop down list and then select a Time Schedule from the list Client Groups This windowpane displays the names of client groups assigned to this bumping record Typically the client groups displayed here are different than those assigned to routing Assign Client Groups Click to display an Alarm Bumping Client Group Assignment dialog box that lets you assign client groups to the bumping record Only client groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client group Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Routing Client Groups windowpane Time To Bump Select the number of minutes to wait before bumping this alarm notification to an additional location if the alarm is not acknowledged or purged at the Routing work station The Alarm Monitor form indicates that this alarm is bumped The m
89. each person e Standard Data provides the last name first name initials personnel description department employee number and extended unlock time This information is also provided on the other report types for person reports e User Data provides up to 90 user fields on each person You can select which ones to include in the report If this is an Administration report the following options are available e Alarm Routing and Bumping provides a listing of schedule descriptions routing clients time to bump bumping clients routing clients assigned alarms and comments e Archive provides a listing of all the archive files currently in the Database directory e Client provides a listing of the clients defined on the system their region auto shutdown selection and whether they have an imaging license e Credential Format UBF provides a listing of custom credential format types data and parity layouts number of facility and credential characters and comments e Events provides a listing of events defined in the system e Event Notifier provides a listing of e mail alarm notification information defined in the system e Event Trigger provides a listing of defined event triggers defined in the system including intrusion zone events e Facility provides a listing of all facilities defined on the system e Floor provides a listing of floor descriptions and their associated floor selection numbers e Guard Tour provides informatio
90. easier to locate for backups and upgrades It is a shared folder which means other clients can gain access to the log files Each client computer has a set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that machine Diagnostic objects can be controlled remotely turned on or off All diagnostic objects can write messages to a common default logfile or any diagnostic object can write to a separate log file created and defined by the user Before any logfile can be deleted from this application you must re assign diagnostic objects to another logfile LogFile tab On the LogFile tab click Add to create a new logfile record or Search to display a list box of previously created LogFiles Figure 149 Logfile tab Logfile e LogFile Comper TT y LogFile Path Browse 375 376 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 203 Form fields Element Description Computer This field is unavailable when creating a new record The name of your computer displays in this field LogFile Name or identify your file e For FCWnx logfile names enter an sp1 extension Example COM1log spl e For GMC VMC logfile names enter 1og extension Example GMC log Path Designate the path and directory in which to place your LogFile Browse Click to display a Browse for Folder window allowing you to navigate to the directory in which to place your LogFile How to 1 Review Table 203 and co
91. event Arm Area arm transaction in progress Disarm Area disarm transaction in progress Invalid Area arm disarm transaction failed for one of the following reasons e Device or badging failed The areas are not secure e The arm disarm device is not a part of the selected area e The 10 second time period allowed for completion of the arm disarm process at keypad and reader has expired e The presented credential does not have access rights for transactions in the selected area Tag Selection Select one of the options None No tag is sent for marking a recorded video or manipulating the record rate Tag only A tag is sent for marking recorded video at the camera s current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the camera s record rate to its event record rate settings Assigned Areas This list box displays those Areas that you have assigned to this event trigger Assign Areas How to Click to display an Area Assignment dialog box listing available areas in your system Those areas selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in this list box The Area Assignment displays when Assign Areas is clicked on the Areas tab of the Access Right form or Event Trigger form The window displays a list of all areas for the controllers in the facilities available for assignment by this operator You can assign an unlimited number of areas to an access r
92. field This field displays the corresponding DVR with which this camera is associated Camera Type Select a type of camera behavior as Fixed or PTZ from the drop down list Enable Camera By default this check box is selected The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing from within this application and setting accessibility from the Digital Video Viewer Disabled cameras do not display on the Digital Video Viewer How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 121 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 5 217 Video Presets tab The Presets tab lets you assign previously defined presets to a camera Presets must first be defined on the Camera Preset form Presets are assignable to PTZ cameras only Assign predefined presets for the selected camera Note The Presets tab is unavailable for fixed cameras Figure 95 Presets tab eS Description A Facility 3 Definition Presets Assigned Presets Assign Camera Presets v Table 122 Form fields Element Description Assigned Presets This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned presets Assign Camera Presets Click this button to display the Camera Preset Assignment dialog box A list of available camera presets displays These presets were previously defined on the Camera Preset form e Select one or more presets from the available list and then click the right
93. for this alarm display in the Instruction windowpane providing guidelines for the operator to resolve the alarm condition Predefined Instructions were created on the Instruction form of the Alarms amp Events group Refer to Define instructions on page 163 Response This is a multi line dialog box allowing you to manually enter a response of up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the current alarm Acknowledge Click to acknowledge an alarm Forced acknowledgement to an alarm is required only if the Operator Acknowledge check box has been checked to enable this function on the Alarm form An alarm process state is either Unacknowledged or Acknowledged To acknowledge an alarm select the desired alarm and click Acknowledge The alarm button changes to reflect the acknowledgement and clears from the window after reset Chapter 9 Monitor and control Alarm Monitor toolbar Table 185 Form fields Element Description Remove All Click this button on the toolbar to remove all alarms on the Alarm Monitor regardless of whether the alarms are acknowledged or unacknowledged An operator must have an ALL permission for the Alarm Monitor in order to have access to this icon Remove Individual Click this button on the toolbar to remove one or more alarms without waiting for them to reset The alarms can be unacknowledged and cleared as long as it was not defined on the Alarm form as requiring an acknowledgment Select a series
94. for this form This template is automatically loaded whenever you open this report form You cannot undo this election however you can later display and assign another report as the default Table 6 File menu continued Chapter 1 Introduction Element Description Create Default Template Select this option to create a default report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Note If a specific date is part of this template it uses that date whenever this report is run therefore it is important to update the calendar criteria as needed Delete Template Select this option to delete the current report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template Check for Update This item is enabled when the Enable Auto Update option is selected on the Auto Update Configuration form of the Diagnostics group Each time you log in your system for this application checks for updates Also at any time you may select this item to begin a search of the configured Web site for updates to the system for this application This process searches for new upgrades compares the version and if the patch or update needs to be applied a dialog box displays a message e Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the update process e Click Cancel to close the dialog box and process the upgrade at another time e If the Web site cannot be reached a message i
95. frame Continue clicking to move the video backward one frame at a time Reverse Click to go from the current position to the beginning of the recording Pause Click to pause the video The pause state will automatically return to play after 30 seconds in both live and recorded video modes Play Click to start playing video Forward Pause Navigate to the video clip you want to view Click Forward Pause to view the next frame of recorded video Continue clicking to move the video forward one frame at a time Fast Forward Click to quickly advance to the end of the video recording Play Speed Click the bar and slide to adjust the playback speed of recorded video The DVR playback speed can be adjusted by this method from minimum to maximum speed Stop Click to stop playing the video File menu The File menu contains the following commands Table 133 Form fields Element Description Video Search Click to open the Video Search window where you can search for recorded video events based on the criteria specified Save Video Clip Click to display Save Video To File dialog where you can select the file format file name and the location in which to save the recorded video When these selections have been made click the Start Recording icon to begin recording Play Video Clip Click to display the list of recorded video stored in the VideoClips directory Navigate t
96. from the drop down list during which the controller automatically dials the host to upload transactions When the maximum disconnect time expires the controller dials the host only if this time schedule is active Note This setting operates independently from alarm reporting and dialing the host if selected on the Alarm form 1 Review the guidelines in Table 58 and complete the fields on this tab according to the controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Settings to Reach Controller tab Note The Settings to Reach Controller tab displays only when you are configuring a dial up head of line controller Use the Settings to Reach Controller tab to configure how the host dials the controller 119 120 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 43 Settings to Reach Controller tab Table 59 Form fields e Description ACUXL O Dial at startup Facility Ignore Facilities vi Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Settings toReachHost Settings to Reach Controller Phone numbers to reach controller Dial interval Number 1 None m O 1 Hour Number 2 O 8 Hours O 12 Hours O 24 Hours Same number retries 0 Retry interval 30 sec 1 C Host call back Element Description Phone Numbers to Reach Controller Dial Interval Enter the t
97. input is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters 2 A facility option can be designated The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of a DI to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form You cannot delete digital input records The number of digital inputs is based on the controller you set up and modules that the controller contains Security Devices Digital Output Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 154 1 When DO records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmmm bb pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital output is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmm b pp prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating t
98. intrusion zones to the selected access right If no intrusion zones display verify that intrusion zones were configured on the Intrusion Zone form The Intrusion Zone Assignment window displays when Assign Intrusion Zone is clicked on the Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form or the Event Trigger form The window displays a list of all intrusion zones for the controllers in the facilities available for assignment by this operator You can assign an unlimited number of intrusion zones to an access right e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available intrusion zone e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an intrusion zone Click OK to accept the selections and display the intrusion zones in the Assigned Intrusion Zones list box Note If you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an intrusion zone due to a schedule in that access right you are not able to arm disarm a zone How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 150 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Areas tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use the Areas tab to assign areas to an access right and assign a time schedule Areas are owned by ACU controllers Figure 114 Areas tab Table 151 Form fields Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials t Access Right e Desc
99. is complete a Mass Update Complete dialog message displays Right click and select Mass Update from the shortcut menu to disable and exit Mass Update mode The records refresh at this point Updates display in the list box to the right 294 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Criteria for using Mass Update mode Note The time to process a mass update depends on your system performance number and type of updates Specifically the credential learn and alarm processing functions may be influenced We recommend that you schedule mass update processing during off peak hours for your company 200 is the default maximum number of records that can process updates at one time To reconfigure this default call GE Security Customer Support for assistance Only those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are enabled in Mass Update mode Navigating from any form to another form in Mass Update mode takes that form out of Mass Update mode Alarm form The following fields are available for mass update Facility Category Settings Monitor and Operator acknowledge Priority Instruction and Monitoring Time Schedule See Define alarms on page 165 Person form The following fields are available for mass update Facility Personnel Type Department Threat Level Access Assigned Access Rights Area for Auxiliary Relay Control Areas for arm disarm Trace activity Privileged APB Conditional unlock Exten
100. location on the internet or intranet as long as their URLs are currently recorded in the FCWnx ini update file 2 Copy the installation file ReadMe file and FCWnx ini file to the computers identified in the previous step Setting up Auto Update in FCWnx Use the Auto Update form in the Administration group to configure your FCWnx network computer for automatic notification and installation of the latest FCWnx Quick Fixes and service packs Figure 148 Auto update Table 202 Form fields ES Auto Update C Enable Auto Update HTTP Server Path Appendix A 373 Diagnostics and troubleshooting http HTTP Server User Name if required HTTP Server Password if required Repeat HTTP Server Password Update Message Text Element Description Enable Auto Update Select this check box to enable the Check for Update item of the File menu Settings HTTP Server Path This is the server to which you need to connect in order to search for available updates This field may look something like the following http gesecurity com HTTP Server User Name Enter the User Name used to reach the HTTP server if required HTTP Server Password Enter the password used to reach the HTTP server if required Repeat HTTP Server Password Enter the password used to reach the HTTP server a second time as a security check Note This application supports Basic Authentication only and not Integrat
101. minute until arming Note Note Readers with the matching exiting area will beep such as the reader on the inside of the door After the prerequisites are met e The area arms e Ifthe user is monitoring the Auto Arm on Inactivity alarm the alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor form e A Zone Armed message displays on the Activity Monitor Arm Delay Timer sec Set the amount of time in seconds that is allowed for the credential holder to exit the area before the alarms are monitored When configuring the alarm points to be used in the secure area make sure that you set the Held Open Options The default is 0 which means that the timer is disabled This field has a range from 0 to 255 minutes This field is selectable only for areas using either Local or Global in the Keypad Arm Disarm field Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones Table 141 Form fields continued Element Description Disarm Digital Output device Enter or select a number that represents the digital output relay associated with this number area alarm This entry can be a number between 0 and 175 The default is 0 that is no digital output is activated for this alarm Refer to the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers Installation Guide for additional information regarding index numbers assigned to digital outputs as presented to the ACU controller Note If the secure area spans ACU controllers this DO is activated across controllers Keypad
102. never expires If this check box is not selected the two remaining fields are available Expires in days This field is not available if Password never expires is selected From the drop down list of available time periods select number of days that pass before the password assigned to the current operator expires The selections are 30 60 90 120 or 180 days Warn prior to expiration days This field is not available if Password never expires is selected Enter or select the number of days before the expiration of the operator s password that a warning message displays indicating that the assigned operator password is about to expire The number of days in this field must be less than the number of days selected in the Expires in days field When this option is selected a message displays when logging in to FCWnx informing the operator of the number of days until the password expiration occurs e Select Yes to change the password immediately e Select No to continue using FCWnx and change the password at a later time If the password has expired the operator can no longer log on If the operator does not have permission to change the password the operator is instructed to contact the FCWnx Administrator to change the password These warnings are logged as operator history transactions and can be retrieved by running a report on operator actions using the System Operator filter for Login Name Chapter 2 System pr
103. not enabled until you select a client group e From Select the mode the system must be in for this schedule to occur e To Select the mode the system changes to when this schedule occurs Available Controller Modes ACU A list of available modes displays here Eight modes are available and enabled for only selection ACU controllers can be active in up to eight modes at one time How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 46 and complete this tab Example modes Normal This mode is day of the week dependent and is the default mode for the FCWnx system The remaining modes are not day of the week dependent Both schedules and events can be defined in terms of modes Sunday through Saturday configurations are only in effect in Normal mode Next you could define other modes such as Mode 1 as Half Day Holiday Mode 2 as Full Day Holiday Mode 3 as Three day Weekend For ACU controller systems these additional Modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Chapter 3 83 Schedules Mode 7 Mode 8 Note e Mode schedules created on the Mode Schedule form display as schedule options on the Event Schedule form and Time Schedule form e Youcan change the label of your modes on the Preferences form Mode Threat Labels tab You must restart the FCWnx program for any changes to the Preferences form to take effect ACU controller systems Mode schedules in ACU controller systems are mainly used to overrule the regular time schedule
104. not hit real time status You do not have to refresh your window to see the current state of the tour points for the selected tour e Last Hit Time This column has an entry following a valid hit to this point Set tour to e Start Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to manually begin a guard tour The Tour State column indicates Tour Started e Stop Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to prematurely stop a tour in progress The Tour State column indicates Tour Not Started This button is not available if a tour is not in progress e Resume Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to resume a tour that was previously paused The Tour State column indicates Tour Started This button is unavailable if a tour is not in progress This button is not available if the time assigned for the selected tour has expired e Pause Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to pause a tour that is currently in progress The Tour State column indicates Tour Paused This button is unavailable if a tour is not in progress e Purpose Specify a reason for stopping or starting this tour Enter a brief statement about the operator s actions How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 200 and complete the fields on this tab Transaction override The Transaction Override form
105. not necessary to complete an entry in this field 8 On the Settings to Reach Host tab e Enter the telephone number s that the controller dials to reach the host e Micro only Enter the interval at which the controller automatically dials the host e Micro only Enter the number of times the controller tries the same number Enter the number of intervals that the controller waits before trying a telephone number again e ACU only Enter the Maximum disconnect time in minutes e ACU only Select a time schedule on when to dial the controller optional 9 On the Settings to Reach Controller tab e Enter the telephone number s that the host dials to reach the controller e Micro only Enter the interval at which the host automatically dials the controller e Micro only Enter the number of times the host tries the same number e Enter the number of intervals that the host waits before trying a telephone number again e ACU only Enter the Maximum disconnect time in minutes e ACU only Select a time schedule on when to dial the controller optional 10 On the Controller Configuration tab select the modules that are in the controller you are setting up Click the desired module in the Modules and drag to the Configuration column To delete a module from the Configuration column select then right click and select Delete 11 Click Save to save the record If there is any required information missing a message displa
106. number of records depends on the controller that you configure and the reader modules that the controller contains 2 When reader records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmmm bb pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the reader number It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each reader displayed to aid in locating the reader points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters 3 The reader is automatically enabled as Online and Active and configured to accept credential transactions when a reader record is created A facility option can be designated 5 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the reader type that you are configuring qs 8 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Task Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Digital inputs Digital outputs Digital output groups Y w wW Security Devices Digital Input Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 144 1 When the records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmmm bb pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital
107. of alarms in sequence or individual alarms not in sequence Help Displays the Help system Response Click to display a list of predefined responses Predefined responses are created on the Alarm Response form Refer to Define alarm responses on page 164 If the entire list does not fit scroll bars become available on the right of the window Select a response and click OK for the selected response to display in the Response windowpane of the Alarm Monitor form e You can manually extend the response by placing your cursor at the end of the entry and appending to a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters e You can append an additional predefined response without overwriting the existing entry e When you append an additional predefined response to the existing entry a warning message displays if the response exceeds 256 characters The additional response is not appended The selected response is recorded in alarm history when the alarm is acknowledged Acknowledge Click to acknowledge an alarm Forced acknowledgement to an alarm is required only if the Operator Acknowledge check box has been checked to enable this function on the Alarm form An alarm process state is either Unacknowledged or Acknowledged To acknowledge an alarm select the desired alarm and click Acknowledge The alarm button changes to reflect the acknowledgement and clears from the window after reset Alarm Monitor shortcut menu Table 186 Form fiel
108. of each field is entered in the User Fields or Address fields on the Person form Note Global Edition systems To ensure successful e mail alarm notification across regions in a Global configuration the Global database server and all Regional database servers must have identical configuration settings That is 1 For all servers in your Global system the user field selected for the To E mail Address Field must be identical While configuring each server select the field that represents the e mail address from the drop down list 2 All other alarm notification information is specific to the Regional database server SMTP E mail Server Enter the name of the server that handles the transfer of e mail to and from the e mail addresses This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up to 256 alphanumeric characters From E mail Address Enter an e mail address of the account or person that is generating this alarm notification such as spadmin aol com This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Allow Anonymous Access This check box is selected by default permitting the transmission of an e mail alarm notification without further authentication The E mail User Name and E mail Password dialog boxes are not available for entry and not required with default settings If the security requirements of the e mail server require further authentication clear the check box to make available the dialog boxes fo
109. on graphics maps For example start with a floor plan and place symbols on the map to indicate their location and then link these symbols to a physical device In addition you can add text to create labels and print the graphics maps The Graphics Editor also lets you import gif jpg jpeg or AutoCAD dxf files to be used in creating your graphics maps Chapter 9 339 Monitor and control Graphics Console Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Console provides a graphical view of the premises and allows an operator to locate alarms or events as they occur such as a door held open alarm Operators can issue commands such as locking and unlocking doors Manual control form Note Functions associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form Exception ACU only If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller door DO alarm and DI functions can be controlled The Manual Control form Monitors and Controls group allows the operator to perform the following depending on the operator s facilities and permissions e Manually lock unlock doors e Turn on off DO digital output e Monitor on off alarms and alarm groups e Enable disable DI inputs e Arm disarm areas and intrusion zones e Change the mode or threat level of a controller
110. only when it is necessary to selectively flash an older version of firmware on a controller This application automatically selects the latest version by default Click OK to begin the flash When flashing is complete the controller resets and requests a database M5 PX and Micro PX 2000 The form opens with the latest e 1 firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older firmware file Micro 5 PXN and Micro PXN 2000 The form opens with the latest e 1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file MicroPXNPlus and MicroPXNPlus2000 The form opens with the latest e f1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file DirecDoor The form opens with the latest e 1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file ACUXL and ACURS The form opens with the latest s19 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file ACUXLPlus The form opens with the latest ef1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file Browse Click to navigate to another media source or directory where firmware files reside Override Block Checking Ignore this check box This selection is for Customer Support use only N
111. option is available only when a form that contains records is open 15 16 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 7 Search menu continued Element Description Search The Search option conducts a search in the database for all records that match the search criteria data you enter in the form The records found by the search are displayed in the search results window Data can be in any number of fields in the form or any number of tables Only records that match all fields in which data is entered are displayed An asterisk can be entered in text boxes to indicate wildcard characters The Search option is available only when a form is open that contains records examples e Enter S in an appropriate text box to display any records beginning with S e A search for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers If no search data is entered all records display Any column displaying in the list box can be sorted by clicking on the column heading Table 8 View menu Element Description Status Bar Status Bar is a toggle option and determines whether or not you view the status bar at the bottom of your screen Clear the check box to hide the status bar from view The status bar displays the status of this application indicating the current operator communication port status and whether there are unacknowledged alarms Also see Status Bar on page 19
112. qs 27 E View Remove Alarms from the Alarm Monitor form on page qs 28 view Graphics Console on page qs 28 If your system is licensed for this feature the following icon is available La View video console on page qs 26 If your system is licensed for this feature the following icon is available D Manually control DIs DOs areas intrusion zones on page qs 27 id Access Help How to accomplish administrator tasks on page qs 22 How to accomplish operator tasks on page qs 26 Configure devices on page qs 22 Arm Disarm on page qs 26 areas and intrusion zones Configure guard tours on page qs 22 View video console on page qs 26 Configure Monitor redundancy on page qs 22 Manually control Dis DOs areas intrusion zones on page qs 27 Create controller records on page qs 22 Monitor Activities on page qs 27 Create Credential Designs on page qs 23 View Graphics Console on page qs 28 Create Access Rights on page qs 23 View Remove Alarms from the Alarm Monitor form on page qs 28 Create Person Records on page qs 23 Create Reports on page qs 28 Mass Updates on page qs 24 Alarm Routing and Bumping on page qs 24 Set Automatic Logoff Time on page qs 24 Diagnostics on page qs 25 Contact Customer Support on page qs 25 qs2 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to configure a system in recommended sequential order Table 1 Quick setup sequence Element Description Task 1 Define preferences
113. text as desired 10 Click Save Credential Designer form Complete the Credential Designer form Credentials group to create credential designs Credential designs are the graphics printed on credentials You may want to use different graphics for different types of personnel such as a specific graphic for regular employees and a different graphic for contract employees within your organization Table 164 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description for this credential design During installation of Credential Designer four standard credential designs are included in the Designs folder of this application e Landscape e Portrait e No Design e Wanted Poster Do one of the following e Select from the list of existing standard design records e Select and edit a standard design by renaming and saving e Create a new design Note When you add a design enter a description and click Save to enable the Edit Credential Design button on this form Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Chapter 7 285 Access rights departments persons and credentials Design tab Use the Design tab to create a new credential design record If you are editing an existing design these options are no
114. that state until changed manually or by another event schedule Chapter 3 75 Schedules Table 40 Form fields Element Description Event Details Use event details to verify and modify selections made in the calendar display e Event time Display and modify the time at which the event occurs e Mode day Display and modify the mode or day on which the event occurs How to 1 Review Table 40 and create an event using the guidelines listed 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Example BocaHQ Weekend Begins indicates a facility specific event schedule where BocaHo refers to a geographic location For example you could create an event beginning each Friday at 6 00 p m that resets the APB status and the T amp A status and sets a reader to Credential and Keypad Employees coming into the building after 6 p m on Friday are required to present their credential and then key in a PIN number to enter the building Remember that an event stays in effect until another event occurs to change it Therefore in our example a second event needs to be scheduled to change that reader back to Normal on Monday morning Configure event notifier Note Keep in mind that you can use an SMTP server such as Lotus Notes or SendMail or even online mail services such as Yahoo to send e mail Contact your local network administrator to get the SMTP server name to be used E mail sent by FCWnx are sent through this SMTP server If you receive an e
115. that has the digital output is disabled How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 71 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab DO Groups tab Use the DO Groups tab to link digital output groups to a digital input When this digital input is triggered the linked digital output groups are also triggered The digital outputs follow the settings selected under either Reader DO Actions or Auxiliary DO Actions If you selected a primary local group not applicable for ACU controller systems and the Micro controller is offline the output follows the state of the alarm For example if the alarm is active the output goes to an active state and if the alarm is reset the output goes to an inactive state Note Be aware that Invalid Credential alarms and Lost Credential alarms do not reset If you assign a DO Group to either of these alarms the alarm goes inactive or turns off when acknowledging or purging Note This tab is only available for Digital Output types Chapter 4 Devices Figure 54 DO Groups tab Digital Input e Description Facility v Output Groups Assign DO Groups Reader DO Actions Auxiliary DO Actions Active Active Lock No On Indefinite x Inactive Inactive Indefinite Unlock v On Indefinite v lt gt Table 72 Form fields Element Description Output Groups This windowpane displays assi
116. the data can be restored using the Database Maintenance Utility for this application Backup and restore functions are detailed in the installation manual The Database Maintenance Utility for this application also appends credential history alarm history operator history and where appropriate digital input history zone history and DVR history data to the current Archive database Current archive data is not affected 36 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual In order to use the Append utility you must meet the following criteria Backup Archive files must be restored to a local or mapped network directory folder Free disk space that equals at least three times the size of your database backup file The sa password available Sufficient time and patience to complete the procedure To append data 1 2 PA e w D Open the Database Maintenance Utility and select Append from the menu bar Navigate to the drive on the local computer where the backup file is located Select the folder in which the backup file is located Select Archive from the Backup Source File list Drag and drop the backup Archive file to the Archive databases Only dialog box Enter the sa password Click Append The Append process can take a considerable amount of time depending on the size of the backup During the Append process the application looks like it is not responding This is normal When you have finished using the data we recommen
117. the database Time Accept the default or select and enter over the default time Note The current time and date are displayed by default Date Accept the default date select and enter over the default date or click calendar to enter a date Calendar Click to display the calendar Reader Type Select a reader type Reader Select a reader from the drop down list of available readers for assignment by the current operator Update Controller Enable this field if you want to send this transaction to the controller Database Selection Select either the History database or Archive database Generate Click this button to enter the transaction into the database 351 352 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 201 and complete the fields on this tab What s next Continue with Chapter 10 Reports on page 353 Chapter 10 Reports This chapter provides an overview of the reporting capabilities within this application In this chapter E 5 a bn bi haa th hee hades a ae Paks eae oe 354 DESIRING EPA do ee Oe a 355 Tabs on report JOME ee rira ca ea we eh Rw Lhe Haw bhai HRA LAs a 356 PIERRE sob ee GR he he Me Sw shee as 367 Saving Exporting Reports ss srirerre ritratta stakra eens 369 354 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview FCWnx provides extensive reporting capabilities based on your system configuration Note All reports are selections on the Reports d
118. the facility of an alarm group to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 3 You cannot delete an alarm group record Alarm groups are owned by the associated controller record Use the Alarm Group form to assign events or schedules to alarm groups 4 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Elevators Elevator Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 193 1 Decide which method of elevator control you want to use The methods of implementing elevator control No floor tracking method Floor tracking by input Floor tracking by keypad 2 Depending on the type of controller used in your system for this elevator your configuration steps vary 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Quick Setup guide qs 11 Element Description Task Application Group Configuring elevator control using a Micro controller 1 2 Create floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select Method of elevator control Readers Verify that readers are active on the Reader form Floors You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only Wh
119. the file with the FIRST or oldest entry in the viewer Read form end of file Enable this option to open the file with the LAST or most recent entry in the viewer The current line number number of entries displayed and total number of entries in the log are displayed in the status line of the Diagnostic Viewer screen Help system Help Selection of this option starts the FCWnx Help system Additionally with an application form displaying you can click the icon and then drag the over any area and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section of your form Appendix A 385 Diagnostics and troubleshooting User Manual Selection of this option launches Adobe Acrobat and displays this manual the Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual About the application Selection of this option opens a screen displaying the software version service pack number copyright information licensing information and contact information Questions and answers Database Question How can I test the integrity of my database The Integrity utility runs automatically following a database creation or conversion and upgrade from a previous version of this application No user interaction is required The utility can be run manually if you want to check your database integrity The system compares and validates the integrity of your database schema If selected the system automatically corrects missin
120. the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new digital output record from the Facility drop down list The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made WARNING Be careful when assigning the facility of a digital output to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment Chapter 4 Devices Digital Output tab Use the Digital Output tab to schedule when the digital outputs in the group are in the active state and for the specified length of time Figure 58 Digital Output tab Digital Output Description Facility v Controller AAA Module Number Active state On time On Minutes Seconds Oot A Comment Table 77 Form fields Element Description Controller This is a read only field Displays the description of the controller on which this digital output is located Module This is a read only field When the records are created the default value is in the format mmmmm bb Module Type where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated bb represents the module number and Module Type is the type of reader module such as 16DO Micro Example 00001 01 16DO would be the digital output
121. the selected video file to a CD Help Click to access the Help system Chapter 5 227 Video 1 Review the guidelines in Table 129 and complete this tab Note If you choose to record a video clip to a CD performance is compromised If you have other surveillance windows open close them You may want to continue surveillance at another computer while the video is recording to CD 2 GE Security uses only Roxio Direct CD software If you have a recordable drive and Roxio Direct CD software Note If you purchased your system from GE Security Roxio software was provided for you a Double click the file name of the video you are going to record b Verify the path c Verify the naming convention of the video d Verify the recording drive and device e Click to begin recording The button displays red while recording If you want to stop the recording in progress click the red button f Follow the directions and prompts as they display in the popup windows DVR disk is full This warning notification may display when the DVR internal disk for storing video is reaching its full capacity Refer to the DVR User Manual for specific information on configuring disk management options 228 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Navigating Video Console Video Console in the Monitors amp Controls group allows operators to view live and recorded video select different cameras and direct cameras to a pres
122. time the controller continues to wait for a valid credential access before implementing the schedule If a Lock schedule is selected this feature is grayed out and not available for selection Example This is particularly helpful if a snowday or hurricane prevents employees from entering the building at the normal time Although the current schedule would normally unlock the door the door remains locked until the first employee arrives at the reader and presents a valid credential Note For systems with ACU controllers The person record and credential record must be enabled for Conditional Unlock How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 64 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Routing Schedule tab Note The features on the Routing Schedule tab are available for Micro controller systems only Use the Routing Schedule tab to select the schedules that are used to determine when valid transactions are sent to the history file monitor and or printer Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the routing of the transactions changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the routing of the transactions returns to the nonscheduled value For example if valid transactions are scheduled to route to history the transactions stop being routed to history at the end of the schedule
123. time Displays the time on which the time interval ends Mode day Displays the mode or day on which the interval schedule occurs How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 38 and complete this tab similar to the following steps A PY y Enter the description Time Schedule 8 5 in the Description field Create 5 intervals Monday Friday from 8 00am 08 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 Create 1 interval for Mode 7 from 8 00am 08 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this time schedule to a device such as a reader Note the example below Example BocaHQ Normal Workweek would indicate a facility specific time schedule where BocaHQ refers to a geographic location For example you can create a time schedule that is active Monday through Friday 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m This particular time schedule perhaps called Normal Workweek can be applied to the Access Right for Permanent Employees and you may want to turn off alarm monitoring during those hours 1 On the Reader form select Building 1 Lobby Door reader record 2 On the Functions Schedule tab of the Reader form select a Door schedule entitled BocaHQ Normal Workweek from the drop down list of Time schedules 3 Select Unlock Chapter 3 73 Schedules 4 The result is that the selected reader unlocks the door based on the time schedule as configured for BocaHQ Normal Workweek Define event schedules Micro only Note E
124. to 255 seconds This time limit should allow a person to pass into or out of a monitored area before the zone is armed Note If your system is UL Listed the delay cannot exceed 60 seconds Refer to the UL Certification Requirements in your installation manual 1 Review the guidelines in Table 144 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 253 254 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Status tab The Status tab displays the status of all devices associated with this zone and status of the Zone Figure 109 Status tab Table 145 Form fields Intrusion Zone Facility q Intrusion Zone Status Description Status Description Element Description Status This list box displays the status of all devices associated with this Zone and status of the Zone Reader Status Zone Status Armed Disarmed Digital Input On off trouble Digital Output Status Active inactive Reader Status Online offline Alarm Status Monitored on monitored off Refresh Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last status Refresh request How to 1 Perform a search 2 Select an intrusion zone record 3 Click Refresh Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones Arm disarm an intrusion zone Arm disarm an intrusion zone using access rights Any credential and keypad reader or keypad within a defined zone can be used to arm and disarm the zone w
125. to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this area Assigned readers display in the Entering Area Readers windowpane This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to enter an area Note Ifthe area is to be configured as APB the entering area reader associated with this area must also be configured for APB Select APB as the logical type on the Reader form Reader tab for this reader Exiting Area Readers Click Assign to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Area Assigned readers display in the Exiting Area Readers windowpane This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an Area Note Ifthe area is to be configured as APB the entering area reader associated with this area must also be configured for APB Select APB as the logical type on the Reader form Reader tab for this reader 244 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 140 Form fields continued Element Description Neutral Area Readers Click Assign to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Area Assigned readers display in the Neutral Area Readers windowpane This reader indicates a valid credential read but does not indicate an IN or OUT state Note Neutral areas are not associated with APB Reader Assignment dialog window This window displays when you click Assig
126. to open the Area Time Schedule Selection dialog box allowing you to change the associated area or time schedule The Area Time Schedule dialog box lets you select and assign an area and time schedule for public access associated with this elevator record Only areas in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select an area from the drop down list e Select a time schedule from the drop down list to associate with the selected area Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Area Time Schedule windowpane Click Cancel to terminate and close this window The entries are not saved Add Click Add to open the Area Time Schedule Selection dialog box allowing you to assign an area and time schedule to associate with this elevator record Note The Add button will not be enabled until this record is saved The record must first be saved in order for the areas for selection to display Remove Select an area or time schedule and then click to delete from this elevator record How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 109 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 Devices Floor Digital Output tab Note The Floor Digital Output tab displays only if you select No Floor Tracking or Floor Tracking By Keypad from the Floor Tracking field on the Elevator tab Select the Floor Digital Output tab to link a digital output to a floor Note Elev
127. v Floor Selection Table 107 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a description for the floor Floor Selection Click the drop down list of numbers to select a floor number or enter the floor number using your keyboard Duplicate numbers are acceptable Micro controller The drop down list for assigning a floor to a description accepts two character floor numbers and a maximum of 64 floors ACU Controller If your system is licensed and configured with an ACU controller the drop down list for assigning a floor to a description accepts three character floor numbers and a maximum of 128 floors How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 107 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define elevators Use the Elevator form in the Elevators group to define elevators Decide which method of elevator control you want to use Methods of elevator control Note Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record If you want to change an existing record delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking method 194 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual No floor tracking method With this method you define the floors available and define a digital output relay for each floor Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used In addition
128. validate the Enabled status You may need to log off and log on again in order for the selection to take effect 3 If you are licensed and Imaging is enabled the Edit Credential Design button becomes enabled allowing you to enter the Credential Design program Sample credential designs are provided to get you started Appendix A 399 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Question What is wrong when I run Diagnostic Viewer try to open a file and only one logfile shows in the Logfile Dialog This indicates the database cannot be accessed Test the database connection by following the steps in I get a connection error when I try to start the client software What should I do now on page 391 Question Why do Services shut down while Diagnostic Viewer is running A dialog box pops up and displays the message Diagnostic Manager Service has Shutdown After I restart services no new messages are displayed Communication has been lost with the services and the file needs to be reopened again when the services are up and running Question What is the order in which the services should be shut down and started Shutting down the Diagnostics Service shuts down the other Services Refer to your Installation Guide for a detailed description of Services Note the service dependencies as described in Table 212 Table 212 Service Dependencies Service Dependency Diagnostics Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 must be running on the databa
129. want to list all persons leave these fields blank e Department To provide additional filtering you can select to run a report on only those persons in a selected department e Personnel Type To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those persons assigned a selected personnel type e Round By Select the criteria by which you want the time of the Time and Attendance transaction rounded by Hour Half Hour 30 minute increments Quarter Hour 15 minute increments or Minute An error message displays if e There is not a matching number of In transactions and Out transactions within a specified time period There are two In transactions without an Out between them There are two Out transactions without an In between them Date Range tab Roll Call Alarm History Credential History Zone History DI History or Operator History reports Use the Date Range tab to select a date and time range on which to base this report e Daily time range Reports transactions that occurred between the start and stop time each day in the date range For example you select a start time of 8 00 a m a stop time of 5 00 p m a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5 You receive a report of credential transactions occurring between 8 00 a m through 5 00 p m each day of the day range e Continuous time span Continuously reports on transactions that occurred between the start time on the start day to the stop tim
130. 2 Define facilities Application Group 2 y o Administration Preferences Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 24 Select a time interval for archiving your database il OV Pe Configure the number of seconds that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that your database is not accessible If you are using image badging set the aspect ratio Set console alarm sounds Configure for line coloring for suspended credentials Enable Time and Attendance T amp A and Anti Passback APB if applicable for your system If this is a conversion or upgrade consider selecting Enable unique and required Employee Number Set Grant Access On Duress as required Set Alarm E mail Notification If your windows login and FCWnx login differ enter a user name and password for Access to File Share Directories Places amp Policies Facility Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 48 1 Enter a unique description in the Description field This may be a building name or location Quick Setup guide qs3 Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task 3 Define clients 4 Define permissions 5 Define operators Application Group A Administration Client Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 49 Click the add icon to begin a new record Enter or edit a unique description for the client you are adding If you do not enter a d
131. 2 character LCD display that can use various text messages These messages are prompts such as ARMED DENIED or TRY AGAIN If this option is not selected messages do not display Enhanced Keypad Display Function This option is available only on IKE readers with screen display capability Selecting this option enables enhanced security by displaying additional messages on the reader display screen Enable Local Alarm Zone Bypass This option is available only when Basic Keypad Display Functions is selected When this option is selected the user is allowed to swipe a credential through the reader or enter a PIN to disarm an alarm Area Arm Disarm When this option is selected this reader can be used to arm disarm multiple areas regardless of the access permissions to the reader Select from a drop down list of available arm disarm types local to this ACU controller Local Area Only arms disarms the local area and allows access Multiple Area Access arms disarms multiple areas assigned to this reader and allows access Multiple Area No Access arms disarms multiple areas assigned to this reader but does not allow access Delay Arm Disarm This feature provides a mechanism similar to central station home burglar alarm processing Monitor points can be assigned a delay time during which the alarms can be monitored on off larmed disarmed without generating an alarm report Select from a drop down list of available delay arm disarm types
132. 3 Check that the baud rate on the host matches the baud rate set for the controller Question My network controller is not working as expected What should I do now Follow the same steps as in COM Port Not Working as discussed above Verify the controller s IP address from the Comm Device field If no problems are identified in the Controller Monitor try pinging the controller using the IP address presented in the Controller Monitor form Example C ping 192 9 201 107 390 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual If the ping command fails with a Request timed out message verify that the controller IP address is correct that the controller is operational and that all the gateways routers between this computer and the controller are operational You receive a reply screen display Question My domain controller is inaccessible What is happening to the system There may be an occasion when the domain controller is inaccessible In a Global Edition configuration replication continues however be aware that Microsoft SQL Server services MSSQL and SQLAgent have limitations Review the following scenarios Scenario One A database server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible SQL services and replication continue normally without interruption Scenario Two A database server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible The data
133. 3 Denne Menal A i ie Dee a Maeda Rabe hers 144 Define digital OPE A ch ee es Ce OO Ce 154 Define digital Output Groups s sses cise bein eben da we Be a 160 Define HISIFNCRODS oo cucia dea ae He na Me Gad SS 163 Delme alarmi ROEDORES ice olde ad ant ae Lana ee ails hala 164 Donne AI okies Sa ees bk A be hs HL Ah Ped Oi 165 Adding sound to an alarm ici sedenie ritenis 179 Derine alarm groups oss cie iip enis Se cad eee wa ey Gee 179 Pe OT E EE E E E ede Ses 184 Configure routing and bumping 0 0c ccc eee 187 AFTCORNECROR JOM dd 191 Dene OOS a a a is 192 a A a wade da a ee nue dagees 193 What AA OE EE E OEREO a EA E looks a heath 202 90 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running Refer to the installation instructions for your brand of hardware Device configuration The following order is recommended for completion of device configuration 1 oo NDA AWN 10 Note Create controller records Additional device records can be configured following the creation of controller records Refer to Controllers overview on page 90 Configure reader records Refer to Define readers on page 123 Configure digital inputs Refer to Define digital inputs on page 144 Set up alarm instructions Refer to Define instructions on page 163 Configure alarm records Refer to Define alarms on page 165 Configure alarm groups Refer
134. 4 Devices Table 57 Form fields continued Element Description Network Configuration Primary Network Note You must complete one of the following two selections These fields are available only if the controller is other than a direct connect or dial up controller IP Address Select this option and then enter the IP address for network configuration Network Name Select this option and then enter the network name for the controller that hosts this controller Secondary Network Note You must complete one of the following two selections This option is only available if the connection type is Network Network IP Address Select this option and then enter the secondary IP address assigned for network network communications Network Name Select this option and then enter the secondary network name for the controller that hosts this controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 57 and complete the fields on this tab e If this is a direct connect controller select the COM port from the drop down list The Network Configuration section is not available e If this controller is other than a direct connect the Network Configuration sections are available for completion 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 117 118 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Settings to Reach Host tab Note The Settings to Reach Host tab displays only when you are setting up a dial up head of line controll
135. 5 Access rights departments persons and credentials 257 OVONVIOW Ss 5 3 dene Seine Baeana ete A AS 258 Define access nights ici is buen toetGs cetacean dad 258 Access Rights TOD asas ido 259 EOI se pees 260 Digital Outp t Groups tira A abc 261 MEFUSIOM ZONE St ci iT dawn aad oes as nee eee EREEREER 263 Areas TOD ras eaacs ao a E EE sone ee nog aac E sar etnns 264 Define personn litype iii diced sanded ented dA ENTE A E T EE EE 267 Personnel Type Diarias asis 267 Define departments voi ir A AA ed ea aia 268 D parntment to ii A a AAA ds 268 PA ssania sehaa ined iehnorna beeen dddagsrd dedeecabhegueninee ts arhioiadeddaanaes 269 Personnel LUD situa ca ida dalla 269 LOCATION TOD nereseno meee Aiea eet Bie faded donate te eet CO 272 User Fields COD is idad Valaa ees 274 ACCESS RINES AD a lobes 275 A bade E E ore E E SEE EEA a 278 Area Control taD s riesronsscareipiti a rai aaa E end EAE EEEO dares EANNA S SD EAEEREN 279 Image capte veo ee ee E E E ee 280 Selecting an TA put VIC ai A dd 280 Displaying existing IMA ba 282 Design credentiadls essnee cancion A ed 283 Credential Designer form oocomeovoo citan cast A at sae seeceees 284 Desi iia did iba 285 installing PANCARTA ia hR pees 286 Define credentidlS is A die 286 Credential Deia LED isce2cetacBenncueaiin torrente a E NERA oe sees de aE 287 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Credential StatustaD ares 290 Usen oi A idad 292 Mass Update cicnmios ara id t
136. A Micro only If you are using an anti passback APB reader or time and attendance T amp A reader enable this field for the reader to function as a Normal type reader thereby allowing any valid credential to unlock the door regardless of the credential s IN OUT status However the credential s status is still logged as IN or OUT according to the reader used and is recorded as such in the credential history Use this if you want to record APB or TSA without preventing unauthorized persons from accessing doors Example Timing begins when a credential is presented to an IN reader Until that time expires the user cannot enter again regardless whether they went through an OUT reader If a user tries to go through the IN reader a second time the controller sends an invalid Timed APB message to the host e Timed APB min ACU only This field is enabled when you select a Logical type as APB in The default of this field is O e Multiple Exiting Areas ACU only This option is an enhancement to anti passback processing When a user swipes their credential the system verifies two things 1 that the user has access privileges to the entering area and 2 that they are registered as being IN the exiting area If either of these conditions is not true the credential holder will be denied access and an anti passback tailgate violation will be sent to the Activity Monitor Some locations have several separate areas attached into a com
137. BUG messages Debug messages are optional messages which should be turned on only when diagnosing system operation Use the Diagnostics Settings form in FCWnx to turn them on or off WARNING Be careful when enabling this option as this adversely affects system performance and use additional hard drive space On the main Filter drop down menu the Debug option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Warning Select this option to enable disable the display of WARNING messages Warning messages indicate abnormal system operation Though the system is behaving abnormally the behavior is not fatal to system operation On the Filter menu the Warning option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Fatal Select this option to enable disable the display of FATAL messages Fatal messages indicate serious abnormal system behavior These messages are always written to the log On the main Filter drop down menu the Fatal option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This option is also found on the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL
138. CIF workstation displays here Controller Type Displays the type as a Micro or ACU controller Note The names of the buttons change depending on the DO type Reader or Other selected If Reader is selected click e Duration Unlock To unlock the selected door for the time specified in the On Time column e Lock To immediately lock the selected door e Indefinite Unlock To unlock the selected door It remains unlocked until you manually lock it by clicking lock e Sched Can Override To change the state of a door or DO if you want a schedule to override its setting Example Use Sched Can Override to unlock a door if you want a schedule at a later time to lock this door If you don t want the scheduler to lock your door use the Indefinite Unlock selection e Lock No Access To lock down all readers No transactions are allowed until those readers are put back to lock or unlock mode The host tracks Lock No Access This allows the readers to be taken out of the Lock No Access mode when the next action is performed if it is a state other than Lock No Access For Micro controllers when a door is unlocked a valid credential displays as invalid If a database download is performed after putting the readers into Lock No Access state it reverts to the normal reader state defined by the reader record Note Lock No access will be disabled when Other is selected If Floor is selected click e Secure Floor
139. CU only This field contains the 8 digit Company and Site Code This numeric data must correspond to the number that is encoded on the access cards Enter up to 4 digits for the Company Code and 4 digits for the Site Code Format CCCCSSSS where C is the Company Code and S is the Site Code The PIN is a user modified field that contains the Personal Identification Number of a cardholder This setting tells the card readers how many PIN digits to expect The number can be a minimum of 4 digits and as many as 6 digits Enter the number of digits to be used for a PIN number Enable controller for new protocol only ACU only When selected the ACU controller will only communicate with the FCWnx protocol This is the software version of physically changing the switch settings on the controller Dipswitch 5 on SW3 How to 1 Select a time interval for archiving your database Configure the number of seconds that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that If you are using image badging set the aspect ratio Configure for line coloring for suspended credentials Enable T amp A and APB if applicable to your system If this is a conversion or upgrade you can select Enable unique and required Employee Number Select if you want to enable Grant Access On Duress your database is not accessible 3 4 Set console alarm sounds 5 6 7 8 9 Configure if you want Alarm E mail
140. Click Reports on the menu bar 2 From the drop down menu select the type of report that you want to create 3 Select a template or create a new template 4 The options on a tab and drop down options in a field vary depending on the type of report you are creating Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of FCWnx In this chapter P a AA ee E TET tvs 2 PROGUCT CORE a eee Gea a RR DER ae Hee RS 3 Before you begin configuro 6 cc eee Ne eee eee ee 3 EXC ioe wea lad a iad bisa bia Live biel nia bias Giada ied 3 Clientii server ICRU CETTE e ca kb ee OG eR ee 4 Facility Commander Wnx S rvic S 1 0 cee 4 Simple File Sharing on WinXP 0 ccc cc eee n eens 5 Configuring firewall and DCOM settings with SecurityCnfg 5 a a car iacsices ceed larialin sc Bo ad wh sek ee eh eee ewe See a eee ae 1 EGS E E O 8 Creating editing and deleting records 0 0 0 00 ccc eens 20 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 offers powerful easy to use IT friendly integrated security management within the familiar Microsoft Windows operating system environment It is a complete end to end solution for today s most commonly deployed physical security applications providing real time monitoring command and control automation database administration and report management in a single unified system Facility Commander Wnx is available in the following thr
141. Denies access to the selected floor Unsecure Floor Allows access to the selected floor If Other is selected click On For Duration Activates the selected DO for the time specified in the On Time column e Off Changes the selected DO to Inactive state e On Indefinite Activates the selected DO which remains active until you manually turn it off by clicking Off e Sched Can Override Use this option to change the state of a DO if you want a schedule to override its setting 341 342 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 196 Form fields continued Element Description Refresh Status Click this button to get the most recent Reader DO status information Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter an explanation for locking unlocking doors or activating deactivating DO points These comments are written to the operator history file and display on the Operator History report Purpose Field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 196 and complete the fields on this tab Alarm Digital Input tab Note Functions associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form EXCEPTION ACU only If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller functions can be controlled Use the Alarm Digital Input tab to manually monitor alarms and DIs digital input points depending on the current operator s facilities and permissions
142. Door Unlock schedule dl 2 On the Reader form select Building 1 Lobby Door reader record On the Functions Schedule tab of the Reader form select a Door schedule entitled BocaHQ Normal Workweek from the drop down list of Time schedules Select Unlock The result is that the selected reader unlocks the door based on the time schedule as configured for BocaHQ Normal Workweek Table 1 Task Quick Setup guide qs5 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Event schedules Micro only Event notifier Application Group Schedules Event Schedule Refer to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 73 IS Click the add icon Bo begin a new record Enter a unique description in the Description field for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 3 A facility option can be designated Review Table 40 and create an event using the guidelines listed 5 Click Save before you exit this tab Note An event schedule can be assigned to a device such as a controller see Controller form Events tab or a reader see the Reader form Reader Type Events tab Example BocaHQ Weekend Begins indicates a facility specific event schedule where BocaHgQ refers to a geographic location For example you could create an event beginning each Friday at 6 00 p m that resets the APB status and the T amp A status and sets a reader to Credential and Keypad Employees coming into the building after 6 p m on
143. Follow the recommended order for completion of device configuration 1 Click the Security Devices group 2 Click the icon and complete the form that corresponds to the device that you are configuring Configure guard tours Refer to Chapter 8 Guard tours on page 303 1 Click the Guard Tours group 2 Click the Guard Tour icon 3 Configure the specifics of this tour by completing the elements displayed on the form Configure Monitor redundancy Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 58 Although devices like the controller are designed to run without the host software running for days eventually memory is going to be filled up at the controller end The redundancy feature in FCWnx is designed to address this condition Clients can be configured to be backed up by other clients so that in case of the default hosting client called the primary client being disabled one of the backup clients takes over all its devices This is designed to work automatically without any operator intervention so the system continues to work efficiently Review Table 29 on page 58 Click the Administration group Click the Client icon Click the Backup Clients tab and assign backup clients Click the Monitors amp Controls group Click the Client Monitor icon eb Ore Ga eee IO Monitor clients on the Client Monitor form Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Quick Setup guide Task Description Create Creden
144. GE Security Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual P N 460641002C ISS 30MARO9 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use Copyright 2009 GE Security Inc All rights reserved This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Security Document number revision 460641002C March 2009 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Facility Commander Wnx and logo are registered trademarks of GE Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this produc
145. I Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Readers 0018 1 01 Reader Access control O Allow access at all times Allow access by schedule e Time schedule v Table 147 Form fields Element Description Assigned readers This windowpane lists all readers currently assigned to this access right Assign Readers Click to display the Reader Assignment dialog box and select from a list of readers available for assignment by this operator If no readers are listed check that the readers have been marked Active on the Readers tab of the Reader form The Reader Assignment window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form 260 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 147 Form fields continued Element Description Access control Allow access at all times Select this option to allow access all the time in all modes Allow access by schedule Select this option to assign a time schedule to this access right The time schedule governs when the access right grants access to the assigned readers Time schedule If you selected Allow access by schedule thi
146. Identify the pattern of data bits mask of the credential numbers that you are importing or exporting to your system e Store standard custom credential format in the database for this application e Interpret data from credentials presented at a Wiegand or magnetic stripe reader Table 173 Form fields Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Search Display or change an existing record Add Configure a new Credential Format record Default values display for you Delete Delete a selected Credential Format record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no longer required or applicable Description Enter a unique description for this credential format The field accepts 1 to 64 characters Example 33 Bit Indala Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Credential Format tab Configure the specific mask of this custom credential format You cannot save this record until you have completed the entries on this tab Credential Format tab The Credential Format tab lets you identify the pattern of the data bits mask combination in the credential numbers that you import or export to your controller and store in the database for this application Figure 131 Credential format tab Credential Format Credent
147. If a Dl is selected click Enable To enable the selected DI on the controller so a state change is reported e Disable To immediately disable the selected DI on the controller so its state changes are not reported to the host or trip a digital output e Indefinite To Enable or Disable permanently e Sched Can Override for Micro controller systems only Use this option to change operation state of a DI if you want a schedule to override its setting For example use Sched Can Override to control operation of the DI until a schedule takes over If you don t want a schedule to control activation of a DI use the On Indefinite selection Refresh Click this button to get the most recent Reader DO status information Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter an explanation for monitoring an alarm or enabling disabling DI points These comments are written to the operator history field and display on the Operator History report Purpose Field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 197 and complete the fields on this tab Chapter 9 345 Monitor and control Areas and Zones tab The Areas Zones tab lets you manually control an Area or Intrusion Zone and take an Area or Zone from one condition armed to another condition disarmed Items that display in the navigation pane are determined by facilities assigned to the current operator Note All SCIF related operations can only be performed on SCIF workstations
148. Monitor to display a shortcut menu Select Flash Controller s to download the latest firmware to the selected controller When the Controller Flash amp Controller Preference Configuration dialog box displays click Start Flashing Controller s This option starts flashing each controller with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request 2 The flashing process varies with the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller qs 13 qs 14 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task e Put controller online and monitor communications Application Group Monitors amp Controls Controller Monitor Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 328 1 Right click on the Controller Monitor to display a shortcut menu e Select Change State for multiple controllers or Set Online single controller to put the controller online e Click Download Database each time a controller is set to online in order to download the database to the controller e Any time a new controller database is required click Download Database e Click Download Credentials to download credential records for the selected controller Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Task 8 Create Areas Quick Setup guide qs 15 Places amp Policies Area Refer to Chapter 6 Areas a
149. NFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP INFRA_KEMP Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Message Application initializing Version 7 5 Service Pack O Facility Commander Winx Opening database FCWnx Opening database FCWnx History Opening database FCWnx Archive Unable to get the local general message manager Application initializing Version 7 5 Service Pack O Facility Commander Wnx Opening database FCWnx Opening database FCWnx History Opening database FCWnx Archive Failed to Advise MicroManager Invalid pointer Unable to advise to the Micro Manager Application terminated Unable to get the local micro status manager Unable to get the local DO Manager Exception Failed to Fill List OF DOs Caught exception while filling list box Application terminated Caught an exception while trying to unadvise from the badge manager e ErrorMessage Invalid point Unable to get the local micro status manager Unable to get the local micro status manager Unable to get the local micro status manager Unable to get the local DO Manager Options described in the following menu tables also display in the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar Table 206 File menu Open Logs Note Sele
150. Notification 10 Click Save before you exit this tab 27 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual User Fields tab Complete the User Fields tab to modify the labels for user fields These labels are used on the Person form and Credential form Figure 3 User fields tab Preferences System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Person User Fields Credential User Fields Person User Fields Labels A Credential User Fields Labels User Field 1 Credential User Field 1 User Field 2 Credential User Field 2 User Field 3 Credential User Field 3 User Field 4 Credential User Field 4 User Field 5 Credential User Field 5 User Field 6 Credential User Field 6 User Field 7 Credential User Field 7 User Field 8 Credential User Field 8 User Field 9 Credential User Field 9 User Field 10 Credential User Field 10 User Field 11 Credential User Field 11 13 User Field 12 Credential User Field 12 User Field 13 Credential User Field 13 User Field 14 Credential User Field 14 User Field 15 Credential User Field 15 User Field 16 v Credential User Field 16 4 lt i amp lt i gt New label New label Table 13 Form fields Element Description Person User Fields Person User Field Labels Displays a list of 90 currently assigned labels for the Person form user fields New label To assign or edit the label of a Person fo
151. Number field the system automatically completes all Number fields with a duplicate number Micro only Enter the number of times from 0 to 9 the controller should redial the same telephone number before moving on to the next available telephone number Table 58 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Retry interval How to Enter the number from 1 to 9 of 30 second intervals that the controller waits in between each dial to the host For example if you specify 2 then the controller waits 2 x 30 60 seconds between each dial to the host Dial Interval Select the interval none 1 hour 8 hours 12 hours and 24 hours at which the controller automatically dials the host The controller dials at the bottom of the hour For example if you select the 1 hour interval the controller would dial at 4 30 5 30 and continue every hour after The following options are available for ACU controller systems only Enter the number from 1 to 9 of minute intervals that the controller waits in between each dial to the host For example if you specify 2 then the controller waits 2 x 1 2 minutes between each dial to the host Maximum disconnect time min Select a range from 1 to 180 minutes as the maximum number of minutes that the host is allowed to be disconnected from the controller before dialing in again The default number of minutes is 180 Dial Out Time Schedule Select a time schedule
152. Output form No N A Digital Output Group form No No Digital Video Recorder Yes Yes Editing a DVR in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur before changes take effect If user changes the host name to a remote client wait for replication to occur and then restart the hosting client s services Adding a DVR in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then restart services on the remote client Table 24 Global configuration Regional rules continued Updates allowed in Form remote Regions Elevator form Yes Deletions allowed in remote Regions Yes Chapter 2 System preferences Comments Editing an elevator in a remote Region Edits are not applied until replication occurs on the remote database After replication the operator must manually initiate a database download from the Controller Monitor form in order for changes to take effect Event Schedule form Micro Yes only Yes Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes Floor Yes Intrusion Zone form No Yes No No action required Manual Control form Yes Yes No action required Controller form Yes Yes Editing a controller in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then perform a database download to that controller If the user changes the host name to a remote client wait for replication to occur and then re
153. PX supports 16 readers for direct serial and remote dial up modem communications links e Micro 5PXN supports 16 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e MPX2000 supports 4 readers for direct serial and remote dial up modem communications links e MPXN2000 supports 4 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e MicroPXNPlus supports 16 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e MicroPXNPlus2000 supports 4 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e DirecDoor supports 2 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links Also provides optional dial fallback feature Note If your system is using M3000 controllers select controller type as MicroPXNPlus see description above ACU controllers Note ACU controllers support multiple combinations of port addresses for readers inputs and output modules Refer to your ACU hardware manual for configuration instructions e ACU2XL supports 8 or 16 readers built in LAN connection To configure ACU2XL8 or ACU2XL16 e ACURS supports 2 or 4 onboard readers plus up to 8 additional readers built in LAN connection To con
154. Parity layout 3 E O Indicates the third parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even 0 or Odd 1 parity bit Parity layout 4 E O Indicates the fourth parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even 0 or Odd 1 parity bit Number of facility characters The number of facility code bits in the data mask Numbers of credential characters The number of credential number BID bits in the data mask The following fields are for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers or Micro controllers Import format from file This selection is enabled when you click New to add a new record Click to navigate to a network drive CD diskette or a local drive of your computer and import a Wiegand or magnetic stripe file An example Wiegand file name might be wgd Export format to file Click to navigate to a network drive CD diskette or local drive of your computer and export a Wiegand or magnetic stripe file Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 174 and complete the fields on this tab Also refer to e Controller flash and controller preference configuration on page 121 e Credential formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol in the following section 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Crede
155. RPT and Adobe Acrobat PDF To save export a report 1 From the Preview Report window select the envelope icon with a downward pointing arrow from the menu bar at the top of the screen The Export dialog box opens 2 Select a format and destination for this report and then click OK The Save As dialog box opens 3 Select a location to save the report and then click Save 370 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting This appendix provides information for troubleshooting your system and contacting Customer Support In this appendix CFV it ae he eee head dl de ead Sake ae 372 FUNG DRA oi eco as SG ROMA RIDE Sa HAT A ae ROSE Ra Say 372 Digg nostes OVEIVIOW orara iri o io ea Riad 374 ETE dca bad ba tio a 375 PNGSROSHG SALIH BS A ee a 376 When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object 378 Diagnostic Viewer Program 0 0c teenies 380 FICE SVEN ld a ca ed wb oe nes bean Ce Ee 384 Queshons And ANSWIT oo cs oe wie han Bible IEEE Ewe Stee a ots wd 385 Customer SUDDON hich sk be ba whe bia ee ews ak dws ane 400 372 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview While this application was created to be as user friendly as possible this section is created to assist you with answers to frequently asked questions troubleshooting and settings to assist you in diagnosing problems Auto Update The Auto Update feature provides a method of automatically no
156. Record list Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image 4 Adjust and then click Save to save the adjusted settings 5 Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays 6 Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application qs 23 qs 24 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Task Description Mass Updates Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 293 1 Open a blank form Click Search to display a list of existing records We recommend entering search criteria to narrow your search results to only records that are to be updated Note If there are no records Mass Update is not available 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu to related forms To enable the Mass Update mode select Mass Update from the shortcut menu 3 Note the change in the appearance of the form only those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are now enabled and blank Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 257 Select the records you want to adjust from the list box on the right Make the required adjustment to the form Click Save T
157. SCIF control e Arm Disarm digital input 5 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form When an area record is updated and saved all controllers are notified of the new configuration Before you can delete an area record 1 Access rights must be removed 2 Devices associated with this area must be removed This area must be removed from the Area Control tab of the Person form as assigned for arm disarm qs 16 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Task Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Intrusion zones Application Group Places amp Policies Intrusion Zone Refer to Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones w on page 249 The Intrusion Zone form is required for creating a relation between readers alarm inputs the arm disarm intrusion point and the arm disarm DO Perform the following 1 Define an intrusion zone with a description and facility assignment 2 Selecta controller selection to establish the zone source and its intrusion points 3 Filtered on the operator s active facilities assign the following intrusion zone components arm disarm DO arm disarm Intrusion DI readers and alarms Arm Disarm Intrusion DI This is a single record selection from a drop down list filtered by active facility that consists of all available arm disarm intrusion points for the controller Only the Dis that have not been assigned are available Alarm Point
158. Save before you exit this tab Takeover and recovery timing Client device takeover occurs following communication breakdown between the default client and the backup client under the following circumstances 1 If network problems should occur 2 Ifadefault client computer crashes 3 Immediate takeover following normal shutdown ignoring any other settings This occurs if FCWnx services are stopped and Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown is enabled on the Backup Clients tab of the Client form When a backup client detects that the default client is offline an approximate takeover timing can be predicted using the following formula Ping Interval x Retry Count of Default Computer Heartbeat Interval x Heartbeat Retry Count of Default Computer Network Delays All these values are configured on the Client form The values in this formula can be adjusted to achieve a shorter or longer takeover scenario 57 58 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Client redundancy overview The FCWnx software system is responsible for processing alarm and credential transactions from devices like controllers and DVRs The software is responsible for writing these transactions to the database A device such as a controller or DVR is hosted by a single FCWnx client The client could potentially be responsible for hundreds of devices and can be a single point of failure Although devices like the controller are designed to run without the ho
159. Schedule a EM Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility O Arm O Disarm Arm Disarm by Digital Input Digital Input CO Active Inactive O No Action O No Action O Arm O Arm O Disarm O Disarm O Force Arm O Force Arm Table 139 Form fields Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones Element Description Enable APB Select to enable APB tracking for this area Readers associated with this area must also be assigned a Logical type of APB on the Reader form To configure an area for APB 1 Under the Places and Polices Group select Area 2 Click the Search button to locate an existing area or create a new area record by clicking the plus sign in the menu bar 3 On the Area tab select the Enable APB check box 4 On the Reader tab assign an Entering Area Reader and an Exiting Area Reader 5 Under the Security Devices Group select Reader 6 On the Reader tab in the Reader form click the Search button and select the Entering Area Reader you assigned to the area as well as the Exiting Reader 7 Under Logical Type select APB 8 Save before exiting this form Local Re Entry Timer min Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility Enter a number between 0 and 255 as the number of minutes the user cannot enter this area again regardless of whether they went through an Out reader If a user tries to go through an IN reader a second time the controller sends an inv
160. Shutting down CAUTION Itis essential that you shut down FCWnx and your computer properly If you are logged in to the FCWnx application you must first log off before shutting down the computer We recommend that you stop all FCWnx Services before shutting down the computer Note You must have Administrative rights to stop FCWnx services To shut down the services 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools and then Services Scroll to FC Wnx Diagnostics Right click on FCWnx Diagnostics and then click Stop If you select to shut down this service first a message displays informing you that the other services must be shut down first If you select to do that now all other services shut down and then Diagnostics will shut down 2 Exit Control Panel 3 From the taskbar click Start and then Shut Down 4 From the Shut Down Windows form verify that Shut down is selected and click OK Menus Following a successful login your application window displays Figure 1 Application window Menu Bar Chapter 1 Introduction P Facility Commander Winx Application Toolbar Record Toolbar Application Group Pane Table 4 Form fields Fille Search View Reports Window Help AITTE Md fel Application Group ox 822 Personnel Credentials why Places amp Policies 22 Monitors amp Controls E Alarms Events Y Security Devices m lo f Elevators my Schedules Y Gateways amp
161. TV interfaces as standard features Secure Perfect Editions also offer integrated system options that include digital video surveillance and Web based reporting FCWnx combines the features of Secure Perfect and Diamond II software and has a whole new look Features are enabled on the application forms according to the controller hardware and system that you purchased and licensed Simple File Sharing Simple File Sharing is a feature in Windows XP that removes file sharing security options available in other versions of Windows This setting must be disabled for FCWnx to operate successfully between Servers and clients Once the user sets the permission the user and clients have access to shared files and the ability to assign passwords to shares To disable folder shares 1 Double click My Computer on the Windows XP Desktop 2 From the Tools menu select Folder Options to open a Folder Options window 3 Click the View tab and locate the Use Simple File Sharing Recommended check box in the list of Advanced Settings 4 To disable Simple File Sharing ensure this check box is not selected Click inside the check box to disable the option The Simple File Sharing check box should be at or near the bottom of the Advanced Settings list 5 Click OK to close the Folder Options window The settings for Simple File Sharing are now updated no computer reboot is required Note 1 Enabling Simple File Sharing prevents the ability to assig
162. The Digital Input Status form Monitors and Controls group provides a snapshot of the current status in the controllers active or inactive and physical state open or closed of a digital input contact Digital inputs are physical sensing devices such as door sensors or motion sensors used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a controller Refer to your controller installation for information on how to connect a digital input device to the controller Once you have set up your digital inputs and alarms you need to verify the accuracy of your configuration Status tab The Status tab provides the status of the selected digital input according to the information in the controller database You can list the digital inputs for all controllers or list the digital inputs per controller Figure 140 Status tab Digital Input Status Select Controller Oall By Controller PXN 18 Num Description Controller State Physical State Date Time A 1 0018 0 01 Tamper PXN 18 On a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 28 AM 2 0018 0 02 Power PXN 18 On Open 10 10 2008 11 17 28 AM 1 0018 1 01 D PXN 18 Un a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 29 AM 1 0018 1 01 Reader PXN 18 Un a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 1 0018 1 01 Supervised Exit PXN 18 O Off fa Open 2 0018 1 02 D PXN 18 On s Open 10 10 2008 11 17 29 AM 2 0018 1 02 Reader PXN 18 On a Open 10 10 2008 11 17 31 AM 2 0018 1 02 Supervised Exit PXN 18 O Off we Open y 3 0018 1 03 D PXN 18
163. Video Element Description Title bar Displays the Video Console and the window instance number Each time you open another Video Console window another window instance number displays indicating the window sequence such as 1 2 or 3 Menu bar The menu bar contains the following menus File View Window and Help Navigation pane Play controls The navigation pane is made up of two tabs Facility View and Custom View The Facility View tab displays configured DVRs and cameras in a hierarchal structure Each DVR is identified with the associated cameras and preset conditions The DVRs are listed in alphabetical order Note All devices are displayed according to the facility to which they are assigned Therefore even if a camera is associated to a DVR if they are assigned to different facilities the camera does not display under the associated DVR The Custom View tab displays any custom views that you have saved The play controls allow you to capture a snapshot and to control and adjust live and recorded video Video display This portion of the screen displays the live or recorded video from the selected DVR camera Multiple cameras can be selected and displayed in two up four up nine up or sixteen up views Status bar The status bar displays error messages and an icon that indicates if Video Console is connected to the FCWnx server Green indicates the system is connected and communicating Red indicates t
164. Wnx application form does not seem accurate This object monitors and captures SQL statements being generated from the server and client General To monitor general nonspecific form activity CCTV If problems exist during CCTV serial communication For example alarms can be configured to trigger predetermined cameras on the CCTV Matrix Switcher If an alarm does not fire at a particular camera select this object to monitor debug messages in order to determine where the failure resides Alarms If problems exist during alarm activity Port Queue To monitor all network serial or dialup data port communication This object captures data from the server to the controllers This is a high level diagnostic object and an Engineer normally translates messages This data is extremely useful for troubleshooting general data problems between the server and controllers Manager Service To monitor FCWnx Manager Service on starting stopping connecting to other servers and regular processing Flash System Service If problems exist when using eFlash to flash Micro controllers using the Controller Monitor form To monitor FCWnx System Service on starting stopping connecting to other servers and regular processing TAPI Loader To monitor TAPI dial up connections between the server and the modem being used for communication with controllers TAPI Device To monitor TAPI dial up connections between the server and the modem being used f
165. a schedule is not selected this configuration is active at all times This area is monitored and the user will get the notification during the specified time schedule Note ACU controllers support 16 intervals per Time Schedule Even if you save a Time Schedule record with more the 16 intervals only Time Schedules with 16 intervals or less display in this drop down list e When the secure area is armed monitoring is on for all alarm points Readers continue granting or denying access except when areas are set to Keypad Arm Disarm In this case a credential and Pin are required to disarm the area before the reader can be used to grant deny access e When the secure area is disarmed monitoring is off for all alarm points Auto Arm Inactivity Timer min Enter the amount of time in minutes of inactivity that elapse before the area automatically arms The default is 0 which means that the timer is disabled This field has a range from 0 to 255 minutes Example Use this feature in areas monitored by motion detectors You can define the number of minutes of inactivity that can pass before an unarmed area automatically arms Prerequisites e The area must be local to the controller with at least one alarm assigned e Auto Arm Inactivity Timer must have an entry greater than 0 e The area must be disarmed without an alarm being activated for the number of minutes specified above e An optional reader in the area that beeps indicating one
166. a slow baud rate The default is 30 seconds and in most cases it does not need to be changed Host Computer Select the PC Name from the Default Hostname drop down list This is the host machine that communicates with the newly defined controller in the future and acts as the controller communication server If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition you cannot re assign this controller to any other Host computer except the Active Client that is presently hosting this device Credential Loading Note that any time a credential that is not in a controller is presented to a reader it is reported as unknown and the host sends the credential to the controller This happens regardless of the Credential Loading option The controllers can store only a limited number of credentials Refer to the licensing chapter of the FCWnx Installation Guide for capacities When a previously unknown credential is sent to a controller whose credential capacity is exceeded the controller randomly chooses a credential to delete to make room for the new credential The credential is deleted from the controller but not from the FCWnx system Select Force to force a download of all credentials that can possibly gain access to a reader on the controller Select Learn to allow the controller to learn the credentials as they are presented For example when a credential is presented to a reader and the controller does not recognize the cre
167. ab Table 117 Form fields gt Digital Video Recorder e Description test Facility ignore Facilities y Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status Element Description General Status Displays current time time powered on MUX firmware PPC firmware and disk capacity Camera Status Displays current status of camera alarms and video loss alarms Record Status Archiving Status Displays status disk status time recording and time until disk is full Displays archive status device status time archiving and time until archive is full Ethernet Status Displays normal connect IP address and connect priority and live connect IP address and connect priority e A duplex recorder priority status displays on a line separate from the IP address e A Triplex and or Matrix recorder priority status displays as the last entry of the IP address such as 003 018 146 159 3 Status Click Status to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request This button is disabled when a status request is in progress How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 117 to assist you in review of the window on this tab 2 The status pane clears when you select another DVR from the list box on the right Chapter 5 213 Video Video windows This is a brief overview of window behavior based on the selections assigned on the Digital Video Recorder form Note Le
168. ace from the drop down list If there is no interface listed then it has not been installed CCTV Alarm Select the alarm number from the drop down list When you assign a number an enable and disable message is automatically generated Enable Message An enable message is automatically generated when you select a number in the CCTV Alarm field You can edit these messages but any changes to the CCTV alarm number overwrite the changes to this message Disable Message A disable message is automatically generated when you select a number in the CCTV Alarm field You can edit these messages but any changes to the CCTV alarm number overwrites the changes to this message Reset CCTV Alarm When the alarm for this application is cleared from the Alarm Monitor Select this option if you want the CCTV alarm to reset when the alarm is cleared from the Alarm Monitor When the alarm Resets Select this option if you want the CCTV alarm to reset when the alarm is reset in the application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 137 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 235 236 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual What s next Continue with Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones on page 237 if appropriate for your system Chapter6 Areas and intrusion zones This chapter provides instructions for configuration of secure areas and intrusion zones In this chapter a OTROS
169. age 187 Table 30 Form fields Element Description Descriptions This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description that identifies this client group Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Save You cannot save this record until at least one client is assigned to this group on the Client Group tab Client Group tab On the Client Group tab you must assign at least one FCWnx client computer in order to save this client group record Figure 16 Client Group tab H cient coup Tn eS Description Facility v Client Group Clients Assign Clients Comments 60 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 31 Form fields Element Description Clients This windowpane displays the names of client computers that are assigned to this client group Assign Clients Click to display a Client Assignment dialog box that lets you assign FCWnx clients to this client group Client Assignment Dialog This dialog box lets you select and assign FCWnx client computers to a client group Only clients in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client Click OK to close this dialog box
170. al group not applicable for ACU controller systems and the Micro controller is offline then the output follows the state of the alarm For example if the alarm is active then the output goes to an active state and if the alarm is reset then the output goes to an inactive state Chapter 4 Devices Figure 70 DO Groups tab e Description 0018 0 01 Tamper Facility Ignore Facilities v Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV d Output Groups Primary Local Output Group me J L 4 Assign DO Groups Reader DO Actions Auxiliary DO Actions Alarm Alarm Duration _ Dn indefnite _8 Reset Reset Duration v Off x Table 92 Form fields Element Description Output Groups This windowpane displays assigned digital output groups The digital output groups can be on a local or other controller Assign DO Groups Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign alarm DO groups that you want associated with this alarm record Only DO groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group Click OK to display results in the Output Groups windowpane Primary Local Output Group Micro only You can select an output group as primary from t
171. alid Timed APB message to the host The default setting is 0 Reader settings assigned on the Reader form override any configuration on this form Enable SCIF ACU only Select this option to indicate that this area is a SCIF ACU only sensitive compartmentalized information facility Proceed to select a SCIF area workstation SCIF Area Workstation ACU only Select from the drop down list of those available to be assigned as a SCIF workstation for this area When a workstation is selected and the area record is saved this workstation controls functionality within the SCIF area Modifications to the SCIF configuration can be made at this workstation only This SCIF workstation allows complete access and configuration of any associated device reader alarm Output relay credentialholder or reporting functions pertaining to this specific SCIF area This SCIF workstations has authorization to perform the following functions for the associated SCIF area devices e Readers lock unlock system control e Alarms monitor e Outputs relays activate de activate e Area arm disarm Arm Disarm by Time Schedule Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Arm Disarm Select whether the schedule chosen above arms or disarms the area 241 242 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 139 Form fields continued Element Description Arm Disarm by Digital Input Digital Input Select a digita
172. ame field will be disabled In the DVR Hostname field select the name of the DVR that will be hosting this device The Default Hostname field will automatically populate with the default hostname of the selected DVR After creating the record in the Digital Video Recorder form one camera is created for this record In the Camera form Definitions tab edit the Address number to match the IP input number configured on the hosting DVR for this camera In the Facility View panel of the Video Console this device will display as a DVR with one camera Chapter 5 Video Communications Settings tab Use the Communications Settings tab to assign or edit a TCP IP address PTZ control event tagging and clock time synchronization Figure 90 Communications Settings tab Table 115 Form fields Digital Video Recorder Description Facility v Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status DWA Address TCP IP Address l TCP IP Port PTZ Control Nor Event Tagging O None O TCPAP Time Sync Interval O None O 1 Hour O 4 Hours O 8 Hours O 12 Hours 24 Hours Element Description TCP IP Address Assign or edit the TCP IP network address for the DVR Username Enter the same user name configured locally in the DVR for authenticating connectivity This is not a required field The default is no user name however be aware that the DVR form and DVR dev
173. and display the results in the Clients windowpane Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review Table 31 and click the add record icon to create a new client group record Enter a unique description for this group of clients Assign FCWnx clients to this group Enter a comment describing the reason for creating this group E E Click Save before you exit this tab Create permissions Use the Permission form Administration group to create permission records The forms in FCWnx display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to this operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here e Permissions and facilities must be created before they are assigned to operators e Permissions are assigned to operators and define what operators can do within FCWnx Note FCWnx comes with a System Administrator permission that allows full action on all forms You can create more restrictive permissions and apply the System Administrator permission only to those operators fully trained in FCWnx Table 32 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique title for this permission record Permission tab Chapter 2 System preferences The forms in FCWnx
174. and operators in your Facility Commander Wnx system before defining other records Complete the steps in the order presented Configure preferences Complete the tabs on the Preferences form Administration group to assign global settings used throughout the FCWnx system You should configure the global system preferences before you begin loading your database by creating records and assigning permi System Settings tab ssions Use the System Settings tab to set the general system settings Figure 2 System Settings tab GE Preferences AAA System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Archive Database Select time interval to archive history O Daily O Weekly Photo Aspect Ratio Height 14 2 width 3 Enable global T amp 4 Enable global APB Event Notifier E mail Support Monthly Console alarm sound Continuous Short Grant Access On Duress To E mail Address Field J Enable SMTP E mail Server From E mail Address E mail User Name E mail Password Database Connection Timeout sec 30 Retry EM Credentials wm Enable line coloring for suspended credentials Access to File Share Directories Windows User Name secure Browse Use FCWnx Operator Password for above User Name Domain Name Password Table 12 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences
175. area reader assigned to the area must have a logical type of APB selected Note For ACU controller systems when configuring an area for APB the entering and exiting area reader assigned to the area must have logical type APB selected The following options are available for selection if this reader is associated with a Micro controller only APB In Anti passback in This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to enter an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to an APB out reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global APB on the System Settings tab of the Preferences form a different controller All controllers are updated APB Out Anti passback out This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to an APB in reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global APB on the System Settings tab of the Preferences form a different controller All controllers are updated Note Global configuration You must configure this reader as APB if you plan to include this reader in a Region APB configuration Only designated APB reader types display for selection on the Region form T amp A In Time amp Attendance in This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to enter an area This reader does not release a door a secon
176. arm events investigators or other operators may need to retrieve previously recorded video clips or they may want to view previously recorded video for a specific date and time which is not necessarily when the event occurs Video can be searched by System Event Searches for events that occurred on readers or alarm intrusion digital inputs DVR Event Searches video on specific DVRs or cameras DVR General Playback Searches by specific dates and times DVR Motion Searches a region of interest in a motion area How to search by system event 1 2 A AA From the File menu select Video Search The Video Search window displays Select the System Event Search tab The search criteria includes start and end dates start and end times readers alarm intrusion digital inputs and event tags Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips Use the Start Date and End Date fields to narrow the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK Use the Start Time and End Time fields to further narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm Click Reader to select the appropriate reader where the system event occurred C
177. arn more about video windows in Navigating Video Console on page 228 There are several ways to open a video window e On the main toolbar of this application click the Video icon e On the View drop down menu select Enable Alarm Video Pop up e Inthe Monitor amp Control application group click the Video Console icon e On the Alarm Monitor when an alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays Right click the alarm transaction message to access the Video Console application e On the Activity Monitor when an event is triggered with associated video the Video Console icon displays Right click the event transaction to access the Video Console application e Inthe Graphics Console application click Quick Launch when associating devices with graphic maps Each window displays a title bar identifying the application name and instance number The minimize restore maximize and exit options display in the upper right corner of each window Resize Window e To resize a window point to any corner border and drag a sizing handle to the size window you want to display e Increasing the window size is limited to the size of your monitor screen e Decreasing the window size is limited to the system default corresponding to the Small option available on the Video Display tab Window Menu e Save Position Each window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop Select this option to save the position I
178. arrow to assign e Select one or more presets from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to unassign Click OK to accept the selections and close this window When the Camera Preset Assignment form closes the selected presets display in the Assigned Presets windowpane Click Save to save the selections How to 1 Review to the guidelines in Table 122 and complete this tab by assigning the camera presets for this camera 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 218 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define event triggers Event tagging overview When a digital video camera is activated and associated with a reader event or alarm event the recording for that activity is tagged During this tagging process the camera remains actively recording and then archives the recording to disk Once recorded the recording can be retrieved by a search option based on the event tag If the event trigger that activated the tagging was defined as Tag as event instead of Tag only the DVR would have changed recording rate to a special event recording rate for a period of time as predefined during the DVR setup and configuration When tagged events are identified by a search retrieved and viewed the video playback begins at the start of the event and continues playing until you elect to discontinue the playback Event triggers must be created on the Video Event Trigger form to define the logical rules that initiate ev
179. ation section of the installation manual in order to qualify as a UL Listed system UL certification Facility Commander Wnx is a UL Listed system UL 1076 Grade A Proprietary Burglary Requirements UL 294 Access Control Requirements You must adhere to the following requirements in a UL Listed installation 1 10 11 12 The computer and monitor shall be completely duplicated Provision for switchover within 6 minutes is required 30 seconds for manual transfer of cables and 5 minutes 30 seconds for the system boot sequence Compatibility has been verified with the following protected premises control units e ACU2X ACU2XL8 ACU2XL16 ACURSO2 ACURS04 ACUX16 e M5 M3000 and Micro 2000 using a PXN or PXNplus CPU board e DirecDoor The system shall be connected to a listed surge suppressor with a maximum marked rating of 330 volts The installation instructions shall specify signal line transient protection complying with the Standard for Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits UL 479B with a maximum marked rating of 50 volts The equipment shall be installed in a temperature controlled environment Twenty four hours of backup power shall be provided to the HVAC system The HVAC system shall be capable of maintaining a temperature between 55 and 95 E The installation instructions shall specify that in addition to the main power supply and secondary power supply that are required to be provided at t
180. ator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller Figure 87 Floor Digital Output tab e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Assigned Floor Digital Output Floor Digital Output Area Add Table 110 Form fields Element Description Assigned Floor Digital Output This list box displays the currently assigned floors digital outputs and area for ACU controller systems Edit To edit a floor digital output link select and entry from the list and then click this button The Floor Digital Output Selection dialog displays Add To add a floor digital output link click this button The Floor Digital Output Selection dialog displays Use the dialog box to create or edit a floor to digital output link e Floor Select a floor from the drop down list of available floors e Digital Output Select a digital output from the drop down list of available DOs e Area This control is available only if the selected reader is owned by an ACU controller Select an area from the drop down list of available areas Click OK to accept your selections and close this form Remove To remove a floor digital output select an entry from the list and then click this button 200 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 110 and complete this tab 2
181. atus tab Select the Status tab to view information about an individual controller as currently stored in the controller s database The columns of the Controller Monitor form also reflect the status of the selected controller and explain what is happening between the host and the controller The Status Windowpane is read only and appears in two column format Figure 38 Status tab eS Description A Facility l x Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control 112 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 54 Form fields Element Description Status windowpane Note The following items apply to Micro controllers only Mode Micro only Displays the mode of the controller Firmware Revision Date Micro only Displays the date of the last firmware revision Boot Version Micro only Displays the number of the boot version Note The following items apply to both Micro AND ACU controllers Threat Level Access Both Micro and ACU Displays the threat level of the controller Firmware Version Both Micro and ACU Displays the version number Firmware Patch Level Both Micro and ACU Displays the patch level number Memory Size meg Both Micro and ACU Displays the amount of memory in megabytes Encryption Both Micro and ACU Indicates if encryption is in use on this controller Note Encrypt
182. ault of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Definition tab Use the Definition tab to assign a number to this camera preset Figure 93 Definition tab Camera Preset eS Description Facility v gt Definition Preset Table 119 Form fields Element Description Preset In this text field enter a number within the range of 1 to 64 or use the arrow controls to select a number This number only references the preset number programmed and stored in a camera with PTZ capability Click Save This preset is now available for assignment to a specific camera Chapter 5 215 Video How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 119 and complete the field in this tab 2 Click Save after each Preset number that you assign 3 Click Add before beginning each new description or Preset record 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Define cameras Use the Camera form in the Security Devices group to edit existing camera preferences Camera records are automatically created when a DVR is defined on the Digital Video Recorder form The camera records display in the format 00X 0X Camera where 00x is the DVR address and ox is the camera number Table 120 Form fields Element Description Description It is recommended that you keep the number prefix to aid in locating the cameras Note Device description updates are communicated to corresponding alarms Dis
183. ave the record It is recommended that you keep the alarm group number and controller number prefix to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Facility A facility option can be assigned for the alarm group from the drop down list of available facilities Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of an alarm group to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Group tab Use the Group tab to schedule when the alarms in the group are monitored or when to print alarm transactions by assigning previously defined time schedules to alarm groups Figure 75 Group tab gt Alarm Group e Description 0001 Group 2 Facility Resource Center y Group Events Number Controller Monitoring Time schedule v O On Oot Print Alarm Time schedule v O Yes O No Table 98 Form fields Element Description Chapter 4 Devices Number This is a read only field Displays the number of the alarm group Controller This is a read only field Displays the description of the controller on which this alarm group is located Monitoring Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor the alarm group or Off if the ab
184. b 3 Preferences System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Address 1 Address 2 Address2 Address 3 Address3 Address 4 Address4 Address 5 lAddress5 Table 15 Form fields Element Description Address 1 The default label displays To edit or create a new label select and enter text over the Address 2 existing text The address field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters in length Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 How to 1 2 3 4 Select any one of the address fields Enter over the existing text up to 32 alphanumeric characters Repeat for each label field that you want to edit Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 31 System preferences Communications tab Use the Communications tab to select the modems that are to be used for dial up controllers Figure 6 Communications tab CA System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Installed modems C INFRA_TECHWRITE BCM V 90 56K Modem lt Disconnect after idle il 3 minutes v Table 16 Form fields Element Description Installed Modems Displays all modems currently installed on the PC To designate a modem for use with a dial up controller enable it by clicking in the box to the left of the modem name
185. base instance on the navigation tree to the right Select Properties Select Memory page Vi Pe SN Set the minimum server memory in MB to no less than a quarter of the allowable limit Set the Maximum server memory MB at approximately half of the allowable MB 6 Exit Server Management Studio Documentation Question When the documentation CD is inserted into the CD drive and Web Site is clicked on the menu why does the GE Security Web Site link open a blank page Reset your Internet Explorer Options security setting to enable Allow META REFRESH Global configuration Question Converting an existing database to a regional server returns error messages and the database creation fails What do I do Conversion to a Regional Database server is not allowed An existing FCWnx database can only be converted to a Global database server Appendix A 387 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Question Subscription to Publication database name is invalid What can I do Run SELECT SERVERNAME in Query Analyzer on both the Global database server and the Regional database server If either name does not match its related server computer name run the following on the affected server sp_addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL If this gives an error message stating that the name already exists use the following sequence sp_dropserver lt real server name gt go sp_addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL go If the error
186. base server computer is rebooted SQL services and replication continue normally because the assigned security token has not expired for the SQL services domain account There are limitations of which you should be aware Note Domain login must have been obtained before the domain controller became inaccessible You may want to review Microsoft and Windows publications relating to security tokens Additionally consult your IT Administrator for discussion about the security token as applied in your company Printers Question My credential printer is not functioning as expected What can I do You may use either a printer directly connected to your computer or a printer on the network For example you may have two Imaging stations but only one printer e Ifyou plan on printing either credential or alarm transactions at least one of those printers must be a line printer such as a dot matrix that supports a width of 133 characters either by using a wide carriage or printing in compressed mode e You can now print credential transactions or alarms transactions from any client workstation printer e Ifyou plan on printing credentials you must use a GE approved Imaging printer Contact your GE security business sales representative for a list of supported printer models For directions on installing the drivers for this printer refer to the appropriate GE documents or the instructions that came with your printer e Ifyou purchased this system w
187. based on the reader number selected e Other DOs available on the associated ACU controller The installer has selected a DO other than 0 for the door strike DO If you are not certain which DO is being used for the door strike contact the installer Note When configuring paired readers both readers use the same door access DO Contact Digital Input Select from the drop down list of available Dis If the controlled door has a contact it can be used to monitor the door status e Default The door contact is automatically set as the first alarm point on the reader or reader interface e Other alarms available on the associated ACU controller The installer has selected an alarm other than 1 for the door contact If you are not certain which alarm point is being used contact the installer Note When configuring paired readers both readers use the same door contact REX Digital Input Select the DI from the drop down list that is connected to the REX device for this reader e Default The REX DI is automatically set as the second DI on the reader or reader interface e Other Dis available on the associated ACU controller The installer has selected a DI other than 2 for the door contact If you are not certain which DI is being used contact the installer How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 62 and complete the fields on this tab according to the reader and controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save befor
188. be open at the time of a change the open windows should be closed and then re opened before the new device description is able to be seen A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the camera type that you are configuring Alarms amp Events Event Triggers Refer to Chapter 5 Video on page 218 1 An event consists of a camera and either readers alarms or zone area activity A trigger causes an event or program routine to be executed depending on what options you set on the tabs of this form Example A camera begins recording in response to an invalid credential transaction An alarm is recorded in response to the credential transaction 2 Enter a description that conveys specific information relating to a physical location camera reader or state such as Front Door Inv Credential Camera 1 Reader 1 You can assign a reader alarm or camera alarm or both and this can be reflected in the description of the trigger 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form that become the source for this event trigger 4 When tagged events are identified by a search retrieved and viewed the video playback begins at the start of the event and continues playing until you elect to discontinue the playback Monitors amp Controls Controller Monitor Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 332 1 Right click on the Controller
189. behavior when the current day is a holiday The Mode Schedule supports up to 8 controller modes If the current day is set to a particular mode all the time intervals set for the same day in a certain time schedule will be disabled However if in the Time Schedule Time Chart the line corresponding to the mode itself contains one or more ranges the time schedule will be enabled in that range or ranges independently on the content of the other time intervals It is also possible to specify multiple modes working in parallel For example in the Bank Holiday mode schedule shown in Figure 26 the assigned controllers are selected for December 10 and assigned to Controller Modes 7 and 8 On December 10 the Business Hours time schedule shown in Figure 27 will be active only between 7 00 and 12 00 because the Mode 6 line cannot match with a Mode Schedule of type 7 and 8 Therefore only the Time Range specified on the Mode 8 line will be used to enable the Business Hours time schedule 84 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 26 Bank Holiday mode schedule m B Y SI ee Chapter 3 Schedules Figure 27 Business Hours time schedule 86 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Mode Event Trigger form The Mode Event Trigger form opens with the Controllers tab displayed The selections on the Mode Event Trigger form work in conjunction with the Threat Level Access selection on the Access Right tab of the Person fo
190. ber to which this reader is associated bb represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and Module Type represents the reader module Micro controllers mmmmm bb Module Type ACU controllers mmmmm na Module Type For example 00001 01 8RP would be the reader on controller one 8RP module one Chapter 4 Devices Table 61 Form fields continued Element Description Number This is a read only field The number of the reader Example For a Micro 5 PX 1 to 16 for a Micro PX 2000 1 to 4 The number corresponds to where the reader is connected on the controller See the Micro 5 Installation Guide Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Installation Guide or ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide for more information Reference ACU only The reference number corresponds to the reader number Model Select from the drop down list of card data formats The list of formats that display is associated with the type of controllers used in your system Micro controllers e CASI RUSCO Supervised if using a CASI RUSCO supervised reader such as the 94x or 97x series proximity readers set for supervised F 2F e CASI RUSCO 440 445 if using a CASI RUSCO Model 440 Model 445 or Model 910 e Other if using a reader that does not fit into the above categories ACU controllers e Magstripe if using magnetic stripe card readers e Wiegand if using Wiegand card readers e Custom ena
191. ble Controller for New Protocol Only If selected the ACU controller auto detects which protocol to use communicates with this application only and cannot communicate with any other application The ACU controller must be connected and online in this application Example If this option is not selected it is possible to continue both access control systems during a transition period to your new software You may need to run reports from your previous software using the identical ACU controllers How to 1 Using the guidelines in Table 19 enter an 8 digit number Example 00670010 The first four digits indicate your company number 67 with preceding zeros 0067 The second set of four digits indicate your company facility number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 2 Move your number into the listbox 3 Click Save before exiting this tab Configure regions The Region form in the Administration group displays if you are licensed for Global or Enterprise Standalone configurations Refer to the Facility Commander Wnx Installation Manual Global Edition or Enterprise Edition for complete details of the Global or Enterprise edition features When a server computer is added to an FCWnx Global or Enterprise configuration Region form records are also created You cannot delete a Region form record e The Region form lets you assign or edit the frequency of synchronization intervals for your Global configuration database re
192. bles a field for selection of a Credential Format Credential Format ACU only e This field is available when custom has been selected as the Model type Select from a drop down list of available credential formats in the database e First select the Model as Custom and then select a Credential Format Status Online This field is automatically enabled when this reader record is created An online reader accepts a valid credential read and unlocks a door provided it is one of the licensed active readers You also have the option to schedule a reader offline When the reader is offline the reader does not accept valid credential reads does not unlock a door and Activity monitor will not display any transactions for that reader Active This field is automatically selected and allows the accepting of credential transactions when this reader record is created The number of active readers counts against your reader limit as defined by your software license For example if your license key allows the use of 64 readers you may have only 64 readers marked as Active Note If this reader is associated with a SCIF ACU only you cannot control this reader status unless you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting this reader Physical Type Normal Credential Only This reader requires only a valid credential to gain access Credential and PIN Required This reader requires a valid credential and a valid number
193. button Ifyou are using this shortcut menu to get to the Time Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Note Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation cannot be controlled unless you are at the SCIF workstation ACU only Table 88 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmmm bb pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this alarm is associated bb represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number Example 00001 01 01 Tamper This tamper alarm is on controller 1 module 1 alarm 1 To change this description select and enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each alarm displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Example Failover Alarm BCTTOKYO Failover Alarm A failover alarm is created when backup clients are assigned to the default client computer The alarm record displays the default client computer name as part of the description This failover alarm indicates the default client as BCTTOKYO If the description indicates Region Failover Alarm the name of the Regional database server is included in the description Alarm descriptions coming into this application from an API can be ambiguous and the so
194. c cacon ia niisiis id a cece Cree Oven cta dad 331 Controller Monitor shortcut MENU ooocoocococcococcocorro ron rr 331 Controller flash and controller preference configuration ooooococoococcocorcorornorornnrn ro 332 Digital input Status 22csdccesamuddddalica ci wldidebecseendeetd eh adie hhh Mei bide he diddiess 335 Status OD A AA oh 335 Digital OUTputStAtUS eii abad de ia 336 TUU a 336 Graphics Console gt AAA AAA dees 338 Graphics Preferentes ii A dadas 338 SymbolEditO isc oa 338 Graphics Editors iii A A AA A A A 338 vii viii Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 10 Appendix A Graphics COMSOIE s2 00c 22 vase canbe A ye ede o ed ds ia 339 Manual control TOM ii a tt A Ed a eds 339 Reader Digital Outp t tab 0 aa 339 Alarm Digital INPUT TOD vs da ea et E EA 342 Areas and ZONE a A a 345 MOde Trata ii ee bl 346 Guard LOU taD ii T e e A a A EA R RAS 349 Trans ction override imac ii as 1 cts 350 OVeride Dit a A lddedaleld 351 Whats Next coxis nt et id de ci eee E E bd ed 352 REPONS nia AAA RADA 353 OVOENVICW 5 cos ia o RA E E 354 Designing repossess srecna ri pinyin ea E E OA EEE NNE EE ESEE OA E DESONOR 355 Template defied eiorinn A AEE A akan Ae 355 Report Templates WindOW sesisggsesune reres s nara See go dead Marana E EEE 355 New Template didlo ix sccn os ceo Se aes Oi Se a TR Ret dent St ances te PEE See neers 355 A 355 PERO A a soe 356 Cr ate default template tania tr dls 356 Set as de
195. can also be used to group records when running a Person report Table 154 Form fields Description Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Department from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator Department tab Use the Department tab to define Department names within your company Figure 117 Department tab Department e Facility v Department Description Table 155 Form fields Description Description This field accepts 64 alphanumeric characters Enter a Department name or edit an existing Department name in your company How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 155 and complete the field on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 269 Access rights departments persons and credentials Define persons Use the Person form Personnel group to create a record for a person someone who can access the readers controlled by the system Note A Person record assigned to a suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preferences form displays in red font in the list box on the right NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Table 156 Form fields Element Description Last Name Enter the last name of the individual record you are creating This is a required field Facility A
196. ce eee ene eens 121 1 View edit preference info Micro only 0 0 06 cece cece teen eee eee n rra rr 121 2 Start flashing ControllerSi2i 4444 Soneoeaciia dadddeaaes wiGins axa de ck Wadndenstnsdwoswasaashanaaae ans 121 3 ViEW eit ales a Maid delenit da E Aa 122 Define redders ex 0d inii Tikat Rina A A Meet Ee tele 123 REGS A A Rbchumabentad added 124 KEV OGG CLG SRUNING wig A a lanes 128 Door FUNCIONS taria 129 Ro ting ECA fe ee A E A AS dad 134 FUNCTIONS Schedule tab vera ta 135 Routing Schedule daban A A Tete E 136 Reader Type Schedules tab evi seaweed buna a ba aa eweealad wide One bebe aR Re REAR ANS 138 Status taD ecm anne ee teen ece an punne minal na wanton no oe nak suede or atau e eee g ama ees 139 Extended Controltab dd vial 141 Define digitaliinputs csi Ada 144 nj AAA beiddibid na ehbdaoes 145 Digital Output TAB ii si eeu ceded dd genie eos dada GEEAE Seed 147 DO GROUPS TODS iii A A A IA 148 Schedule ta ai da da dd 150 EVEN a 151 SAUS aia ails lem 153 Define digital Outputs vimos a a tebe 154 Digital D tputtab caca ile 155 Schedule tab tdo sd EE terio 157 iv Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Manual Controls Status tabs co vernennakesidh a as 158 Alarmi Control ami A da dll ee bs 159 Define digital output groups cece ccc cece eee rr rr 160 AA O A E 161 Schedule TOD iii A AAA A 162 Define INS tU Sii dan db be dosed ee aii 163 NSTUCUO MAL dd dd webs 163 Define alarmi respons
197. cenarios Scenario One A database server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible Result SQL services and replication continue normally without interruption Scenario Two A database server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible The database server computer is rebooted Result SQL services and replication continue normally because the assigned security token has not expired for the SQL services domain account There are limitations of which you should be aware Domain login must have been obtained before the domain controller became inaccessible Consult your IT Administrator for additional discussion about the security token Networking Question If I lost my network connection how do I test and reconnect If you lost cannot see or cannot change your network connection you can re register the Netshell d11 file by following these steps 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Open field enter regsvr32 systemroot system32 netshell dll 3 Click OK to display the following Figure 153 netshell dll dialog box x es lt gt DilRegisterServer in C WINNT system32 netshell dll succeeded 4 Click OK 5 Verify that you can open the properties of your network connection in the Network Connections folder of your computer Appendix A 389 Diagnostics and troubleshooting e If the issue is resolved and connection to
198. characters include the base 16 numbering system 0 through 9 and A through F Your photographs and signatures can be created by digital cameras video cameras and signature pads Support for certain Imaging features and functions may be product specific and not necessarily supported by all compatible peripherals Refer to Image capture on page 280 integrity utility The utility can be run manually if you want to check your database integrity The system compares and validates the integrity of your database schema If selected the system automatically corrects missing or incorrect schema properties such as columns keys constraints indexes triggers and tables The executable file is installed with this application and resides in the program folder Refer to How can I test the integrity of my database on page 385 language mass update On the Operator form click the drop down list to display a list of available languages installed on your system Select the language with which this operator accesses and operates the FCWnx system Refer to Multiple language support on page 65 This option is not available until at least one record exists in the list box to the right of the form The Mass Update mode lets you simultaneously update properties on a group of records within the application This is very helpful when a number of records for a single form require the identical property or value change Forms where Mass Update is a
199. check box to enable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs associated with this alarm trigger Additionally the Enable Alarm Video Popup must be enabled on the View menu If this operator s Permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected here Also refer to Enable alarm video popup How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 126 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Enable alarm video popup View menu Select this item to enable disable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs with an associated alarm trigger By default this is a toggle option and is not selected This option must also be activated by selection of Video Window Auto Pop up on the Video Event Trigger form if the operator has been assigned permission for Digital Video Viewer If operator permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected on the Video Event Trigger form Alarms tab Once selected the operator login retains this feature until disabled Chapter 5 Video Intrusion Zone tab Note The Intrusion Zone tab displays for systems licensed for Micro controllers The Intrusion Zone tab lets you assign intrusion zones and intrusion zone transaction types that become the source for this event trigger Figure 99 Intrusion Zone tab Video Event Trigger e Description
200. cilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available elevator e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an elevator The elevators that display in this list are those that are configured on the Elevator form Assigned Floors This windowpane displays the floors assigned to the current access right Assign Floors Click this button to display the Floor Assignment dialog box and select from a list of floors available for assignment by this operator Only floors assigned to the selected elevators are available for assignment If no floors are listed verify that the floors have been configured on the Floor form The Floor Assignment window displays when you click Assign Floors enabling you to select and assign a floor association for this form Only floors assigned to the selected elevators are available for assignment Only floors in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available floor e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a floor The floors that display in this list are those that are configured on the Floor form How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 148 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital Output Groups tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro
201. cility Use the facility description as a prefix on the Event Schedule form Description to indicate to which facility this event applies The time 24 00 is the same as 00 00 of the next day For example Friday at 24 00 is the same as Saturday at 00 00 e An event schedule defines an action such as resetting an anti passback status or changing a physical reader type e There is no end time associated with an event e Events are comprised of one or more times on one or more days of the week and modes e Events differ from time schedules in that events define when an action occurs and time schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs e An event can schedule an action multiple times even within the same day e Once an event is defined it may be applied anywhere events are used e The maximum number of all supported schedules combined for any one Micro controller is 1 023 74 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Note Deleting an event schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect of the deleted event schedule An event remains active until another event occurs to change it Figure 21 Event Schedules tab Event Table 40 Form fields 00 00 00 00 ooo osjo tapo Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday ri rl Saturday tt Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Event details Event time 18 30 Mode day Friday x Event Schedule
202. cility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 199 Form fields continued Element Description Set Threat Level Access to From the drop down list select one of the available threat levels e The Current Threat Level Access status as displayed in the list refreshes automatically following a change of threat level by schedule or manual control e Updates for controllers display in the Current Threat Level Access column of the Controller Monitor form e Updates for clients display on the Client Monitor form Apply Threat Level Access Click Apply Threat Level Access to send the command to the controller or client Available Threat Levels include O Normal Mode 1 Mode 2 and Mode 3 Threat Level Access labels are created and labeled on the Mode Threat Labels tab of the Preferences form Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter the reason for this change of mode This comment is written to the operator history file and displays on the Operator History report How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 199 and complete the selections on this tab Chapter 9 Monitor and control Guard tour tab Note The Guard Tour tab is enabled if you are licensed for guard tour The purpose of using the Guard Tour tab is to manually start pause resume or stop a guard tour that is currently in progress The upper windowpane displays all guard tours configured in your system to which this operator has access Figu
203. cility The facility assignment is a read only field Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Credential Definition tab Use the Credential Definition tab to define a credential Figure 126 Credential Definition tab amp Credential Assigned to Card Number Issue Number Number Status PIN number Table 167 Form fields e Description Facility Credential Definition Credential Status User Fields lt UNASSIGNED gt v Company and Site Code lt None gt be Follow extended unlock alarm sense time Follow conditional unlock Dates Last access Issue Date Expiration Time Retum Reader Manual control Find Credential Reset APB anc A state Element Description Assigned to Company and Site Code ACU only Select the name of the person to whom this credential is assigned If this credential is not yet assigned select lt UNASSIGNED gt Refresh Click to update the person list with the most up to date information It is possible to select all credentials for this person assign a status right click to display the shortcut menu and select mass update All records for the selected person are now assigned the identical status Select None or select from the drop down li
204. ck to display the alarm Instruction Assignment dialog box that lets you assign predefined alarm instructions to this alarm The Instructions Assignment window lets you modify the list of instructions assigned to this transaction Only instructions in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available instruction e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an instruction Click OK to display results in the Instruction windowpane How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 90 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital Outputs tab Use the fields on the Digital Outputs tab to link digital outputs to an alarm When this alarm is triggered the linked digital output is also triggered Figure 68 Digital Outputs tab ACU display shown Description 0018 0 01 Tamper Facility IgnoreFaciities a Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Output A Primary Local Dutput B 0018 1 01 DO 00181 0200 y Dutput Control Digital Output Time Schedule Link Only If Off Ignore Alarm Monit Table 91 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Output A Primary Local Available Outputs Windowpane A primary input assignment is not required The default is None Click the drop down list to select an available DO
205. cked this field lets you specify when the door should relock Close Micro With this option when the door is closed the door locks immediately regardless of the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above and the Alarm Sense Time Alarm sense field above is reset to zero Close ACU If this flag is set the door strike relay is activated only when the door sensor signals that the door is closed This mode is used above all for pin locked doors If pins are down while the door is open it would keep the door from being closed This feature keeps the pins up until the door is closed Open With this option when the door is opened the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above is set to zero and the door locks When the door is closed at any time during this process the Alarm Sense Time Alarm sense field above is reset to zero Duration With this option after the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above expires the door locks and the Alarm Sense Time is reset to zero During the Maximum Unlock Time the state of the door does not affect the Maximum Unlock Time or the Alarm Sense Time Note For Micro Controllers Door Lock On Close or Open only functions when the reader s Forced Alarm is set to Monitored On Request to exit REX Contact Micro only Open Enable this option if the Exit Request button is wired as open for an exit request e Closed Enable this option if the Exit Request button is wired a
206. ckup Regions Global Server Database Synchronization Interval min History Database Synchronization Interval min License Info Client License Photo Imaging License Reader License Camera License API Connection License Thin Client License Apogee Expiration Date Client Redundancy Visitor License Report Commander License Guard Tours Graphics ACURS XL Support Micro 5 Support Micro2K Support Deployment DVRs Supported 41 42 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 21 Form fields Element Description Global Server Database Synchronization Interval min If the selected server name e Isa Global database server a Yes displays in the Global Server field Synchronization interval fields are unavailable for input You can assign synchronization intervals on Regional database servers only e Is a Regional database server a No displays in the Global Server field Synchronization interval fields are available for input Note The synchronization processing time is dependent on how much data needs to be synchronized and the performance of your system Using Windows we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within your FCWnx Global configuration This database contains configuration data relating to credentials and controllers The default and minimum number of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes
207. clients Use the Client form in the Administration group to add a client to the FCWnx network or assign backup clients Note Only systems licensed for Client Redundancy have the ability to select backup clients Table 26 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter or edit a unique description for the client you are adding If you do not enter a description this field automatically populates with the PC Name selected on the Client tab Note Global Client Descriptions We recommend that your client description include a meaningful name of the Global or Regional database server computer When the description displays on the Client Monitor form the Global and Regional server are easily identifiable Example description bcttestpc client to bcteeserver wherebcttestpec is the name of the client computer and bcteeserver is the name of the Regional database server for this client 50 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 26 Form fields Element Description Facility A facility option can be designated for your new client record from the Facility drop down list Note You must restart the FCWnx client program for changes to the Auto logoff selection to take effect Networking FCWnx requires that you set up a network protocol to allow the server and clients to communicate FCWnx uses the TCP IP network protocol You need to validate vis
208. clude issued but unused credentials Select this check box to suspend credentials that were issued but never used Days of Inactivity Click the drop down list to select the number of days the credential is inactive before automatically suspending it Credential User Field Logging Click the drop down list to select the Credential User Field to be used to log the inactivity suspension message which is in the format Inactivity Suspension MM DD YYYY where MM is the two digit month DD is the two digit year YYYY is the four digit year How to 1 Assign the minimum number of characters allowed for a password in the FCWnx system 2 Assign the minimum number of numeric characters allowed for a password in the FCWnx system Note If the current operator has permission to change their password the preferences selected here display in the Change Password window as reminders 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 39 System preferences ACU Settings tab ACU only Note The ACU Settings tab is enabled for input for systems using ACU controllers only Use the ACU Settings tab to assign an 8 digit numeric code associated with the sites of your company business units Figure 9 ACU Settings tab C Preferences System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Company and Site Code A Default Company and Site Code
209. cord Click to delete record The Delete Record option deletes the current record from the database Note BE CAREFUL when selecting this option as deleted records cannot be recovered The Delete Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given all permissions Some forms such as the Reader form do not have a delete option Notes The Notes menu option opens a text file notes txt into which you can enter site specific information The program used to edit this file is the program that has been associated with txt files in Windows usually Notepad The notes txt file is saved to your desktop by default Logoff Click to display a dialog box Enter your logoff ID and Password to quit the FCWnx client program Print Setup Select Print Setup to open the Print Setup Window allowing you to select your printer printer properties paper source and orientation If your printer is networked you may be required to adjust the security properties At the computer that owns the printer navigate to the Properties window for the selected printer Click Start Settings Printers Select the printer and then right click From the shortcut menu select Properties On the Security tab of the Properties window proceed to add Anonymous Login to the Group or user names Print Preview Report The Print Preview Report option lets you preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is
210. corded Video If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description this option is not available If an alarm transaction is displayed with a camera icon to the left of the alarm description select to view live video from the cameras associated with the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 213 for window management information Note In order to view recorded video the DVR must be online and available and not serving another request for playback of recorded video based on this event The following windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer window Refer to Video Console Help for information about the Digital Video Viewer 2 Video windows displaying the current live view of the cameras associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Single Recorded Frame Select to display the first frame of the event recording as a still photo The photo is displayed for 30 seconds and then the recorded video is shown Quick Launch Select to automatically access live and recorded video from the cameras associated with the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 213 for window management information Note In order to view live and recorded video the DVR must be online and available and not serving another request for playback of recorded video based on this event The followi
211. cription e User defined custom This credential is mapped to a Suspended on the Custom Credential Status form and credential status does not grant access The user defined custom credential status displays in the Activity Type column as assigned on the Credential form Example 1 On the Custom Credential Status form a status of Pregnancy leave is created and assigned a Status of Suspended 2 Jane Doe goes on leave and her credential is assigned a Status of Pregnancy leave as selected from the Credential form Status drop down list 3 While on leave Jane swipes her badge at a valid reader Access is denied 4 The Activity Monitor Activity Type column displays a message of Pregnancy leave e Lost Credential status is lost e Unknown Credential is not in this application database e APB In Invalid Micro only Current credential APB status of IN and attempted to gain access to an APB IN reader APB Out Invalid Micro only Current credential APB status of OUT and attempted to gain access to an APB OUT reader e Timed APB Invalid Your credential has already been presented at a timed APB reader and you are attempting to go back through that same reader within the timed APB timeframe this timeframe is determined on the Reader tab of the Reader form e TA In Invalid Micro only Current credential T amp A status of IN and attempted to gain access to T amp A IN reader e TA Out Invalid Micro only Current crede
212. ct the Photo tab on the Person form Select one of the records in the Record list Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image Adjust and then click Save to save the adjusted settings Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays Note Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application e Credential Credentials Credential Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons re and credentials on page 258 To create your own simple credential design 1 Click the add icon EM begin a new record and enter a unique Description and then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled Assign a facility Review the guidelines and complete the tab on this form Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application Select New from Imaging File menu Draw a shape in your design window the size of your credential Aan e S For a background color select Edit Background and then select a color from the Color dialog that displays 7 Add one or several bitmaps inside the credential design preferences 8 Add one or several text boxes 9 Move or resize the photo and text as desired 10 Click Save Table 1 Quick setup sequenc
213. ct this option to open an FCWnx application log file spl extension This opens a LogFile Dialog window and allows the user to select the file to open Select the Filename and click OK The logfile displays in the Diagnostic Viewer window This option is also found on the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar Open Other Note This selection is for GMC VMC logfiles log extension Select this option to open an application log file associated with GMC or VMC diagnostics This opens a Launch External Logfiles window Select a file with a log extension and click Open The file opens in Notepad for your review Close Select to close the current log file Delete Contents Select this option to delete the contents of the current log file WARNING Deleting the contents of a log file causes all messages in the log to be discarded Once discarded these messages no longer exist 381 382 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 206 File menu continued Reload Select this option to reload the current log file into the viewer This command is most useful after changing the filter settings Properties Select this option to view the current log file s properties such as the full path name of the log file the number of entries that it contains and the number of those entries displayed Preferences Refer to Preferences on page 383 Exit Select to close the Diagnostic Viewer application
214. cua iocinn danos cia RE A E E EE a E EE ERE EE vedas 226 DVR disk is Tull scccd52dcns na aeree EEE A EE EAE ETOR E AEAN Aa 227 Navigating Video Console cece ccc cece eee cate Eana rr 228 Video Console WiINGOW ii rd ide rta 228 NOVIA ION PONE usaras ares bi dida 229 Play OO iii 230 A OS eeeana wey Maeeeor 230 View MENU taihnd NN 231 Win GOWsTMe Ulead 232 SA O AA 232 How to search by system eventis essri rreren sane oa en E AEAN NAA A aa aa n wis E arate 232 How to seanch by Video ENE a a deis 233 Howto search by timeand dat sori rs A dis 233 Howto search Dy MOMO cess ve bes al A Ad sys tees 234 Define CCTV INterfaces coria ii a o a A Cares 234 EIR AA ra o vi ds A Aids 235 vi Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Areas and intrusion ZONES ear iaa 237 Overview OPE escenas pner re ieia AAA AAA 238 Define dreds ises cos cae tekate nEn KEE ee SAE a Mive A VENEERS 238 Areata Dressy O ENS 240 Reader CB esc n A IN 242 A 244 A aio e il 247 Digital OUIPUtTAD asi A A 247 Anm Disarm AO tico 248 Arm disarm byimanual Controls a oniccsvsgeueceny ene veccesediaee puasewpengcedenmedeensenehaew seeds 249 Overview intrusion ZONES 2 cee eee ee eee eet eee ee ee ne E EE 249 Define intrusion ZON S eis c cc det ane ov odd a a E EEEE 251 Intrusion zon TAB tii hae AA A A ER 252 A A 254 E ZONE essor eaid n EEEE EEEn EE E gee AED DIRAE wes EEE E 255 Whats NEX soo nih ced ete cio da ai 25
215. d Backup Clients tab on page 54 Display Redundancy Notification Client Monitoring Client monitoring on page 325 Active Client How long should wait when a failover occurs What alarms display on the Alarm Monitor Backup Clients tab on page 54 Database Connection Heartbeat Alarm tab on page 166 What is the behavior on the Digital Video Viewer and Network List Video Console window on page 228 Help Recovery Recovery Notification e Messages Backup Clients tab on page 54 Display Redundancy Notification e Client monitoring on page 325 How do recover Client Monitor shortcut menu on page 327 What happens when a default client is back up Backup Clients tab on page 54 Display Redundancy Notification What is the timing on the recovery Takeover and recovery timing on page 57 Chapter 2 59 System preferences Define clients groups The Client Groups form in the Administration group lets you assign FCWnx client computers into logical groups Members of a client group cannot have conflicting mode schedules A comment box is available to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field Note Client groups can be assigned to specific alarm routing and bumping configurations You may want to review the Sample Scenario in Figure 80 Routing and bumping scenario on p
216. d assign or unassign one or more areas for the selected ACU Up to 120 areas can be assigned How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 55 to complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 116 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Port Settings tab The Port Settings tab displays only when you are configuring a controller type as direct connect network network direct network dialup or network network controller type Refer to the sample Connection type figure displayed below Connection type Network Network Dial up Direct Network Network Dial up Network Direct Figure 41 Port Settings tab Controller eS Description ACUXL Facility Ignore Facilities Sj Controller Definition Security TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Port Settings Direct Configuration COM port Network Configuration Primary Network IP Address a TH A A O Network Name Secondary Network Table 57 Form fields Element Description Direct Configuration COM port You are able to change this setting only if the controller connection type is direct connect or network direct Otherwise this field is unavailable From the drop down list select the COM port to which this controller is connected The system operates with the default setting of None if no port is designated Chapter
217. d in the Graphics Editor These maps point out the location and type of incoming alarms as they occur such as a door held open alarm Operators can issue commands and launch applications such as locking and unlocking doors Graphics Console consists of four applications that allow you to edit link and monitor graphic maps These applications are e Graphics Preferences e Symbol Editor e Graphics Editor e Graphics Console Graphics Preferences The Graphics Preferences option lets you set preferences for a graphics map You can define the number of layers that can be used to separate object types and the rate at which links blink to identify a graphics map in alarm Symbol Editor Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console Note This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Management Console GMC User Manual The Symbol Editor option lets you associate object types such as doors readers digital inputs or controllers with icons representing properties and conditions Use the Symbol Editor to create delete save upload and download symbol schemes Graphics Editor Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console Note This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Management Console GMC User Manual The Graphics Editor option lets you place symbols representing devices such as doors readers digital inputs or controllers
218. d that you delete the appended data using the Preferences form Clear Archive tab This keeps the current Archive file from becoming too large in size Restoring databases Complete instructions for Restore functions are detailed in the installation manual that came with this software Restoring your databases depends on your system and how you performed your backups Note For Professional Edition systems you can restore the backup application databases using the Database Maintenance Utility Chapter 2 37 System preferences Security tab The Security tab lets you select the preferences for passwords and credentials used in the FCWnx system Figure 8 Security tab Preferences AAA System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security acu Settings Password Minimum Length characters a 4 C Cannot begin with a numeric character C Cannot end with a numeric character O Must be mixed case contain both upper and lower case characters C Must contain both alpha and numeric characters Minimum numeric characters 3 Credential Hide PIN Number Automatic Credential Suspension J Enable daily scheduler Inch Days of inactivity Credential User Field Logging Table 18 Form fields Element Description Password Minimum Length characters This field accepts 1 to 20 characters Enter a number and then select those features that you want to enfo
219. d time until that credential is presented to a T amp A out reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global T amp A on the System Settings tab of the Preferences form a different controller T amp A Out Time amp Attendance out This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to a T amp A in reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global T amp A on the System Settings tab of the Preferences form a different controller In required This type of reader opens the door only if the credential presented currently has an IN status For example if you had a credential with a status of OUT and attempted to gain access through a reader that was marked as In required the door would not open T amp A In Out Time Attendance In Out This type of reader is used only for Wiegand swipe readers such as the Model 100 To get an IN status hold the credential so that the front of the credential is facing you The logo is usually printed on the front of the credential Then swipe the credential through the reader To get an OUT status turn the credential around so that the back of the credential is now facing you Swipe the credential through the reader Chapter 4 Devices Table 61 Form fields continued Element Description APB and T amp A Options e Passive APB and T amp
220. d to communicate with FCWnx This option is purchased individually and licensed with your FCWnx system For complete details contact your GE Security Sales Representative The number of API records that you can configure is limited to the number of API connections for which you are licensed Once configured real time event processing and remote command and control functionality extended by way of the API includes the following e Bidirectional alarm event processing for monitoring and acknowledgement e Receiving FCWnx access control credential events e Receiving digital input events e Receiving intrusion zone events e Control of alarm point monitoring On Off e Control of digital input points Enable Disable e Control of digital output points Open Close e Control of intrusion zones Arm Disarm Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation do not display and cannot be controlled through an API connection unless you are at the SCIF workstation An API can be installed on any computer in your FCWnx system however do not attempt to install on a domain controller The installation does not complete properly Review the system configuration with your IT Department for alternative reconfiguration options Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter the title of the external API This should be a unique identifier to the product Definition tab Use the Definition tab to enter in
221. dd events to the list select an event and click The Edit Sense Time dialog box displays Assign an event and sense time Remove To remove events from the list select an event and click How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 74 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Chapter 4 153 Devices Select the Status tab to display information about the digital input as stored in the controller s database such as its sense time Figure 57 Status tab Table 75 Form fields Digital Input e Description Facility i x Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events Status Last status date Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete Element Description Sense Time Micro only The sense time as of the last status date and time Enabled Micro only Yes No Whether the digital input is enabled or disabled as of the last status date and time Status ACU only Reset Enable Active Enable Last status date The date on which the status was last requested Last status time The time that status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this digital input 154 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 75 2
222. de for any one Micro controller is 1 023 The maximum number of combined schedules time event and mode for any one ACU controller is 253 e One time schedule can have up to 16 intervals e FCWnx supports up to 2 048 time intervals per ACU Define time schedules The Time Schedule form Schedules group is used to create time schedules e A time schedule determines time intervals for actions to occur such as turning on alarm monitoring e Time schedules are comprised of one or more time intervals start and stop times on one or more days of the week and modes e For Micro controller systems time schedules differ from events in that time schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs while events schedule when an action occurs e A time schedule can define an action multiple times within the same day e Once atime schedule is defined it can be applied anywhere time schedules are used e The maximum number of all supported schedules combined for any one Micro controller is 1 023 The maximum number of all supported schedules combined for any one ACU controller is 253 Note Time schedules define the days of the week and times an action starts and ends Note If you delete a schedule while it is currently active this schedule never ends For example if you have a schedule that unlocks a door and the schedule is deleted while the door is unlocked that door will remain unlocked Note For ACU controller syste
223. ded unlock alarm sense See Define persons on page 269 Credential form The following fields are available for mass update Assigned To Status Follow extended unlock alarm sense time Follow conditional unlock Dates Issue Dates Expiration and Dates Return See Define credentials on page 286 When changing an assigned credential to unassigned the status automatically changes to Issuable When changing status to Issuable a message displays a Yes or No option If Yes the status automatically changes to Issuable and selected credentials are unassigned When changing an unassigned credential status is Issuable to an assigned person the status becomes Active Records selected for mass update with a status changing to anything other than Issuable causes a check for credential assignment If any credential in the mass update selection is not currently assigned these credential records become unavailable and a message displays indicating they are unavailable Chapter 7 295 Access rights departments persons and credentials Define credential alias Note The Credential Alias form is available only if aliasing option was selected during initial server installation Use the Credential Alias form Credentials group to control the alias numbers that display in place of the encoded credential number An alias is a number that represents the encoded credential number You decided whether to use credential alias and which meth
224. dential as valid the controller communicates with the host to confirm credential validity If the credential is valid the information for that credential is downloaded to the controller therefore the controller acknowledges this credential as valid the next time the credential is presented to the reader Polling ACU only Additional Poll Delay ms Determines the amount of time for the head of line controller to poll each downstream controller Report Real Time Digital Output Status Exit Request Debounce DI Alarm Termination Type This check box is enabled by default Any digital output change of state will be reflected on the alarm Graphics Console in real time status Note Every transaction that changes the state of a digital output on this controller is now written to history e If you intend to place digital output symbols on your graphics maps that indicate the state of a digital output this option must be selected for this controller Refer to your Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Symbol Editor Properties and Conditions for information about setting controls and assigning properties for your graphics monitoring e If this option is not selected you cannot see digital output status for this controller on your graphics maps and digital output transactions are not written to digital output history Micro only Enable this field to increase the sense time on all the Exit Dis exit requests This fie
225. departments select lt ALL gt e Activity Select the credential activity you want to use to filter report information such as Duress Invalid Duress Valid Duress Valid No Passage Duress Valid Open Guard Tour Activity Invalid Invalid APB In Invalid APB Out Invalid Floor Invalid PIN Invalid T amp A In Invalid T amp A Out 364 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Invalid Timed APB Lost Max Invalid PIN Overdue Override Unknown Valid Valid No Passage and Valid Open If you want to use all activities select lt ALL gt Logical Reader Type Select the logical reader type that you want to use to limit the report such as APB In APB In or Out APB Out Elevator In Required Normal T amp A In T amp A In and Out T amp A In or Out or T amp A Out If you want to use all the logical reader types select lt ALL gt Floor Description Select the range of floor descriptions you want to display on the report If you want to list all floor descriptions leave these fields blank Area and Zone History report Use the Additional Filters tab to select additional specific source criteria by which this report is generated Activity Type Select the type of activity to use in generating this report If you want to use all intrusions zone activity type messages select lt ALL gt Location Select the source of the zone activity as a Credential Digital Input Manual Controller or lt ALL gt Device Description Enter the rang
226. der and its associated time schedule and access rights Who Has Access Report The Who Has Access Report contains information for the following Selected Readers Exception Areas Person type Department when grouped by Access right Selected Access rights Exception Areas Person type and Department when grouped by Reader ACU only Selected Access rights Readers Person Type and Department when grouped by Area Exception Note The Group by Area Exception selection is only for ACU controller systems The area exception count is listed in the statistics for ACU For micro it is listed as 0 To generate the Who Has Access report 1 2 3 4 m From the Reports menu select External From the Open dialog box double click on the FCWnx Crystal Reports folder to open it Select the Who Has Access Report file and then click Open The Enter Values window opens Select the number 1 from the Group By drop down list and then click OK The Enter Values window opens In the Group By drop down list select either Access Right Reader or Area Exception ACU only Select the values you would like to include in the report and then click OK 368 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual The Preview Report window opens showing each selected reader and its associated time schedule and access rights Chapter 10 369 Reports Saving Exporting Reports Reports can be saved exported in a variety of formats including Crystal Reports
227. des a list of cameras and camera details such as camera presets on the system and the DVRs that own them Controller provides a listing of controllers defined on the system and controller specific information Digital Input provides a listing of digital inputs DI defined on the system and DI specific information Digital Output provides a listing of digital outputs DO defined on the system and DO specific information Digital Output Group provides a listing of digital output groups defined on the system and the controller that owns them Digital Video Recorder provides a list of DVRs defined on the system and DVR specific details Elevator provides a listing of elevators defined on the system and elevator specific information Reader provides a listing of readers defined on the system and reader specific information Group Records Select the field by which you want to group the records This provides the organization of the report The choices in the drop down list correspond with the selection of Report Type This option may not be available on all report types Sort Groups Displays the fields in order of precedence by which the groups are sorted If this box is empty click Add to display a list of available fields This option may not be available on all report types Add Click to select the fields by which you want to sort the groups This displays the Sort Fields dialog Delete Select a field and click to remove a field from the So
228. dialog e Only credential holders with an intrusion zone assigned on the Access Right form are able to arm and disarm zones using any of the credential keypad readers within a zone e When a zone is armed all readers within the zone go offline and normal access rights do not gain access into the area e When a zone is disarmed all readers within the zone go online and normal access rights gain access into the area If schedules were assigned the reader follows the schedule If you expect to arm disarm by using any one of the readers within a zone e That reader must be assigned on the Access Right tab of the Access Right form and be an assigned reader in the intrusion zone listed on the Intrusion Zones tab e Individually created access rights must be assigned to the person that arms disarms the intrusion zone One right allows access to the readers and another right allows access to the intrusion zone Places amp Policies Access Right Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 258 Use this form to create access rights to define where with readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry For systems using Micro controllers e Assign readers to the access right using the Access Right tab e Define which floors a person can access and what digital output groups a person can trigger with a valid credential Note Floors and elevators are assigned to an access right
229. displaying A printer must be added to your system in order for this feature to be available Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report Note On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom value always reads 100 regardless of the zoom used Print Report The Print Report option lets you send the current report to a defined printer This option is available only when a Report form or report is displaying Export This option is available only when a Report form is displaying The Export option lets you select an export format for your report There are a variety of formats available including text Word for Windows Lotus HTML and Excel Select an export destination for the report to a disk file exchange folder Lotus Domino Lotus Domino Mail or Microsoft Mail MAPI Save Template As Select this option to create a new template and save under a new file name This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Set As Default Template Use this option to select a template to use as the default template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template While the selected Report form is displaying select Set As Default Template A message displays stating the current template is now the default template
230. dresses administration and behavior of a successful Global configuration Particular functions in the Global configuration must be handled locally at the Regional level The following table is an overview of administrative functions and links to forms where configuration and behavior must be considered Table 24 Global configuration Regional rules Form Updates allowed in remote Regions Deletions allowed in remote Regions Comments Access Right form Readers Yes Yes Adding or deleting readers from an access Only right for a local Region or remote Region The controllers get updated with the correct reader information in both cases Digital Output Groups Elevators and Zone assignment for access right must wait until replication interval to update the remote database and then perform a database download to controllers in the remote Region Alarm form No See Comments N A Updating in a Remote Region Updates to noncontroller alarms such as CCTV Camera and DVR alarms are allowed Updates to devices directly controlled by I O modules in the controller such as digital inputs and readers are not allowed They must be updated at a local Regional level Alarm Group form No N A Credential Alias form Yes Yes No action required CCTV Alarm form Yes Yes No action required Client form Yes Yes Backup Clients tab Assign dial up controller phone numbers Digital Input form No N A Digital
231. drop down list On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital outputs in the selected digital output group to be in the Active state Select Off if the above schedule is when you do not want the digital outputs in the selected digital output group to be in the Active state Chapter 4 163 Devices How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 84 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define instructions Use the Instruction form Alarms amp Events group to create messages that display on the Alarm Monitor form whenever the associated alarm occurs Instructions are directions on how to react to specific transactions Table 85 Form fields Description Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Instruction tab Use the Instruction tab to create instructions on how to react to specific transactions The instructions should belong to the same facility as the transaction with which they are associated Figure 64 Instruction tab Instruction e Facility gnore Facilities Instruction Number pp Instruction feall 911 Table 86 Form fields Element Description Number Assign a number to the instruction records
232. ds Element Description Show Inactive Alarms Display alarms in an inactive state and removed from view These alarms were previously acknowledged or purged from the Alarm Monitor This is a toggle election and is a way to display previous alarm activity without running a report Alarm Opens the Alarm form allowing you to modify or view that particular alarm record Graphic Console Opens the Graphic Console form allowing you to view the alarm graphics map to which the alarm belongs 323 324 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 186 Form fields continued Element Description View Live Video If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description this option is not available If an alarm transaction is displayed with a camera icon to the left of the alarm description right click to view live video from the cameras associated with the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 213 for window management information Note In order to view live video the DVR must be online if it is a duplex recorder the recorder must also be in record mode The following windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer Refer to Video Console Help for information about the Digital Video Viewer 2 Video windows displaying the current live view of the cameras associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Re
233. dule Reader schedule Time schedule EE y Online O Offline Door schedule Time schedule None v Unlock O Lock C Disable Auto Unlock Table 64 Form fields Element Description Reader schedule Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Online Offline Select whether the schedule chosen above sets the reader online or offline 136 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 64 Form fields continued Element Description Door schedule Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Unlock The door will unlock at the start of the selected time schedule and switch to Lock at the end of the selected time schedule Lock Micro only The door will lock at the start of the selected time schedule and switch to unlock at the end of the selected time schedule Lock No Access ACU only The door will lock and not allow access at the start of the selected time schedule and then switch to unlock at the end of the selected time schedule Disable Auto Unlock Select this check box to temporarily disable the schedule that would automatically unlock a door at the start of a new time schedule When a valid credential is presented to the reader for the first time and during the current time schedule in effect the door unlocks for the first time and the schedule is now in place as configured If no valid access has been detected from start of schedule to current
234. dule you receive an additional alarm record for each reader called Supervised Exit 94 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual None of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section In addition all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 To change this go to the Alarm Group form Digital input records A digital input record is generated for each reader record Digital output records If you added a 2RP or 2SRP module a digital output record called Aux DO is generated for each reader record There are 2 DO relays available on a 2RP module For ACU controller systems When RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 RREIKE modules are added the following records are created Reader records Alarm records None of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section Digital input records Digital output records DI module record creation For Micro controller systems When you add a 20 DI module twenty 20 digital input records are created Example 00001 01 01 DI This digital input is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in
235. dule is when you do not want to monitor alarms Print Alarm Note This field is disabled for all alarms associated with ACU controllers Time schedule Click the drop down list to select a time schedule Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms or No if the above schedule is when you do not want to print alarms How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 93 and complete the fields on this tab Example If alarm monitoring is scheduled On it returns to Off no monitoring at the end of the assigned schedule 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 175 176 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Events tab Note The Events tab is enabled for systems with Micro controllers only Use the Events tab to assign events for alarm groups and alarm sense times Events define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with an event Therefore that event stays in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually Figure 72 Events tab Table 94 Form fields e Alarm e Description ja Facility y Alam Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV m Alarm group Event Description Edit Add Remove Element Description Alarm group Micro only This windowpane displays assigned events and their associated alarm groups Edit This button is available
236. e Chapter 2 63 System preferences Determine and create operators An operator is an individual who can access and control the FCWnx software Once a facility is assigned to an operator it becomes available in the Facility drop down the next time the Operator logs in Operators are associated with permissions that define the actions operators can perform within FCWnx Table 34 Form field Element Description Facility A facility can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Operator tab Use the Operator form in the Administration group to create operator records that allow individuals to access the FCWnx program Figure 18 Operator tab amp Operator e Facility v gt Operator Facilities Login ID Name Permission v Language FCWnx Password Authentication Password Confirm Password E Permission To Change Password Expiration E Password never expires Expires in days Warn prior to expiration days 4 Active Directory Password Authentication Active Directory Domain Server Sil Caer 64 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 35 Form fields Element Description Login ID Assign and enter a login ID for this operator Name Ent
237. e Enhance and Crop These options allow you to individually crop or enhance the current image You can adjust the existing image without having to recapture the image Compare and Restore When a stored image is downloaded and a new image is captured the Compare option is enabled on the shortcut menu to compare the newly captured or edited image to the original image Choosing Restore undoes any changes made to the original image Clear When you select the Clear option from the shortcut menu the image is cleared and the image file is deleted The image cannot be recovered Enhancement Shortcut Menu There are four submenus for the Enhancement shortcut menu option Adjust by Example When you select this option a dialog box displays You can adjust the brightness contrast focus exposure and red green and blue colors Special Effect by Example This dialog box lets you add special effects to any image The applicable effects are Mosaic Impressionist Watercolor Emboss and Posterize Remove Red Eye This dialog box lets you remove the red eye effect of any person in an image Vignette The Vignette dialog box lets you configure a vignette effect to any image Manipulation Shortcut Menu Mirroring Flip Vertically Flip an image from top to bottom Chapter 7 283 Access rights departments persons and credentials Flip Horizontally Flip an image from left to right Invert negative Select this option to inv
238. e Time schedule Table 152 Form fields Element Description Available Areas This list box displays a list of areas available to be assigned to this access right Click the right arrow button to add to the Selected Areas windowpane Selected Areas This list box displays a list of areas selected to be assigned to this access right Click the left arrow button to remove from the Selected Areas windowpane Area Access Allow access at all times Select if you want the access right to allow access at all times Allow access by schedule Time Schedule The time schedule governs when the access right grants access to the Area The default for all areas is Always If you want to change the schedule for this Area select a schedule from the drop down list If you need to create a schedule open the Time Schedule form Note ACU controllers support eight time schedule intervals per time schedule Even if you previously saved a time schedule record with more than eight intervals only eight intervals are saved to the controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 151 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Define personnel type The Personnel Type form Personnel group is used to create category types for employees and assign default credential designs for each category Personnel Type tab Use the Personnel Type tab to
239. e You should only use RAID 5 for your operating system boot partition if your RAID 5 solution is hardware based Hardware based RAID solutions are provided by Dell s line of PowerEdge servers available to order directly from GE Security For those systems that have already been configured and the location of the databases needs to be corrected GE have created step by step procedures when moving the database files The procedures are 393 394 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual located in the Technical Bulletin section of the GE security business Web site Go to www gesecurity com for additional information RAID recovery what you need In order to perform a recovery you need the following items e Dell OpenManage Server Assistant CD Version 7 2 or later provided with your Dell server e Dell OpenManage Applications CD Version 3 2 or later provided with your Dell server e Dell Online Documentation CD provided with your Dell server e Dell PowerEdge Systems Installation and Troubleshooting Guide provided with your Dell server e Microsoft Windows 2003 or Windows 2008 Server CD and applicable service pack e Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 CD and latest applicable service pack Replacing a RAID failed hard drive Note For optimum results GE recommends that the drive be powered off before it is removed or replaced A loss of data or data corruption may occur if disks are replaced without powering off Replace the damaged hard
240. e continued Element Description Task 9 Back up your system Application Group Quick Setup guide qs 19 Refer to the application installation manual for detailed instructions for all him types of backups This list assists in backing up a Professional Edition system 1 Backup the entire Facility Commander Wnx folder If you purchased your system from GE your system contains a CD drive acceptable for backup purposes Copy the Facility Commander Wnx folder to your backup media 2 To back up your Facility Commander Wnx databases custom stored procedures or triggers added to the Facility Commander Wnx databases need to be removed You can re create custom procedures or triggers after restoring the database files Create a folder on your system where the backup files are to be stored Click Start Programs FCWnx and then Database Maintenance Utility Ifthis utility is not found in the Start menu and then go to the Facility Commander Wnx directory and double click the file Maintenance exe Click Backup Accept the default Login of sa and enter the Password for sa The default password assigned for the sa user is SecurityMasteros Navigate to the drive and directory folder on your system where the backup files are to be stored Double click to open the Destination folder Holding down the left mouse button drag and drop the destination folder onto each of the database fields The BAK files in each f
241. e 2 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 6 Mode 7 Made 7 Mode 8 Mode 8 Threat Level 0 Normal Threat Level 0 Normal Threat Level 1 Low Threat Level 1 Low Threat Level 2 Medium Threat Level 2 Medium Threat Level 3 High Threat Level 3 High Table 14 Form fields Element Description Mode 1 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode 2 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode 3 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode4 For systems using ACU controllers these additional modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Threat Level 0 Normal conditions no threat level Threat Level 1 Low threat level Threat Level 2 Medium threat level Threat Level 3 High threat level 30 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to a 3 Select any one of the mode label fields Enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Repeat for each label field that you want to edit Click Save before you exit this tab Address Fields tab Use the Address Fields tab to modify the labels of the address fields These labels are used on the Person form Figure 5 Address Fields ta
242. e Connection is plugged in properly e Modem settings are correct Maximum speed value of 9600 applies to most modems If you are having problems using this setting refer to your modem manual for more information Message 2 displays one time only and that is when your modem returns to operational after a period when the modem was not operational Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting The Controller Monitor form indicates that the controller dedicated to a modem is in an error state Question Why does the host dial a controller Whenever a change is made to a form that requires an update to the controller database such as changes to the Person form the host dials the controller with the changes If you make many changes the controller may go to idle between your changes causing a disconnection with the host Then the host needs to dial the controller back to download the next change You have two options available to work around this situation 1 Increase the idle time found on the Preferences form Communications tab on the controller that gives you more time to make the changes Server services must be restarted for the changes to take effect 2 Put the controller offline make the changes and then put the controller online The host automatically dials the controller and downloads the changes Setup RAID Server Question The RAID Server Event Viewer Systems and Applications Log indicates a drive failure Periodica
243. e Credential form making available the selected credential record Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 181 Form fields continued Element Description View Live Video Accesses live video from the cameras associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger In order to view live video the DVR must be online if it is a duplex recorder the recorder must also be in record mode The following windows open e The Digital Video Viewer Refer to Navigating Video Console on page 228 for information about the Digital Video Viewer e Video windows displaying the current live view of the cameras associated with the credential transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Recorded Video Accesses previously recorded video from the cameras associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger In order to view recorded video the DVR must be online and available The DVR cannot be serving another request for playback of any recorded video event The following windows open e The Digital Video Viewer Refer to Navigating Video Console on page 228 for information about the Digital Video Viewer e Video windows displaying the recorded video associated with the credential transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Single Recorded Frame Select to display the first frame of the event reco
244. e Facility drop down list Note The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created Be very careful when assigning the facility of a DI to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment Digital Input tab Use the Digital Input tab to configure the selected digital input Figure 52 Digital Input tab Digital Input e Description Facility v Controller Module Number Type x Active State Sense time O Closed Minutes Seconds O Open o g os O Both Enabled Comment K Table 70 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description only field and unavailable for modification Controller Displays the controller description to which this digital input is associated This is a read only field and unavailable for modification Module Displays the controller module number where this digital input is located This is a read modification Number Displays the number of the digital input This is a read only field and unavailable for 145 146 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 70 Form fields continued Element Description Type Select the type of DI that you are configuring If you select another Type click Search to update the list box display of associated triggers
245. e Last name field and click Search You can also use the character that lets you search for patterns Example A search for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers Question How do I display underlined letters for keyboard navigation This is an Effects option in the Display settings of your computer To change this setting gt AN 5 6 Appendix A 397 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Click Start Settings Control Panel and then Display Double click Display to open the Display Properties window of your computer Navigate to the Effects options of your computer This may vary depending on your operating system Clear the selected option that reads Hide underlined letters for keyboard navigation until I press the Alt key Click OK Close the Control Panel Question Why can t I delete a record Some forms such as the Digital Output Status form and the Manual Control form do not contain a Delete button because they display only status information Other forms such as the Reader form Alarm form Alarm Group form Digital Output form and the Digital Output Group form also do not contain a Delete button To keep the system stable no one is given permission to delete these records not even a System Administrator These records are deleted when the associated controller is deleted However on other forms you may be assigned delete permission If yo
246. e Not Applicable This option is used for CCTV workstations only During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Administration Imaging Status e Disabled Select if you want to disable Imaging in order to enable another client computer e Enabled Select to enable Imaging here but you are limited to the number of licensed Imaging stations enabled at one time The number of Imaging licenses presently active can be found on the Client Monitor form Thin Client Status An FCWnx client computer can also be a thin client A thin client has Terminal Services and or Citrix server software installed If the FCWnx client has Thin Client Status of Enabled other computers can connect to the Terminal or Citrix server on the FCWnx client and run FCWnx e Disabled Select if you want to disable the thin client option e Enabled Select to enable the thin client option at this FCWnx client The number of thin clients you can enable is controlled by the number of thin client licenses you have Refer to the Client Monitor form which displays the number of thin client licenses presently available and in use Auto Logoff Select the number of minutes the system waits since the last action was taken before logging off the current operator To turn off the auto logoff feature and remain permanently logged in enter 0 zero The default setting is 20 minutes Note You must restart the FCWnx client prog
247. e activated by selection of Video Window Auto Pop up on the Video Event Trigger form if the operator has been assigned permission for Digital Video Viewer If operator permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected here Once selected the operator login retains this feature until disabled no matter which computer in the system was used for logging in Table 9 Reports menu Element Description Person The Person option displays the Person Report form that lets you create a report on the people in the database Credential The Credential option opens the Credential Report form that lets you create a report on the credentials in your system Administration Device Configuration Schedule Access The Administration option opens the Administration Report form that lets you create a report on the administrative aspects of your system such as alarm instructions events host preferences operators permissions responses schedules archives clients and floors The Device option opens the Device Report form that lets you create a report on devices such as controllers readers alarms alarm groups digital outputs digital output groups digital inputs DVRs cameras and elevators The Schedules Events option opens the Schedule Report form that lets you create a report on the schedules and events defined in this application The Access option opens the Acce
248. e associated records can be viewed but not modified Update means that the records on that form can be viewed and modified All means that the records on that form can be viewed modified and deleted Mixed is not an action to be assigned It is used only on this form to signal that any forms beneath a general title have different actions assigned 61 62 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 33 Form fields continued Element Description Note SCIF ACU only Workstations SCIF permissions override what is assigned on this form SCIF permissions depending on the type of client workstation assignment on the Client form are as follows e Administration This is the default for new installations and new client workstation records This configuration allows full functionality except monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration e Operator This configuration allows this client workstation to view all monitors and monitor alarms activity functions Graphics Console and Video Console e SCIF ACU only If this is a SCIF workstation enable SCIF on the Area form This configuration allows this client workstation to do everything that an Administration workstation can perform as well as monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration Note When using the API form Alar
249. e door to unlock and the next credential read toggles the door locked Alarm sense The time interval in minutes and seconds that a door can remain open with a valid credential read or an exit request This time must always be greater than the maximum unlock time 1 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 62 minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds The Alarm sense time for the reader and the DI Sense Time on the DI form are added together to determine the total time that a door can remain open before the system triggers a Door Held Open alarm Extended unlock The extended time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains unlocked after the reader reads a valid credential 1 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 60 maximum minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds Example A facilities employee may be required to move equipment or furniture in and out of rooms The assignment requires a block of time beyond the normal unlock time as configured and sufficient time to empty or fill rooms through which access is gained by a reader and valid facility credential Extended Alarm sense This time interval is calculated automatically by subtracting the Maximum Unlock time from the Alarm Sense time and is a read only entry 131 132 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 62 Form fields continued Element Description Door lock on Once the door is unlo
250. e elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select e Method of elevator control See Methods of elevator control on page 193 e Readers Verify that readers are active on the Reader form See Reader tab on page 124 e Floors You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller Configuring elevator control us
251. e menu is available only when a Report form is displaying The Export option lets you select an export format for your report There are a variety of formats available including text Word for Windows Lotus HTML and Excel Select an export destination for the report to a disk file exchange folder Lotus Domino Lotus Domino Mail or Microsoft Mail MAPD Delete template Select this option on the File menu to delete the current report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template Tabs on report forms General tab The General tab displays on several Report forms but the options vary as noted Person Administration Device Configuration and Time and Attendance History reports This form sets the preferences of the report Report Title Enter a title for this report of up to 64 characters Report Type Select the type of report you want to run Chapter 10 Reports If this is a Person report the following options are available e Access Rights Data provides a description of the access this person has and if access is granted all times in all modes e Area Control Data provides a description of all areas for which this person has arm disarm or auxiliary relay control permissions e Credential Data provides the credential number PIN status issue and expiration dates for each credential the person has been assigned e Location Data provides the address and telephone number for
252. e of device descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Controller Description Enter the range of controller descriptions you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt Expiration Date Filter tab Credential report Use the Expiration Date Filter tab to generate a report based on the expiration date of the credentials Do not filter credentials by expiration date Select this field if you do not want to use the expiration date as a method of filtering the report information This is equivalent to running a report on credentials for all expiration dates Filter credentials using this expiration date range Select this field if you do want to use the expiration date as a method of filtering the report information If this is selected you must select a starting and ending date Starting date Click the start date you want for the starting range of expiration dates Ending date Click the ending date you want for the ending range of expiration dates Chapter 10 365 Reports Return Date Filter tab Credential report Use the Return Date Filter tab to generate a report based on the return date of the credentials Do not filter credentials by return date Select this field if you do not want to use the return date as a method of filtering the report information This is equivalent to running a report on credentials for all return dates Filter credentia
253. e on the stop day For example you select a start time of 8 00 a m a stop time of 5 00 p m a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5 You receive a report of alarm transactions occurring between 8 00 a m on April 1 through 5 00 p m on April 5 e Start Date Select the start date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar To move ahead or back by a month click the arrows on either side of the name of the month To move ahead or back by a year click the arrows on either side of the year e Start Time Accept the default start time as displayed or enter a start time e Stop Date Enter an end date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar To move ahead or back by a month click the arrows on either side of the name of the month To move ahead or back by a year click the arrows on either side of the year e Stop Time Accept the default stop time as displayed or enter a stop time Chapter 10 363 Reports Database tab Alarm History Credential History Zone History DI History or Operator History reports Use the Database tab to select the history database to use for this report The file name displayed on the tab is the currently selected Archive database e Select Archive Database Click to select the archive history database e Use default Click to use the current history database Additional Filters tab Person report The Additional Filters tab displays only if you have selected User Data in the field R
254. e selected on the Preferences form Invalidate Credential Across Regions If selected this option disables the credential in all other regions when a person enters the selected Region by presenting the credential at an APB IN reader The Activity Monitor displays Invalid APB IN or Invalid APB OUT if you attempt to enter in or out of any other Region When a person exits the selected Region and the credential is presented at an APB OUT reader the credential becomes enabled in all other Regions Enable Global APB must be selected on the Preferences form Example Employees badging IN at a Miami office are tracked and not allowed to credential IN to another location until they have presented their credential at an APBOUT reader in Miami Ignore APB Status Across Regions If selected the APB status is local to the selected Region and status is retained within the Region Regions are independent of each other and the status is not recognized by another Region If necessary select Retain APB Status Across Regions Select Invalidate Credential Across Regions if that is appropriate for your FCWnx system Select Ignore APB Status Across Regions to retain the APB status within the local Region How to 1 Assign APB IN readers 2 Assign APB OUT readers 3 4 5 6 Click Save before you exit this tab 45 46 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Global configuration regional rules This topic ad
255. e you exit this tab 133 134 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Routing tab Use the Routing tab to define where transactions on the reader are sent You have three options credential history Activity Monitor and a credential transaction printer Credential transactions print only if the transaction is routed to the printer the credential transaction printer is enabled and a credential transaction printer is selected Figure 46 Routing tab Reader e Description e Facility Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule History Monitor Printer Valid Y Valid Y Valid Y Invalid v Invalid Y Lost Y Lost Nu lt gt Table 63 Form fields Element Description History Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions recorded in credential history Invalid Invalid credential transactions are always recorded in credential history This default is a read only field and cannot be changed Lost Lost credential transactions are always recorded in credential history This default is a read only field and cannot be changed Monitor Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Invalid Enable this field if you want invalid credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Lost Enable this f
256. each DO can by used in only one elevator and mapped to only one floor The number of floors is limited by the number of DO modules that can be placed in the controller The maximum number of modules in a controller is four Micro controllers The maximum number of floors available is 64 maximum of 4 modules x 16 DOs 64 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors available is 128 12 on the ACU2 controller 7 RRMs x 16 relays and 1 RRM x 4 relays Floor tracking by input Define the floors available and then define a digital input and digital output relay for each floor The digital inputs are used for floor selection Only digital inputs provided by the DI module can be used for floor selection and each digital input can be used for only one elevator and mapped to only one floor The digital outputs are used to control where the elevator moves Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used and each digital output can only be used in one elevator and mapped to one floor Micro controllers The maximum number of floors is 32 2 modules x 16 DOs 32 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors is 64 When configuring Floor Tracking by Input for elevator control applications be sure the sense time for the digital input is less than 7 seconds The controller expects the digital input to occur within the first 8 seconds Otherwise the controller will not detect a floor selection It is typical for the sense time fo
257. each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Note Micro PX 2000 only When you create and save a Micro PX 2000 record FCWnx creates and supports 11 DI points however the 11th Dl is a low battery alarm from the controller If power is off and the backup battery is running low the controller sends an alarm transaction to the Alarm Monitor form The alarm displays until the battery is reset by recharging or the controller is powered back on To configure the 11th DI on an MPX2000 to function as a low battery alarm 1 2 Open the Digital Input form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of digital inputs Select the DI labeled xxxx x 11 where 11 is the 11th DI point of the Micro PX 2000 controller module Select Alarm from the drop down list of available DI types Click Save Open the Alarm form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of alarms belonging to the controllers Select the DI labeled xxxx x 11 where 11 is the 11th DI point of the Micro PX 2000 controller module Chapter 4 95 Devices 7 Extend the Description entry by entering text indicating low battery The entry may look similar to 00002 02 11 Low Battery 8 On the Alarm tab of the Alarm form select Monitor from the Settings options 9 Click Save For ACU controller systems When RIM modules are added the following records are creat
258. eader and associated Dis are grouped together in reader number order Controller Displays the number of the controller to which this digital input belongs State Displays the state of the digital input as On Off or Trouble e On means that the digital input point is in the Active state as defined on the Digital Input Status form Off means that the digital input point is Inactive as defined on the Digital Input Status form e Trouble means that the digital input point has been cut or shorted Physical State Displays the physical state of the digital input point e Open means that the contact is open e Closed means that the contact is closed e Cut means that the line has been cut e Short means that the line is shorted Date Displays the date that the status was requested Time Displays the time that the status was requested How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 194 and select the options you require Digital output status The Digital Output Status form Monitors and Controls group provides a snapshot of the current digital output status in the controllers A digital output represents an external device such as lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Status tab The Status tab displays the status of the selected digital outputs according to the information in the controller s database by reader DO or other DOs by controller or for all controllers Chapter 9 337 Monitor and co
259. ect the day Click OK 234 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 7 In the Time field enter the time using the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm Click Go Move the slider to increase or decrease the play position for recorded video Zero percent represents the beginning of the recorded video and 100 percent represents the end of the recorded video Click Go How to search by motion From the File menu select Video Search The Search Video window displays Select the DVR Motion Search tab The search criteria includes recorder camera start and end dates and start and end times Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR Use the Camera drop down list to select the appropriate camera The Motion Area displays live video from the selected camera Use the Start Date and End Date fields to narrow the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK Use the Start Time and End Time fields to further narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm Use the mouse to select a region of interest in the Motion Area One area or m
260. ed e 16 supervised inputs e 3 unsupervised inputs e 2 Aux DOs Example 16337 00 00 ACU Reader To change this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters DO module record creation For Micro controller systems When you add a 16 DO module sixteen 16 digital output records are created Example 00001 01 01 DO This digital output is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters For ACU controller systems When you add an RRM module the following records are created e 16 digital output e 2AuxDI Example 16337 00 01 ACU Reader To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Creating direct connect controller records 1 When you click Add to add a controller record the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form disp
261. ed e For connection type select Network e Enter the PC name of the host computer or navigate and select e Select a method Micro only On the Security tab if you do not enter passwords the default passwords one 1 two 2 three 3 and four 4 are used If you want to change the passwords you can do so at any time On the Time Zone tab a default time zone is filled in Verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary On the Comments tab enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field On the Port Settings tab Network Configuration enter the IP address of the controller On the Controller Configuration tab select the modules that are in the controller you are setting up Click the module you want and drag to the Configuration column To delete select a module from the Configuration column right click and select Delete Click Save If there is any required information missing a window displays listing those items that are incorrect or missing Don t forget to save the record again once you fix those items When the controller record is created the records for the associated readers alarms alarm groups Micro only digital outputs and digital output groups are also created with default data based on the modules you added on the Controller Configuration tab 10 Use the Controller Monitor form to set the co
262. ed Windows Authentication Product Update Available Notify Clients Immediately that Product Update is Available Select this check box to automatically notify client computers that a product update is available Update Message Text In this box enter a message that displays as a popup notifying client computers that a product update is available OK Click this button when configuration is complete The entries on this window are saved Help Click to access the Help system 374 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 202 Form fields continued Element Description Cancel Click this button to terminate and close this window The entries are not saved How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 202 and complete the fields on this tab Check for update Check for update is enabled on the File drop down menu of the main application toolbar when the Enable Auto Update option is selected and completed on the Auto Update Configuration form Administration group Each time you log in the FCWnx system checks for updates Also at any time you may select this item to begin a search of the configured Web site for updates to the FCWnx application This process searches for new upgrades compares the version and if the patch or update needs to be applied a dialog box displays a message e Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the update process or click Cancel to close the dialog box and pr
263. ed directly over the center of the Original Image Place your mouse pointer over the image The pointer changes from a single arrow to a four headed arrow This lets you move the cropping area across the newly acquired image At this point you can either capture a different portion of the image as is or adjust the highlighting box to capture some or all of the image Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application To crop an image 1 2 Place your mouse pointer within the highlighting box s cropping area Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the cropping area to the desired location on the image Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new location of the highlighting box Click OK The photo can be placed on either the front or the back of your credential design To print the photo your credential design must include photo image keylines When you print the credential from the application the keylines are replaced by the image To resize the crop box 1 Place your mouse pointer directly over one of the highlighting box handles The pointer changes from a four headed arrow to a two headed arrow This lets you resize the cropping area Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the handle toward the center of the cropping area The size of this highlighting box is fixed to the aspect ratio of the image
264. ed on the currently active facility or all facilities assigned to the current operator e GLOBAL SYSTEMS To view transactions outside of your region you must have in your active facility the client s facility where the transactions are occurring Sequence Guide 1 If facilities are going to be used the facilities must first be defined in FCWnx on the Facility form When creating a facility record enter a description that uniquely identifies the location or function of the facility 2 Permissions are created and defined to determine what form and what fields are available within FCWnx Note The forms in FCWnx display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to the current operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned on the Permission form 3 Once defined facilities and permissions are available for assignment to an operator on the Operator form a At any given time the current operator has the ability to select the active facility for that session from the list of all facilities that the current operator is allowed to see b When a facility is assigned to an operator it displays in the Facility drop down list of FCWnx forms after a successful login by that operator Depending on assigned permissions that operator can now create records and assign facilities from the list that displays in the Facility drop down list hex character image capture Valid and allowable hex
265. ed to return the package you must ship it in the original box Before you begin configuration Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running This includes controllers readers modems printers and network lines Refer to the FCWnx installation documentation provided with your equipment from GE or follow specific installation instructions for your brand of hardware Licensing Note Your software is licensed during the installation process The license sequence is also an item on the Start Programs menu Refer to the License Help system for additional details of the licensing procedure and operating in demo mode Clicking Help About this application options opens a screen displaying the software version service pack number copyright information licensing information and contact information Your license included Imaging software for this application that controls the number of clients that can launch Imaging Imaging is included in each installation however you cannot enable Imaging on more computers than you have Imaging licenses for Only clients that have an Imaging license enabled can capture images and signatures create credential designs and print credentials If not all computers require the license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers Licensing controls the number of computers that can host remote sessions You cannot enable thin
266. ed with Floor Tracking mode only 1K Ohm Resistors 5305000014 Elevator Side Software side Wiring for Keypad Floor mode where the floor is selected by the keypad in the reader 530501001A When an ACU controller is used for elevator control all DOs are in active set state when not selected If the ACU fails all floors are enabled 106 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Security tab Figure 34 Security tab e Description Facility vl Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Controller Definition Security TimeZone Comments Events Controller Passwords Password Communication Encryption E Enable Encryption Exchange Key O System Custom Data Key ODES O DES III Oaes Table 51 Form fields Element Description Controller password Micro only The Controller Passwords list box has the following default password entries enabling four possible levels of security Select a password it now displays in the Password dialog box Select one 1 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box two 2 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box three 3 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box four 4 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box Click Change to save and re assign the new password No
267. ee configurations Professional Edition Deployment support Windows XP and Vista platforms with SQL Server 2008 Express database Scalability support Single server with up to 5 remote concurrent clients 256 readers and 256 cameras Personnel Credentials 25 000 Enterprise Edition Deployment support Windows Server 2003 with SQL Server 2005 database or Windows Server 2008 with SQL Server 2008 database Scalability support Single server with up to 50 remote concurrent clients 4096 readers and 4096 cameras Personnel Credentials 500 000 Global Edition Note Deployment support Windows Server 2003 with SQL Server 2005 database or Windows Server 2008 with SQL Server 2008 database Scalability Support Single Global server with up to 64 Regional servers Scalability Support per Server Up to 50 remote concurrent clients 4096 readers and 4096 cameras Personnel Credentials 500 000 system wide Cluster technology selections in the Enterprise level installation provide new configuration options See the document Installing Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 in a Clustered Environment for additional information and instructions This user manual provides information for system administrators to configure and operate the application software Chapter 1 Introduction Product contents Inspect the package and contents for visible damage If any components are damaged or missing do not use contact your supplier immediately If you ne
268. ee number field on the Person form is required and unique Once this is enabled it cannot be changed back Do you want to continue with this change Click Yes 2 A second message displays Could not enable unique and required Employee number Duplicates already exist or field is empty in the database Refer to the Diagnostic Logfile 3 Navigate to the logfile A message informs you that the system generated a text file and placed the file in the Logs folder of the application server Navigate to the Logs folder in the FCWnx installation folder Locate the DuplicateEmployeeNumbers txt file consult the list of duplicate or blank employee numbers locate those person records and assign a unique employee number to each 4 When all records on the txt file list have a unique employee number return to the Preferences form select Enable unique amp required Employee Number and click Save If you cannot save and again receive additional messages you must repeat the steps above 5 The selection to require all person records to have a unique employee number cannot be reversed and all newly added person records must have a unique employee number Personnel type Department Select the appropriate personnel type from the drop down list This is a required field Select the appropriate department from the drop down list 271 272 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 157 Form fields continued Element D
269. eferences Table 35 Form fields continued Element Description Active Directory Password Note If this option is selected FCWnx password authentication options are not Authentication available The Active Directory domain controller authenticates this operator name and password The operator added to FCWnx must be a valid operator in the domain computer The next time this operator logs in to FCWnx for this feature the user must log in to the domain when logging into the computer for access to the FCWnx system The user cannot log in to the local computer the user logs in to the Domain FCWnx validates the user login ID and password against the specified Active Directory and not the FCWnx database This authentication overrides any password preferences entered through FCWnx Browse Click to display a list of Active Directory domain controller servers Select the domain controller server computer that authenticates the FCWnx operator and controls the users passwords and the FCWnx system to which you are assigning this operator The selected server computer authenticates this operator name and password The selected server name now displays in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 35 and complete this tab 2 Enter the Login ID associated with this operator record 3 Enter the name of the operator 4 Select a permission from the drop down list associated with this operator 5 Select a language from
270. elds windowpane displays as Condition of Credential Select Condition of Credential In the Modify Field dialog box enter the corresponding condition of this credential as Reported Lost by Credentialholder 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 293 Access rights departments persons and credentials Mass update Note Forms where Mass Update can be used include the Person form Alarm form and the Credential form This option is not available until at least one record exists in the list box to the right of the form The Mass Update mode lets you simultaneously update properties on a group of records within the application This is very helpful when a number of records for a single form require the identical property or value change Mass Update mode of processing is enabled as follows 1 2 10 11 Open a blank form Click Search to display a list of existing records We recommend entering search criteria to narrow your search results to only records that are to be updated Records that match your search criteria display in the list box to the right of the form Note If there are no records Mass Update is not available Move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and right click to display a shortcut menu to related forms To enable the Mass Update mode select Mass Update from the shortcut menu Note the change in the appearance of the form only those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass
271. elect and click to move this Regional server up the list Move Down Select and click to move this Regional server down the list Assign Click to display a Backup Region Assignment dialog box listing available Regional assigned when you close the dialog box display in the Backup Regions list database servers found on your FCWnx Global system Those computers selected and A list displays of available backup Regional database server computers e Select one or more computer names from the available list and then click the right arrow to assign e Select one or more computer names from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to unassign Click OK to accept the selections and close this window How to 1 Review the list of assigned Backup Regions 2 If applicable select to move a Region up or down in backup priority 3 Click Assign to display the Backup Region Assignment dialog box 43 44 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 4 Assign one or more database servers as Regional database backup servers 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and display the computer names as assigned 6 Click Save before you exit this tab APB Region Configuration tab Note The APB Region Configuration tab is enabled for Micro systems that are licensed for Global regions Use the APB Region Configuration tab to identify APB IN and APB OUT readers and configure the APB behavior across regions Figure 12 APB Region Conf
272. elephone number of up to 20 digits that the host dials to call the controller If an outside line must be accessed in order to dial out enter a comma after the number that accesses the outside line typically 9 In this situation if the telephone number to be dialed is 1 555 666 7777 enter the number in this field as follows 9 15556667777 The controller first dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the number in Number 2 Note All telephone number fields must contain a telephone number If there is only one telephone number for the controller enter this number in all fields Select the interval None 1 hour 8 hours 12 hours 24 hours at which the host automatically dials the controller The host dials one hour from the time the controller went into an idle no activity state If this is a new record the count begins once the record is saved If this application is shut down the count begins once this application is started Same Number Retries Enter the number of times from 0 to 9 the host should redial the same telephone number before moving on to the next available telephone number Retry Interval 30 sec Enter the number from 1 to 9 of 30 second intervals that the host waits in between each dial to the controller For example if you specify 2 then the host waits 2 x 30 60 seconds between each dial to the host Host Call Back Select this check box if you want the host computer to return a ca
273. empty all readers will be reported The Edit Readers List displays Available and Assigned readers that are enabled for monitoring Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the dialog box Swipe and Show Start the Swipe and Show program Help Displays the Help system Activity Monitor shortcut menu The Activity Monitor shortcut menu consists of the following options Table 181 Form fields Element Description Resume Starts the scrolling of credential transactions This option is active only if you previously selected Pause All credential transactions display that occurred while the Pause option was on once you select Resume Pause Suspends scrolling of credential transactions on the Activity Monitor Clear Clears all credential transactions from the Activity Monitor Swipe and Show Readers Select to display an Edit Readers List assignment form Select those readers you want monitored in the Swipe and Show window If readers have been selected right click an activity record and launch the Swipe and Show program Launch Swipe and Show Starts the Swipe and Show program Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time Credential Displays th
274. en you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the power communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules Configuring elevator control using an ACU controller 1 Create a controller record and set the controller type to Elevator Controller This controller can only manage elevators and nothing else Create floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Create area records on the Area form Assign readers to the area See Area form Reader tab Note The area must also be assigned to an access right for a person to gain access to that reader Now you can configure the elevator records Use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select e Method of elevator control e Readers You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available e Floors to area association Note Elevator control does not s
275. ent driven video response Video Event Trigger form The Video Event Trigger form Alarms amp Events group opens with the Preset Camera tab displayed An event consists of a camera and either readers alarms or zone area activity A trigger causes an event or program routine to be executed depending on what options you set on the tabs of this form Example A camera begins recording in response to an invalid credential transaction An alarm is recorded in response to the credential transaction Table 123 Form fields Element Description Description Enter text up to 64 alphanumeric characters in length The description should convey specific information relating to a physical location camera reader or state such as Front Door Inv Credential Camera 1 Reader 1 You can assign a reader alarm or camera alarm or both and this can be reflected in the description of the trigger Chapter 5 219 Video Preset Camera tab This window enables you to assign cameras and their associated presets with an event Up to four cameras can be assigned per event trigger Figure 96 Preset Camera tab V Video Event Trigger E A e Description A Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Areas Assigned Preset Camera Preset Camera Add en ey lt gt Table 124 Form fields Element Description Assigned Preset Camera This pane displays assigned preset cameras for this event Windowpane
276. eport Type on the General tab of the Person report Use this tab to add user fields as an additional filter for the report e User Fields This window lists all the user fields the user field value you want to use as a filter and whether the user field should print You can print the user field on the report by selecting the field Print selected user field or clear this field so the user field does not print e Modify Value To change the value of a user field select the user field you want and enter a new value in this field e User fields printed on report If this field is enabled then the currently selected user field prints on the report e Clear All Set All Click Clear All so that none of the User Fields are set to print Click Set All to set all of the User Fields to print e Print selected user field Enable this field to set the selected User Field to print or disable this field so that the selected User Field does not print Credential History report form Use the Additional Filters tab to select additional specific criteria by which this report is generated e Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt e Reader Select the reader you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all readers select lt ALL gt e Department Select the department you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all
277. epresented in the DNS Snap in Click Start Programs Administration Tools DNS The DNS displays Expand the node for the domain Make sure that the server computer name displays under the domain root If the server computer name is not here but it is in the Active Directory Users and Computers Snap in the FRS does not recognize the server computer as part of the domain Question I m experiencing space issues What can I do Consider cleaning out your FCWnx Replication folder 388 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Question An error message displays when attempting to add a device to another Region within the Global system The message informs the operator that addition of the device is in excess of the license limit for that Region What can I do From the Administration menu select Region When the Region form opens click Search and select the Regional server computer in question from the list box on the right The License Info at the bottom of this form displays the current licensing capabilities of the selected region Review the license capabilities If limits for a device have been reached additional devices cannot be added at this time Question What is domain controller down time There may be an occasion when the domain controller is inaccessible In a Global Edition configuration replication continues however be aware that Microsoft SQL Server services MSSQL and SQLAgent have limitations Review the following s
278. er Use the Settings to Reach Host tab to configure how the controller dials the host Figure 42 Settings to Reach Host tab e Description ACUKL Number 2 Number 3 Number 4 Retry Interval min 1 Facility Ignore Facilities y Controller Definition Securty TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control_ Settings to Reach Host Settings to Reach Controller Phone numbers to reach host Dial interval Number 1 i _ Same number retries Maximum disconnect time mir 180 E Dial Out Time schedule a Table 58 Form fields y Element Description Phone numbers to reach host Same number retries Enter telephone numbers of up to 20 digits that the controller dials to reach the host If an outside line must be accessed in order to dial out enter a comma after the number that accesses the outside line typically 9 In this situation if the telephone number to be dialed is 1 555 666 7777 you would enter the number in this field as follows 9 15556667777 The controller dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the others in numerical order until a connection is made Note All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits If there is only one telephone number for this controller to reach the host repeat this number in all fields If you click Save after completing the first
279. er Field 24 Leer Fiald 95 lt lt v Table 159 Form fields Element Description Modify Field Enter the value for the currently selected User Field This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric characters User Fields are not appropriate for exceptionally lengthy street addresses or e mail addresses User Fields The current user field Label and Value is listed in this windowpane To give values to these fields select a Label How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 159 and complete the fields on this tab Example The label for User Field 1 was previously defined on the Preferences form as Social Security Number The first label listed in this windowpane displays as Social Security Number Enter the corresponding Social Security for this person record in the Modify Field text box 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Access Rights tab Use the Access Rights tab to configure threat level clearance privileges for a person Figure 121 Access Rights tab e Last Name gt Facility 5 Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Area Control Threat Level Access Threat Level O Normal w Assigned ccess Rights Area Exception Assignments Assigned Access ES Table 160 Form fields Element Description Threat Level Access Choose from
280. er a total of 4 minutes 15 seconds When the output relay is linked to one or more alarms the momentary contact time does not begin until the alarm returns to the inactive position thus extending the active time Example If the momentary contact time is set to 10 seconds and the alarm is in the alarm state for 12 seconds the output relay is active for a total of 22 seconds beginning when the alarm entered the alarm state Comments Use this field to enter a location description reason for creating this record or special considerations for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 77 and complete the fields on this tab When a controller is reset or the database is reloaded all schedules from midnight to present time run except for schedules that have a DO On time not equal to zero and were set to occur prior to the current time Example You have created a schedule to occur at 8 00 am to activate a digital output 1 minute At 10 00 am the database for the controller is downloaded During the download process all schedules from Midnight to the current time 10 00 am are rerun Your schedule for the 8 00 am DO does not run since it started and ended before the current time of 10 00 am 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 157 Devices Schedule tab Use the Schedule tab to define schedules for turni
281. er is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number and Tamper is the alarm description e Regional Failover on a Global configuration bet testpc Region Failover Alarm where bcttestpc is the PC Name of the client that has failed over to its configured backup Region and Region Failover Alarmis the alarm description Reference Displays additional information relating to the type of credential alarm Only reader alarms have a reference such as a person name or credential number This column may be blank Process State The process state is Acknowledged Unacknowledged or Inactive This is an internal state for alarm conditions To acknowledge an alarm select the desired alarm and click Acknowledged The alarm icon changes to reflect the acknowledgement and clears from the window after reset Count The number of times the alarm has entered an alarm state since the alarm was last cleared from the Alarm Monitor Host Date Time The date and time the alarm occurred according to the system date and time Device Date Time The date and time the alarm occurred according to the controller s date and time Area ACU only Displays the area associated with this alarm Instruction Displays the instructions linked to the current alarm When an alarm is displayed on the Alarm Monitor form select the alarm The alarm instructions set up
282. er the name of the operator Permission From the drop down list of previously created permissions assign a permission to this operator Language Click the drop down list to display a list of available languages installed on your system Select the language with which this operator accesses and operates the FCWnx system Also see Multiple language support on page 65 Facility Commander Password Note This grouping is selected by default If this option is selected Active Directory Authentication Password Authentication is not available Password Enter the password this operator uses to log in to FCWnx This field accepts a minimum of 1 and maximum of 20 characters Additional password preferences were set on the Password tab of the Preferences form Confirm Password Enter the password a second time exactly as entered in the Password field Note The assigned password cannot match any previous five passwords Operator login passwords are case sensitive Because it is difficult to retrieve it is important for operators to remember their assigned password or write it down and store in a safe place Permission to Change Password If this check box is selected the operator indicated in this record has the option to change the login password If this check box is clear the option to change the login password is unavailable to this operator Expiration Password never expires If selected the password assigned to the current operator
283. erformed must have its own license Refer to your installation manual for additional details e If Imaging Status is not enabled for this client workstation this feature is unavailable 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 286 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Installing print driver To install the print driver for your credential printer 1 Follow the instructions shipped with your printer Select the appropriate printer port Select a name for the printer and indicate if it is the default printer Do not print a test page click Finish E es a After the installation is complete move the mouse pointer over the printer icon click the right mouse button and select and set Properties 6 Complete the printer setup and then click Exit Note The printer may not support transparent bitmaps If the printer runs out of credentials or the ribbon needs to be replaced while in the process of producing credentials an error message displays Correct the condition at the printer and then put the printer back online before continuing with your print job Define credentials The Credential form Credentials group is used to define a credential by entering specific information such as the credential number and the person to whom this credential is assigned A credential identifies a person to this application This is usually a credential with an embedded number that uniquely identifies the credential However the credentia
284. ers that control this intrusion zone This is a one to one relationship and establishes the zone source and intrusion access points The controller must be connected and online Note A Reader or Digital Input and Alarm must be selected in order to save this record Table 144 Form fields continued Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones Element Description Arm Disarm DO Select one DO from the drop down list of DOs that trigger when an intrusion zone is armed disarmed This is an optional assignment This DO can be assigned to another intrusion zone Arm Disarm DI Select one DI from the drop down list of available Dis of the Type Arm Disarm as assigned on the Digital Input form This DI can arm disarm an intrusion zone and is an optional assignment This DI cannot be assigned to another intrusion zone Note When you unassign a DI save this record It is now available to re assign to another intrusion zone Last Status Date Date of last zone history transaction on record Time Time of last zone history transaction on record Status Status as of last zone history transaction on record Note In order to refresh this status section click off of this record then back or close then reopen the form Devices Assigned Readers This list box displays a list of available active readers in the same zone belonging to the selected controller You must assign at least one reader or a digital input and alarm to an in
285. ert an image create a color negative Convert to 8 bit grayscale Select this option to convert an image to an 8 bit 256 grayscale image Once this option is selected there is no undo You have to reload your image Save Image Changes to an existing image or newly captured image are saved to the host when you click Save Export To File When you select this option a Save As window displays Navigate to the Images folder that contains previously captured photo images You may select a filename image format bit depth and JPEG compression factor When you click Save the contents of the image control are saved using the selected settings If you want you can replace an existing image Select Input Device This option lets you select an input device on the Select Profile dialog box from a list of Capture Profiles You may also set and apply automatic properties for the image you are about to capture Select Image Type This dialog box enables you to configure image types in the EPISUITE SDK configuration database You can use this dialog box to edit create or remove image types To modify an image type highlight the image type name in the list and click Edit to open the Image Type Manager dialog box Click Add to create a new image type or click Remove to delete the highlighted image type Revert Changes When you make any change to the image the Revert Changes option is enabled Otherwise the option is dimmed and you are not able
286. es Extended Control tab Note The features on the Extended Control tab are available for ACU controller systems only Use the Extended Control tab to configure options for readers associated with ACU controllers These fields are not enabled or selectable if there are no readers associated with this controller Figure 51 Extended Control tab Table 68 Form fields Reader e Description 2 Facility v Reader Door Functions Routing FunctiosSchedue _ RoutingSchedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Blink LED for Secure Status Always On v Reader Trace Instruction Message None x Access Mode 5 Host Online Normal x Host Offline Company Code C Degraded Mode Access Door Mode Access Normal No Overlap Overlap Door Open Overlap Door Closed Door Held Open Options O Extend Held Open 1 minute C Extend Held Open REX Toggle C Extend Held Open REX Active Door Lock Options Enable Lock Monitor C Enable Magnetic Lock Bond Sensor Keypad Readers O Area Amm Disarm v O Delay Arm Disarm v IKE Readers Element Description The following fields are for ACU controller systems only Blink LED for Secure Status Select from a drop down list of available reader LED characteristics The behavior indicates whether an area is armed or disarmed Always On This is the default setting The red LED o
287. es reire e ad 164 Alarmi Response tab jij renro A E A A ARELES 164 Define GIOtmS ys 00 ii A EEEE E EANET aid 165 A ei Ath a E ARAA E E E E EOE OE ARAA ARARE ES 166 SEIS TUCASA a ii 169 Digital Outputs TOD eses Nec 170 DO GROWPS tabs sks ia slate aen eaaa oi ana dla eles 172 SCHECUICTOD 253 cs nceen tado 174 Events Tai a A das 176 Status taD e nasa eee e PPP marae nian dancu ame Mew enue ope engined ERA 177 COIN tO Dea ie sxe I E E E EEEE T EEE 178 Adding sound to an Glorm cece cece cence tence Deea eee nee e nee rr 179 Define GlGnMiGrOupS s 5 acess ceed ieead ates dhesiawad sd 179 OU TG Bis siesta lad A ao do ith 180 EVENS TAB ir AA ene AA 182 Alarm PriQnity corn dd adas 184 Define GAC PO a A AAEE 184 Define la Ct ii dia 186 Configure routing and bumping cece cece cece eee ccoo rr rr 187 DOTIMIMOMMOD cece ch Ginn a atan Gal Re mae Ree epee ee 188 Alarme TOD in sis irra POPE eased ned E E AERE ROE R S E EERROR EEEN ee 190 API Connection TOM coi ripiano ence as A a den E IEEE DEREDE Mee EEEE YES 191 DET TAD a irran ais a baaa 191 Define floors 2i23 cwad id ia da T E E bod edie da 192 Foot aecarcr prod rie 193 DetineClevatons a enhouskdaesGanaaetades anak isedaekedcsa dt 193 Methods of clevatomcontrol sxc ceeecn Londen ma adadadiddutaaaa nasa NERA EET UEAN E D DE EAEE 193 Floor tab on the Access Right form 66 ccc cece ieia eect beeen beeen etree 194 Configuring elevator control using a M
288. es the alarm would not come in to this application and the output would not activate 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 184 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Alarm Priority The Alarm Priority form in the Alarms amp Events group includes the Alarm Priority tab and Alarm Category tab Define alarm priority The Alarm Priority tab in the Alarms amp Events group lets you assign color priority attributes to an alarm state and bumped alarm The colors you assign display on the Alarm Monitor form when an alarm is generated The default color for alarms to display on the Alarm Monitor form is a white background with black font Figure 78 Alarm Priority tab lt Alarm Priority Alarm Priority Alarm Category Alarm Priority y Alarm State Background Preview Sample Sample Alarm Bumped Background Preview Alarm a Sample Sample Revert To Original Reset System Defaults Table 101 Form fields Element Description Alarm Priority Select the alarm priority from the drop down list for which you are assigning a color palette The priority range is O to 19 Each alarm priority lets you assign a Background color and Font color Click the drop down list to display a palette of available colors Select a color and click OK For your convenience a Preview box displays a sample of the assigned colors so you can preview your selections Table 101 Form fields
289. es arrive at the Global server during the same synchronization process the SQL Server detects which update arrived first and that update is successful e Ifthe update at Region Two arrived before the update at Region One during the same synchronization process then Region Two s update is successful The address is updated to 6544 SW 8th Street on both Region One and Region Two Keep in mind that conflicts can only occur during the same synchronization process e When the Global server and Regional server are connected and synchronization occurs the SQL Server Merge Agent detects conflicts and then determines which data is accepted and propagated to other sites based on the first record to successfully reach the Global server Note 1 The synchronization processing time depends on how much data needs to be synchronized and the performance of your system 2 Using Windows we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within your Global configuration 3 When re assigning devices such as controllers or DVRs across regions you must stop and restart services first on the original owner of the devices and then on the computer to which the devices are newly assigned You must allow sufficient time for data replication to complete across all affected regions before restarting services on the newly assigned computer Verify that devices are online and operable following the re assignment Define facilities Use the Facility form
290. escription Trace activity Select to enable this field if you want a record of all activity on this credential Each time this credential is used a message displays on the Activity Monitor and a record is written to the history database If the system has a printer association the message is printed This field overrides the routing of activity as defined on the Reader form Note We do not recommend activating the trace function at a site that uses dial up controllers A controller dials the host whenever a traced credential is read This may incur additional telephone costs Extended Unlock Alarm Sense Select to enable this field if you want to allow a person extra time to gain access to an Time entry or exit point in the system A popup message asks you if you want to change all associated Credential records to follow Extended Unlock Time If you select Yes all credentials for that person are changed to Follow Extended Unlock Time as configured on the Door Functions tab of the Reader form Refer to Door Functions tab on page 129 Example An extended time limit can be configured for an employee who enters a motorized door by wheelchair Privileged APB ACU only Select this feature if you want to record APB without preventing this person from accessing doors That is enabling this field allows any valid credential to unlock a door regardless of the credential s status However the credential s status is still logged according to the
291. escription this field automatically populates with the PC Name selected on the Client tab Note Global Client Descriptions We recommend that your client description include a meaningful name of the Global or Regional database server computer When the description displays on the Client Monitor form the Global and Regional server are easily identifiable 3 A facility option can be designated To select a PC name click Browse to display a Select Client window 5 Proceed to complete the remainder of the options according to your system this client and the guidelines in this manual 6 Repeat these steps for each client that you are defining Administration Permission Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 60 lt Click the add icon to begin a new record 2 Enter a unique description in the Description field This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 3 Expand the form s navigation tree to display the FCWnx forms Select a form and select one of the Actions to associate with the form and the permission you are creating 5 Click Save Notice that the icon has changed to the associated action granted to this permission Administration Operator Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 63 Click the add icon to begin a new record A facility option can be designated Enter the Login ID associated with this operator record Enter the name of the operator Select a permission from the
292. eset Refer to Chapter 5 Video on page 214 D 1 After setup and programming of your DVR devices to meet your monitoring requirements you need to parallel the settings and positions in the configurations in this application This form lets you edit or enter a description and number for a camera preset Presets must be defined before you can assign them to a camera on the Presets tab of the Camera form A facility option can be designated In the text field enter a number within the range of 1 to 64 This number only references the preset number programmed and stored in a camera with PTZ capability 4 Click Save This preset is now available for assignment to a specific camera Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Quick Setup guide Element Description Application Group Task Cameras Event triggers Flash download firmware to the controller Ba Security Devices Camera Refer to Chapter 5 Video on page 214 1 Use this form to edit camera preferences Camera records are automatically created when a DVR is defined on the Digital Video Recorder form The camera records display in the format 00X 0X Camera where 00X is the DVR address and OX is the camera number It is recommended that you keep the number prefix to aid in locating the cameras Note Device description updates are communicated to corresponding alarms Dls and DOs In order for changes to migrate to additional form windows that may
293. esults of the search criteria Complete one or more of the search criterion Table 192 Form fields Element Description Controller Description Enter a controller description for which to search You may use wildcard characters as part of the search criteria Controller Address Enter a controller address Online Offline Error Select controllers that meet the search criteria and are online offline or in an error state Active Hostname Select a host name Comm Device Select a communication port Available Controllers The controllers are displayed that meet the search criteria and are not already selected to be displayed in the Controller Monitor form Selected Controllers This box displays the results of the search The list of controllers are those that meet the search criteria and are selected to be displayed Search Click to display the controllers as requested by the preferences you selected Clear Search Clears the controller search criteria and selection preferences from the form windowpanes allowing you to select new criteria Recall Search Select to recall and display the results of the last search performed Every time the monitor is opened the system displays the monitor columns based on the criteria of the last previous search Controller Monitor shortcut menu Note These options also display on the Controller Monitor form toolbar Refer to individual icons for additional details of each f
294. et Tag Selection O None O Tag Only Tag as Event Wideo Window Auto Pop up Assign Alarms 222 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 126 Form fields Element Description Transactions Select one or both options as types of alarm transactions to trigger an event The alarm must be set for monitoring Alarm An event is triggered as a result of an alarm Reset An event is triggered as a result of an alarm reset Tag Selection Select one of the Tag Selection options None No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video or manipulating record rate Tag only A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video at the cameras current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the cameras record rate to its event record rate settings Assign Alarms Click to display an Alarm Assignment window enabling you to select and assign unassign an alarm record for this event trigger record The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of alarms in the system for this application for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Auto Pop up Select this
295. et location Video Console can be accessed in the following ways e From the FCWnx Application Group Panel under Monitors amp Controls Video Console e From the main toolbar by clicking the Video Console icon e Ifan alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays in the Alarm Monitor and you can access Video Console by clicking on it Other capabilities include e Live video can be sent to multiple video consoles e Video Console can be automatically launched with live and recorded video when an alarm event occurs e Multiple video streams from multiple DVRs can be sent to the Video Console e Multiple camera views allow an operator to select two up four up nine up or sixteen up views e Recorded video is available to multiple Video Consoles e A single frame of recorded video can be viewed e Video can be searched by date and time play position or token e If the camera has PTZ pan tilt zoom capabilities you can use the mouse to control the camera movement This feature is not available if another operator has control of the camera Video Console window The Video Console window is shown below The window features are described in Table 130 on page 229 Figure 102 Video Console window Yideo Console 1 File View Window Help a 5 x Bl 44 gt mm J x Custom view Facility view 4 H Ignore Facilities Table 130 Form fields Chapter 5
296. event occurs e Multiple video streams from multiple DVRs can be sent to the Video Console e Multiple camera views allow an operator to select two up four up nine up or sixteen up views e Recorded video is available to multiple Video Consoles e A single frame of recorded video can be viewed e Video can be searched by date and time play position or token e If the camera has PTZ pan tilt zoom capabilities you can use the mouse to control the camera movement This feature is not available if another operator has control of the camera Table 3 Operator tasks continued Task Description Manually control Dis DOs areas intrusion zones Quick Setup guide Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 339 1 Click the Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click the Manual Control icon The Manual Control form allows the operator to perform the following depending on the operator s facilities and permissions e Manually lock unlock doors e Turn on off DO digital output e Monitor on off alarms and alarm groups Enable disable DI inputs e Arm disarm areas and intrusion zones e Change the mode of a controller Start stop a guard tour 3 Refer to the individual tab controls for additional information regarding the available functions Monitor Activities Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 311 1 Click the Monitors amp Controls group 2 Cl
297. f you close the window and reopen the window opens at the saved position This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multiple window management for both single and multiple monitor workstation configurations e Reset Position Deletes the saved position information for all application windows from the product database This causes all application windows to open to their default position the next time they are opened e Always On Top Selection of this option keeps the window in the forefront of all windows displaying on your workstation for this application 214 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define camera presets The Camera Preset form in the Security Devices group lets you edit or enter a description and number for a camera preset After setup and programming of your DVR devices to meet your monitoring requirements you need to parallel the settings and positions in the configurations in this application Presets must be defined before you can assign them to a camera on the Presets tab of the Camera form Note This option is available for PTZ cameras only Table 118 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters In this field enter or edit the description for the selected preset This should be a unique name describing or numbering a preset camera position Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The def
298. f you selected digital input this field is available Select a digital input from the drop down list of available digital inputs Note When the digital input records are created we recommend that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix and add text in the description field A complete and accurate digital input description aids in assigning alarm points from this drop down list How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 178 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab What s next Continue with Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 311 310 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 9 Monitor and control This chapter provides an overview of the monitoring options status capabilities graphics console and manual controls within this application In this chapter Pd OS 312 ta 6 a ok obo Sak awa HEE ER SS E ES a a 8 312 Alarm TAONHOTING A cee pha w ohne weds aw Edw Oha daaee e 319 CAS PHONONS AA A ees 325 Controller MONROE ooo kip Hee ha sede ataca 328 DIS mput SONS iia ta a ld ead il ad 335 E e A candice din dese e anaconda nee blnlsd Rees 336 Graphics CONSE oci sib e a eee eh age ads Se Ve ea 338 a ot TOT MA e a Bonin Wheat EA ethene ale i 339 TROVSACHON Overrides 00 ic ha a eds O 350 What PE oier d este k ea ERE CERE CEECEE EEEE amp AEE 2 Jeleuk 352 312 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview All monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls grou
299. f your form Record Toolbar Click any button on this standard toolbar for associated result Add Record Click to add a record The Add Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data The Add Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given permission to update records Save Click to save the current record The Save Record menu option saves changes made to the current record into the database Unsaved entries are discarded The Save Record option is available only when a form is open and you have been given permission to update records Print Preview Click to preview before printing The Print Preview option lets you preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is displaying A printer must be added to your FCWnx system in order for this feature to be available Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom value always reads 100 regardless of the zoom used Delete Record Click to delete a record The Delete Record option deletes the current record from the database Note Be careful when selecting this opti
300. facility option can be assigned to this record from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator Personnel tab Use the Personnel tab to create a record of an employee s personal information Note Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields Figure 118 Personnel tab eS Last Name 2 Facility v Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Area Control First name j Middle name 1 Middle name 2 Employee number Personnel type f el Department v Trace activity E Enabled zg Extended unlock alarm sense time E Enabled Privileged APB E Enabled Conditional unlock E Enabled nd and Assign Credential lt 270 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 157 Form fields Element Description First name Enter the first name of the person Middle name 1 Enter the middle name of the person Middle name 2 Enter an additional name such as another middle name of the person Note Initials as displayed in the list box on the right are the result of the first letter of the first name and the first letter of each middle name entered Table 157 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Employee number Enter a number assigned to and identifying this employee such as the employee s
301. fault template 0 rr 356 EXPOFE Jas ccesdodusde A Guan A PORRA EEEE E EEEN 356 Delete templates cto id de Need A REER 356 Tabs on report form ooo ase en tena souls eee ee he a caean ey eees 356 GENEFOltOD ons daa 356 A 359 Eno e tidene A ream EEN 24 359 DARA A ae Rao 362 Database inn ci id 363 Additional Filters cc tada tale 363 Expiration Date Filter tab cocina A A AA bias sdaawees s 364 REtUMN Date Filter TaD cia di AS AAA honed 365 G ard Tola is 366 Reddefs ta A A A AAA AS 366 A dunk ina dinhhw aa Malela Olea ge wad aig a a end danagin dcee dg ahelalalel ae aes 366 External Reports indiana ids dni rara 367 Reader Where When Report ion ane ba bb eae ea ae E EE EEEE ees 367 Who Has Access Report 26 ne nee n enn e een e net b eden eben teen ees 367 Saving Exporting Reports isccccsccsraetasie eat dee p n E sedans EE Aa de 369 Diagnostics and troubleshooting cc cece cece cece tence eeeees 371 OVA AAA eae eee eeada mabe ead 372 Auto Update caia iria ais ia 372 tems Needed rrarena eene wide E MR eESSaaMneed eodieddeumueaaamarewe eer 372 Creating the FOWNX le i 372 PIGGING the TIES iio tii AS dd cud mals AA ees taka bai 372 Appendix B Glossary Setting up Auto Update INiFOWNX ivi Aaa 372 Check TOP update un ii bs 374 Diagnostics OVerview wie de is os 374 LOQTICS 2225 0 seta A needed dabaerdntedadwethaoesateces 375 LOOFIICAOD iii do baaadas avaidandde anes WING dad ee oh eggke pad eerehi roe
302. figuration column e Ifthe addition of the module violates a controller configuration rule you get an error and the module is not added 114 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 55 Form fields continued Element Description Configuration Lists the current configuration of the controller Micro controller systems e A Power Comm module is automatically added when you create the controller record e The reader digital input and digital output modules need to be added to match the physical setup of the controller Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you must click Save for the appropriate records to be generated or deleted Once you add a module you can mix and match with other types of modules For example if you add one 2RP module additional modules can be 2RP or 2SRP For the M5Px you can add up to four 2RP modules four 2SRP modules two 4CRP modules two 8RP modules or two CK8RP modules DI and DO modules can be added with all of the above ACU controller systems e ACU modules RRE reader RIM RIM input RRM output IKERRE keypad reader e The reader RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 RREIKE digital input RIM and digital output RRM modules need to be added to match the physical setup of the controller Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you must click Save for the appropriate records to be generated or deleted Once you add a module you can mix and match wi
303. figure ACURS2 or ACURS4 e ACU2XLPlus supports 8 or 16 readers built in LAN connection When you make a selection the appropriate fields become available for the selected controller type Hardware Address Micro controllers Enter a number from 1 to 61439 maximum ACU controllers This number is the five digit serial number printed on the ACU panel Enter a number from 1 to 61439 maximum Description Address ACU only This field contributes the controller number portion of device descriptions If you replace a controller board be sure to enter the new hardware address serial number here if you want the hardware address portion of the device description to be accurate in the records of associated devices such as this reader description example 12345 1 01 Reader This reader is on controller 12345 module 1 reader 1 Ifthe board is changed 12345 is no longer accurate 101 102 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 50 Form fields continued Element Description Elevator Controller ACU only Select this check box if this controller is to be assigned for elevator control e Ifthe controller is an elevator controller it can only manage elevators and nothing else e if you are changing this ACU from an Elevator type to a Normal type the Elevator records assigned to any area must be reassigned or deleted Head of Line Once you have connected the first controller to the host this control
304. formation that defines an interface license for external application integration to this application 191 192 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 83 API Connections API Connection e Description Definition Application Login Password Confirm Password PC Name Table 106 Form fields Element Description Application Login Enter the login used by the external application to connect and access the API Each login must be unique Password We recommend a noncryptic password The password must be greater than four alphanumeric or wildcard characters with no spaces The password is not case sensitive Confirm Password Enter the password a second time PC Name From the drop down list select the computer for this application that hosts the external application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 106 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define floors Use the Floor form in the Elevators group to associate a description to a floor number Facility A facility can be designated for the new floor record from the Facility drop down list NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Chapter 4 193 Devices Floor tab Use the Floor tab to create a description for a floor Figure 84 Floor tab 4 Floor e Description Facility
305. g on graphics maps Monitor to display what digital input event data is being received by GMC O MC Digital Output Events f digital output device status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what digital output event data is being received by GMC 9 MC Intrusion Zone Events f intrusion zone status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what zone event data is being received by GMC e MC Area Events f secure area status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what area event data is being received by GMC 0 MC General Events GMC Action Commands GMC Database Checking VMC objects f GMC application windows are not launching when requested for example attempting to open graphics monitor graphics symbol editor graphics map editor or graphics preferences fails Monitor to display what application requests GMC is receiving from the FCWnx application If commands issued from graphics maps are not being executed Monitor to display what commands GMC is trying to activate through the SPAPI If GMC is notifying the operator of errors when attempting to access the database but FCWnx does not inform the operator that there are problems with the database Monitor to display any attempts by GMC to inform the FCWnx application of difficulties accessing the database VMC Platform This is for internal use only VMC Viewer f the Video Viewer
306. g or incorrect schema properties such as columns keys constraints indexes triggers and tables The executable file is installed with this application and resides in the program folder 1 Locate and double click the DatabaseIntegrity exe file to manually run the utility 2 Enter the server name or click Browse and navigate to the appropriate server name 3 Enter the SQL system administrator sa Database Password or accept the encrypted database password of the default server 4 Click Connect to locate and connect to this application databases The remaining selections are now enabled Accept the default options or review and disable selections 5 Select one of two options Verify that Check Database Integrity is selected Optional Select the Autocorrect check box This feature runs only once and corrects obvious schema in the database Results display in a report Note Autocorrect is not available on a Global configuration Select which databases to check Select Start to begin Wait as the Database Integrity tool compares and validates the integrity of your database Messages generate to an IntegrityCheck html file in your application Logs folder Select Unlock Database Mutex to unlock the shared resource Select Unlock to unlock the database mutex for this application s SQL instance 6 Click OK when the Application Success window displays 386 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 7 Click View Integrity Repor
307. g the components being installed and the installation of applications proceeds When installation of all components is complete you are asked to reboot the computer 7 Reboot your computer at this time An icon displays on the desktop labeled IT Assistant You can access the Disk Array software from the icon or the group created in the Start menu 8 After the computer restarts and you log on a message displays stating that the Windows Server application Disk Administrator has been replaced by the Dell OpenManage Array Manager If for some reason you later uninstall the Array Manager software the Windows Server Disk Administrator is restored to the pre installation configuration 9 Double click the IT Assistant icon on the desktop to display Logon Information By default you are given the choice of Read only access to monitor the status of the Disk Array You may also select Read Write access allowing you to make changes and configure the various preferences of the RAID Array and the files contained on the disk For this configuration process we need Read Write permissions 396 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 10 Select Read Write access and click OK You do not need to provide login information unless someone has already configured and secured the system and you are making changes to the previous configuration Note When the program opens for the first time a message displays stating IT Network Monitoring Service is not
308. generated for Cut and Short Controller dial host If selected an alarm occurring on a dial up controller or controllers downstream from a dial up controller causes the controller to dial the host in order to report the alarm Operator acknowledge If selected the operator must acknowledge the alarm on the Alarm Monitor form before the alarm can be cleared Priority This number indicates the priority of this alarm and how it displays on the Alarm Monitor form This priority tells the system host in which order it should alert the operator if multiple alarms occur at the same time The lower the number the higher the priority The priority range is 0 through 19 Example A Duress alarm is assigned priority 2 An Intrusion alarm is assigned priority 3 Multiple Intrusion alarms were being reported when a Duress alarm occurs The Duress alarm displays above the Intrusion alarms on the Alarm Monitor form Route alarms to history If selected alarm activity is written to the alarm history Print alarms at host If selected the alarm history transaction is printed on a selected system printer when the alarm changes state between alarm and reset Alarm transactions print only if the transaction is routed to the printer and the alarm transaction printer is selected The selection of the alarm transaction printer is done on the Client tab of the Client form Delay Time ACU only From the drop down list select the number of seconds du
309. gned digital output groups The digital output groups can be on a local or other controller Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign DO groups you want associated with the selected record Only DO groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group Assign DO Groups Click OK to display results in the Output Groups windowpane Micro only You can select an output group as primary from the output groups displayed in the windowpane If the selection is not on a local controller the assignment arrow button is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group If the controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO group is triggered Primary Local Output Group When an input is active or inactive select the action to be performed on all DOs within all selected DO groups 149 150 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 72 Form fields continued Element Description Reader DO Actions Active Inactive e Duration The door locks and valid credentials unlock the door Schedules can override this state e Lock no access The door locks and does not allow access Schedules can override the state and put
310. gned on the Credential Alias form Refer to Define credential alias on page 295 The encoded number is entered into a keypad reader Example If you use a company code the number may look like this 00670010Xxxxxxxxxx01 where e The first four digits indicate your company number 67 with preceding zeros 0067 e The second set of four digits indicates your company site number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 e The third set of digits is the unique card number xxxxxxXXXx e The fourth set of digits is the number of times that this card has been issued to the credential holder 01 Status Note Active credentials are granted access through readers You can create a custom status description to display on the Activity Monitor using the Custom Credential Status form Refer to Create custom credential status on page 297 Active The credential has been assigned to a person who may gain access An Active credential can be re assigned as a Guard Tour credential Guard Tour The credential has been assigned to a person and is used as a guard tour credential A Guard Tour credential can be re assigned as an Active credential Issuable The credential has not yet been assigned to a person or deactivated Lost The credential has been reported as lost or stolen Remake This credential has been damaged or returned Suspended This credential was assigned to a person who no longer works at the facility terminated or is currently not work
311. gning a component object to write to a particular logfile you are removing that object from the list of components that write to the default logfile How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 204 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save to save your new settings before you exit this tab 3 When you open the Diagnostic Viewer the activities of your selected component display in the logfile to which it is assigned Those items with the COM and Line as part of the component name have the highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage Although you may want to monitor several objects at the same time this results in a large number of messages and compromises system performance Note After viewing return to the Diagnostic Setting form and disable the debug messages 378 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object Table 205 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages FCWnx objects Diagnostic Manager If the FCWnx Diagnostic Service does not start Client If communication problems exist between the FCWnx server and it s clients Video Management If the FCWnx server has a video problem on the server side database application or device errors Video GUI If an FCWnx application problem exists on the user interface client side SQL If data returned in an FC
312. gs are automatically saved to your computer and DCOM is configured for FCWnx e At login the user is prompted for a domain user name and password This login is used to authenticate remote DCOM objects At a later time if you choose to change this selection return to this window e To keep interruptions to the FCWnx application to a minimum your IT Department may choose to set passwords as never expiring e If any computer in your FCWnx system uses DCOM authentication then all other client computers must use DCOM authentication Chapter 1 7 Introduction 3 Firewall Configurations The following port numbers display by default Controller Communications Port 6699 Client Workstation Server Communications Port 135 RPC The following port numbers are read from the dvmrt able of your FCWnx system Server Workstation Video Streaming Port 8088 Used by the video server to send streaming video Start Video Communications Port Range 3 8085 Used by video clients to communicate with video servers These numbers signify a range of ports Your application log identifies the specific ports that are opened Additionally your firewall application identifies which ports are on or off Start Digital Video Viewer Port Range 20 8089 Additional ports used by video clients to communicate with video servers These numbers signify a range of ports Your application log identifies the specific ports that are opened Additionally your f
313. h Company Code Table 66 Form fields Element Description The following fields are available for Micro or ACU controller systems Normal Credential Only Select an event schedule from the drop down list If this is an ACU controller system time schedules display This reader is then used as a Normal reader beginning at the time and day given Present your credential Credential and PIN Required Select an event schedule from the drop down list If this is an ACU controller system time schedules display This reader is then used as a credential and PIN reader beginning at the time and day selected Present your credential and enter a PIN Chapter 4 139 Devices Table 66 Form fields Element Description Credential or Keypad Entry Select an event schedule from the drop down list If this is an ACU controller system time schedules display This reader can be used to present a credential or enter a credential number beginning at the time and day selected Present your credential or enter a credential number The following fields are available for ACU controller systems only Access with Site Code ACU only Access with Site Code Select a time schedule during which access is granted if the Site Code on the credential and person record is correct for access to this reader Access with Company Code ACU Access with Company Code Select a time schedule during which access is granted if only the Co
314. h a minimum CPU speed of 2 GHz 2 GB RAM 10 GB HDD and 10 100 NIC A color monitor shall also be provided 1024 x 768 resolution 16 bit color display 404 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 405 Glossary This section explains some terms as they apply to FCWnx Table 213 FCWnx terms explained Element Description anti passback Anti passback APB is an access control feature designed and configured to reduce the chance of users passing back their credential to another person attempting to gain access Micro controllers When readers are designated as entry IN or exit OUT the system is able to record whether a user is inside or outside at any time by noting the last place a credential was used If the last valid transaction was reported at an IN reader then the system knows that they are inside If the last valid transaction was at an OUT reader then the system knows that they are outside e Active APB does not let a person re enter unless they first exit The user is unable to pass back their credential to allow a friend to gain entry e Passive APB records the status but does not enforce the status The system knows where a person is but does not stop them from entering twice e Timed APB refers to a system where users are forgiven after a certain length of time configured in minutes After the configured time is expired the user status is set to neutral and the system allows them to re enter Th
315. h a network Chapter 4 91 Devices When you create a controller record only those records for the associated devices readers alarms alarm groups and digital outputs supported by the controller s configuration are created For example the MPX2000 is a single module Micro controller Other modules do not display for selection as shown in the image below This module address is 0 Figure 30 MPX2000 configuration Controller e Description MPX2000 Facility Ignore Facilities lt Controller Definition Securit TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control i Port Settings Modules MP2000 Configuration Ja MPx2000 a 0022 0 Default 0022 0 01 Reader 0022 0 02 Reader 0022 0 03 Reader 0022 0 04 Reader 2 0022 0 16 Power In this example notice the DI records created automatically when the MPX2000 record was saved Figure 31 DI records A Digital Input E BR Description 0022 0 15 Tamper A Descri Number Sense Time Type State 0022 0 15 0 00 Alarm Open Facility Ignore Facilities v 0022 0 16 0 00 Alarm Open 0022 0 1 0 00 Alarm Open Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events Status 0022 0 2 0 00 Alarm Open 0022 0 3 0 00 Alarm Open Controller MicroPMNPlus200 0022 0 4 0 00 Alarm Open 0022 0 1 0 00 Inactive Open Module 1022 0 Default 0022 0 2 0 00 Inact
316. hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 123 124 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Reader tab The Reader tab contains the basic information about the reader Figure 44 Reader tab Table 61 Form fields Reader e Description 8 Facility v Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Controller ACUXL 19581 Module Number Model v Credential Format v Status Physical type E Online O Normal Credential Only E Active Credential and PIN Required Credential or Keypad Entry Logical type O Normal OTA In O Elevator O APB In O T8A Out TRA In Out O APB Out O In required O APB APB and T amp A Options E Passive APB and T amp A Timed APB min Multiple Exiting Areas Keypad Options E Max Invalid PIN Count LJ Keypad Entry Card Number Length v E Enable Valid No Passage Element Description Controller Module This is a read only field The description of the controller that manages this reader This is a read only field The default description is in the format mmmmm bb Module Type where mmmmm represents the controller num
317. hat controller displayed on the drop down list Table 89 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Owner Type Category This is a read only field and displays the object to which the alarm belongs or refers Assign a category to this alarm Categories are defined on the Alarm Category tab of the Alarm Priority form Area Alarms owned by an area API Alarm is bidirectional and owned by the external interface CCTV Interface Alarm is owned by an interface Client Alarm is owned by a Regional database client Controller Alarm is owned by a controller Digital Input Alarm is owned by the digital input such as a motion sensor The 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 or M PXN 2000 is owned by the controller it is a low battery alarm from the controller Failover Alarm is owned by the host client Guard Tour Alarm is owned by a reader or digital input Camera Alarm is owned by a camera DVR Alarm is owned by a DVR Reader Alarm is owned by a reader Region Failover Alarm is owned by the host Regional database server Module Alarm is owned by an individual module 167 168 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 89 Form fields continued Element Description Settings Note If this alarm is associated with a SCIF ACU only workstation this control is not available for selection unless you are at the workstation that is hosting the ACU controller associated with this a
318. hat the system is no longer communicating with the server Navigation pane The navigation pane is made up of two tabs as listed in the table below Table 131 Form fields Element Description Facility View The Facility View tab displays configured DVRs and cameras in a hierarchal structure according to facility An operator only sees cameras and DVRs that are in the operator s assigned facilities Each DVR is identified with the associated cameras and preset conditions The DVRs are listed in alphabetical order Note All devices are displayed according to the facility to which they are assigned Therefore even if a camera is associated to a DVR if they are assigned to different facilities the camera does not display under the associated DVR Custom View The Custom View tab displays any custom views that you have saved 229 230 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Play controls Table 132 Form fields Element Description al Snapshot Click to capture the current image a single frame of video in a JPG format You can attach this image to an e mail message later for distribution To set the default Snapshots directory in which to store images select File Preferences The Video Viewer Preferences dialog displays where you can browse to the directory of your choice Fast Rewind Click to quickly return to the beginning of the video Reverse Pause Click to view the previous video
319. hat you record this number You can now enter this key into the controller preference block at the controller 107 108 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 51 Form fields continued Element Description Data Key This application supports three methods of data encryption standards DES DESIII and AES DES When you select this method only one dialog box is available for input Enter 16 unique hex characters in this binary field We recommend that you do not repeat any character The additional two dialog boxes are unavailable for entry DES III Enter 48 unique hex characters in the binary dialog boxes in three 16 character stings If you do not enter unique hex characters this controller record is not saved An invalid field message displays informing you that the keys that were chosen are too weak AES AES encryption is enabled for ACU controller systems only Enter 64 unique hex characters in the binary dialog boxes in four 16 character strings Edit Click to re assign or revise an existing encrypted data key for a selected controller When you click this button one time this button label changes to Auto Generate Note To use AES encryption you must select the AES data key option and then select the Edit button AES encryption uses four 16 character strings for a total of 64 characters Auto Generate Click this button to system generate a data key We recommend that you record this number
320. he alarm points on the physical hardware This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of a digital output to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment 2 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Security Devices Digital Output Group Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 160 1 Enter a unique description for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 2 A facility option can be designated Note If you assign DOs that belong to a different facility you may be creating an undesired result not all DOs are visible under certain facilities 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Table 1 Task Quick Setup guide qs9 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Alarm instructions Alarm responses Alarms Application Group Alarms amp Events Instruction Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 163 1 The instructions should belong to the same facility as the transaction with which they are associated Assign a number to the instruction records Enter the text you want to display when the associated transaction occurs The instruction can be 1 to 500 alphanumeric characters in length Alarms amp Events Response Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 164 1 A facility optio
321. he central supervisory station the system shall be provided with an uninterruptable power supply UPS with sufficient capacity to operate the computer equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes If more than 15 minutes is required for the secondary power supply to supply the UPS input power the UPS shall be capable of providing input power for at least that amount of time The UPS shall comply with the Standard for Uninterruptable Power Supply Equipment UL 1778 or the Standard for Fire Protective Signaling Devices UL 1481 A UL Listed printer shall be provided Signal prioritization shall be set up as follows from highest to lowest Alarm Trouble Supplementary such as access control Polling of a receiving unit must not exceed 200 seconds Exit and Entry delay must not exceed 60 seconds Communication between Host and Protected Premise Units must consist of an independent dedicated and direct Ethernet line Communication over LAN and WAN has not been investigated by UL Elevator Control DVR CCTV Camera functions and Keypad Alarm Response have not been evaluated by UL Appendix B 403 Certifications 13 Any communication failure shall be treated as a compromise of the Encrypted Line Security of the proprietary burglar alarm system when installed with NIST validated Triple DES C module Version 1 1 14 The minimum system configuration for the Facility Commander Wnx monitoring equipment consists of a Listed Pentium computer wit
322. he local administrator 5 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual This utility is launched one of three ways Auto launches immediately following the licensing sequence Select Configure Ports on the main File menu of FCWnx Click Start select Programs Facility Commander Wnx and then Security Configuration The three windows of this application are as follows J Communications Ports for Clients These are the ports used for TCP and UDP filtering Low Range Enter 6700 High Range Enter 6709 Click Next to continue The settings are automatically saved to your computer DCOM User and Password Anonymous By default this check box is selected and this application uses anonymous authentication That is DCOM authentication is not verified DCOM communications are configured for you by running the SecurityCnfg application Supported authentications Anonymous Local User Account Domain Account Domain Yes N A Yes Workgroup Yes Not supported N A Clear this check box to enable the fields on this tab Username Enter a domain or local user name for this user This field accepts 34 characters Password Enter a domain or local password for the user listed in the User Name field This field accepts 34 characters Password Confirm Enter the domain or local password a second time identical to what was entered in the Password field Domain Enter the name of the FCWnx domain or workgroup Click Next to continue The settin
323. he output groups displayed in the windowpane If the selection is not on a local controller the assignment arrow button is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group If the controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO group is triggered 173 174 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 92 Form fields Element Description When an alarm is active or inactive select the action to be performed on all DOs within all selected DO groups Reader DO Actions On Alarm On Reset e Duration A valid credential unlocks the door for the configured duration e Lock no access The door locks and does not allow access Schedules can override the state e Indefinite Unlock The door is put into an unlock state Schedules cannot override the current state e Lock The door locks and valid credentials can unlock the door Auxiliary DO Actions On Alarm On Reset e On Indefinite The DO is put into active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller e Off The DO is put into the inactive state indefinitely Schedules can override this state on a controller e On for Duration The DO is put into the active state for the duration defined Schedules can override this state on a controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 92 and complete the fields on this tab Note Be aware that Inval
324. he update of records begins immediately A window displays with a progress bar indicating the update progress 7 Click Abort if you want to stop the update in progress Note You cannot close a form during the Mass Update process Right click shortcut menu navigation is unavailable when you are in Mass Update mode If you have changed any preference but did not Save a message reminds you to discard or save your changes Smaller batch updates are recommended to prevent performance issues during a mass update A Mass Update Complete dialog box displays indicating completion or failure When mass updates are processed to an access right a log file is generated and a View Results key displays in the dialog box Click to view the completion log We recommend that you rename and save this file to another location for reference purposes Renaming the log prevents an overwrite 10 When the process is complete a Mass Update Complete dialog message displays 11 Right click and select Mass Update from the shortcut menu to disable and exit Mass Update mode The records refresh at this point Note Updates display in the list box to the right Alarm Routing and Bumping Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 187 1 Click the Alarms Events group 2 Click the Alarm Routing and Bumping icon 3 Assign Client groups for Routing and a frequency option 4 Assign Client groups for Bumping and a frequency option 5 Follow guidelines to com
325. ial Definition Credential Status User Fields Controller i A Credential Status APB Status TA Status Use the Status button to retrieve the credential status from the selected controller Table 168 Form fields Description Controller Select a controller from the drop down list of available controllers in facilities assigned to this operator and then click Status The selected controller must be online in order to display a Status windowpane conveying information about the selected credential Table 168 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Credential Status Micro only Displays the current status according to the controller database Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preferences form displays in red font in the list box on the right APB Status Displays the current Anti Passback status TA Status Displays the current Time and Attendance status Status Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 168 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 291 292 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual User Fields tab Use the User Fields tab to enter user defined information for the Credential form record se
326. ial data layout See Legend Parity layout 1 E 0 Parity layout 2 E 0 Parity layout 3 E 0 Parity layout 4 E 0 amp Credential Format e Description Facility v Controller Type vl Format Type O Magnetic Stripe O Wiegand Position Number of credential characters Number of facility characters Export format to file 299 300 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 174 Form fields Element Description Controller Select the controller type from the drop down menu as a Micro controller or ACU controller Format Type Select from two data masks Magnetic Stripe The number is a mask embedded into a magnetic tape strip and usually adhered to credentials or credit cards Wiegand A pulse generating mask sensed by a pickup coil the reader This is a complex system to manufacture and virtually impossible to duplicate making it one of the most secure access control technologies The number is a mask of a digital O or 1 Position Indicates the location or position of the bit where your mouse pointer is presently positioned in the mask combination Credential data layout B C I The following characters are acceptable Also refer to the Legend group box Micro Magnetic Stripe N credential or facility site bit B Start character With few exceptions the start character is B the majority of the time 0 to 9 A C D E Constant characters
327. ibility and connectivity to the client and servers by name resolution FCWnx uses PC Names only The following describes two ways to validate operations e Invoking Ping Select Start and then Run At the Open field enter command A DOS like window opens At the prompt enter ping pcname where pcname is the name of the PC to which you are validating visibility and connectivity If you receive a response of an unknown host you need to re examine you TCP IP configuration If you receive a reply the client server is online and available for connection Start Run PC Name Select Start and then Run At the Open field enter pcname where pcname is the name of the PC to which you are validating connection If the connection is valid you see the shared folders on the remote PC Note Ifyou are using Token Ring and or TCP IP you are encouraged to contact your system administrator for local requirements and restrictions Client tab Use the Client tab to configure a client record Figure 14 Client tab Table 27 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences XL Client e Description Facility 2 Client Backup Clients OS Type v Region de Workstation z Type l Imaging Status Thin Client Status O Disabled O Disabled O Enabled Enabled Auto logoff E Display alarm notification Minutes Form Search Limits E Enable Limit Ping Time msec Interval Alarm a
328. ice must be identical If you do not assign a user name in the application but the DVR has a configured user name there is no connectivity authentication Password Enter the same password associated with the assigned user name if any that has been configured locally in the DVR for authenticating connectivity This is not a required field The default is no password however be aware that the DVR form and DVR device must be identical If you do not assign a password in the application but the DVR has a configured password there is no connectivity authentication PTZ Control This field is not available for edit TCP IP is enabled if cameras with PTZ capability are configured on this DVR and require control from this application 209 210 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 115 Form fields Element Description Event Tagging Select TCP IP or None The default is TCP IP Select TCP IP if event triggers are required to tag recorded video upon activity from defined readers and alarms Select None if no tagging of recorded video is required for event triggers and only access to live video is desired upon activity from defined readers and alarms Time Sync Interval The DVR date and time clock can be synchronized by its host computer to ensure that access control alarm and video events across the entire system are time stamped in sync When DVRs on a centralized system reside in different time zones the DVRs should be hos
329. ices Table 73 Form fields Element Description Time Schedule Click the drop down list to select a previously created time schedule Enable Disable Select Enable if you want to enable this digital input when this time schedule starts Enabling the digital input allows it to then trigger the associated digital output when a state change occurs Select Disable if you want to disable this digital input when this time schedule starts Disabling the digital input prevents the state change from being reported and the associated digital output from triggering How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 73 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Events tab Note The Events tab is available for Micro controller systems only The Events tab is available for input if the type of digital input is Digital Output or Alarm Use the Events tab to assign events and an associated sense time to this digital input Events define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with an event Therefore that event stays in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually Click Search to display a list of existing event records associated with this digital input Figure 56 Events tab Digital Input eS Description Facility v Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events Status Sense Time Description Sense Time Mi
330. ick the icon of the appropriate monitor e Activity Monitor displays credential transactions e Alarm Monitor displays alarm activities e Client Monitor displays client information e Controller Monitor displays controller information 3 The options on the monitor toolbar vary with the monitor that is displaying All monitors These forms are outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multiple window management for both single and multiple monitor workstation configurations qs 27 qs 28 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 3 Operator tasks continued Task Description View Graphics Console Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 338 Note This option is available only if you are licensed for graphics console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Management Console GMC User Manual Click the Monitors amp Controls group Click the Graphics Console icon The Graphics Console option opens the application that lets you view the maps of your facility that were created in the Graphics Map Editor These maps point out the location and type of incoming alarms as they occur such as a door held open alarm Operators can issue commands and launch applications such as locking and unlocking doors 4 G
331. icro controller 2 0 0 0 0 0 c ccc ccc cence ence ene enees 195 Configuring elevator control using an ACU controller 0 00 0 ccc e cee n eee e es 195 A nln Geen ar aa a Mewar aa da a Mae sare dt oo 196 PUBIC Access tiro 197 Floor Digital OULGUTHGD enire aka e E A ER Ea aba 199 Floor Digital Output Digital Inputitab poi A 200 Elevator control SAMPIE SCEMANOS 1 A deal 201 Chapter 5 OVEIVIEW essa cir dr a e AA AAA eae 204 Video driver installation coin a A A ul edb hh aes 204 Define digital video recorders ooooooccoocccroncnccr ancora 204 DR a A li ds 205 Digital Video Recorder io ii nonnen avo AE E RTE E EEE 206 Definition tab iaa rd id A 206 communications Settings tab sssri treier cerimonia res ed ida ita 209 Video Display tO Bix air ii A A A 211 Status dl o otitis 212 Video WINKOWS 2 A A AS 213 Define camera presets vinos dida adzs 214 DET TAD eiie d AA eee ee eee es 214 Define COMENGS ico a a dad ES 215 DEMON TOD aa ee ad a SA lo cia 215 Presets Tiara nos 217 Define event triggers ia a Gales din 218 Event tagging OVErViEW e 218 Video Event Tigger Tormi i e eat eeen a A A AAA NE IN 218 o AA LOTE NEE EEE OO A E A A 219 Redders tobii aani nE a A AE ESA 220 Alarms TOD asis sree nee mister IN A e ea e aa AEAN AEE A AA T ie 221 En bledlarm Video POPUP eirs ss iarsin nr EEEE a as 222 intrusion Zone ta Dininde san PP A 223 AA HOD tows sass a neban a A AAA EE TETE TET TE eles sis tas 224 Video CD BUNE
332. id Credential alarms and Lost Credential alarms do not reset If you assign a DO Group to either of these alarms the alarm goes inactive or turns off when acknowledging or purging 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Schedule tab Use the Schedule tab to assign schedules for monitoring and printing alarms Time schedules define intervals that include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the alarm monitoring or printing changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the alarm monitoring or printing returns to the nonscheduled value Note For Micro controller systems this tab is not available for host alarms such as Host Comm and Encryption alarm Figure 71 Schedule tab Table 93 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Description 0018 0 01 Tamper Facility Ignore Facilities v Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTY Monitoring Time schedule O On ott Print alarm Time schedule y O Yes Element Description Monitoring Note This field is available for nonlogical alarms associated with ACU controllers For Micro this field is disabled for Host alarms such as Host Comm and Encryption alarm Time schedule Click the drop down list to select a time schedule On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor alarms or Off if the above sche
333. ield are automatically named to include the directory path file name date and time If you choose not to back up any of the three databases clear the check box at the end of that field If the check box is selected but no destination is entered in the database field backup of that database file does not occur Click Backup The backup process begins When then backup is complete a dialog box displays a message verifying the successful backup of the chosen databases Click OK Exit the Maintenance window 3 Back up Designs Graphics Images Signatures and Videos folder You can use any backup program you want and any media such as tape zip disks CD or a network folder The size of the files in the folder you want to back up are a determining factor of which media to use qs 20 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task Application Group Note Backing up an Enterprise Edition System Using SQL Server Management Studio backups can be scheduled so that you do not have to remember to back up your databases Since this application does not contain a backup option you can use any method you like to back up the data You should keep two backups of the server computer as follows 1 Data backup Three databases Refer to the instructions for backing up databases in Microsoft SQL Server given below Externals Images Signatures Graphics De
334. ield if you want lost credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Printer Note The enabling and selection of the credential transaction printer is done on the Client form Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer Invalid Enable this field if you want invalid credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer Lost Enable this field if you want lost credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer Chapter 4 135 Devices How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 63 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Functions Schedule tab Use the Functions Schedule tab to select the schedules that are used to set a reader offline online or lock unlock a door Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the state of the reader changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the state of the reader returns to the nonscheduled value For example if a reader is scheduled online it returns to offline at the end of the schedule Figure 47 Functions Schedule tab B Reader e Description Facility Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status _ Extended Control Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Sche
335. iew of your forms with the active form taking precedence on the display screen This option lets you control multiple window or forms If you have several forms open but not visible select this option to view all forms at one time tiled side by side or one over the other on your display monitor Arrange icons This option lets you control multiple windows or forms If you have several forms in progress you can temporarily minimize a form from view Select this option to arrange the minimized form icons across the bottom of your display screen Save Position This option resets all main application and external application windows to the top left of your monitor Reset Positions This option saves the position of any open external monitor The next time a saved window is opened it opens in the saved position Table 11 Help menu Help Topics Chapter 1 Introduction Selection of this option starts the Help system e The left Help navigation pane displays books and their contents index entries and a search tab e Click and drag the of the Application Toolbar over any menu bar or toolbar item and a window opens with information pertaining to the selection e With an application form displaying you can click the icon and then drag the over any area of the open form and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section of your form User Manual About This Applicatio
336. ight For ACU controller systems You can assign areas to an access right assign activation and deactivation dates and then assign a time schedule and dates to the Area access right Table 146 Form fields Element Description Description This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Access Right from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Note For Micro controller readers assign readers to the access right using the Access Right tab For ACU controller readers assign the readers to an Area first Then assign the Area to the access right using the Area tab Chapter 7 259 Access rights departments persons and credentials Access Rights tab Note The Access Rights tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Use the Access Rights tab to assign readers owned by Micro controllers to this access right record This form works in conjunction with the Mode Event Trigger form You can add additional control to the access right by assigning a time schedule Figure 110 Access rights tab i Access Right e Description Facility v 167 Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups
337. ight e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available area e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an area Click OK to accept the selections and display the areas in the Assigned Areas list box 1 Review the guidelines in Table 127 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 225 226 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Video CD Burner The Video CD Burner option in the Administration group lets you record video to a CD Figure 101 Video CD Burner a viteocDeurner TT Table 129 Form fields Select files from the list below aL Space Used OKB Space Available OKB a Y Select Recording Device AMECA trek Element Description Select files from the list below Navigate the directory tree to display a list of previously recorded files recorded from a DVR By default the Video folder of your application displays If video clips are stored in another folder navigate to that folder to display the video file names Alist box displays file details such as file names and file sizes Space Used This indicates the amount of existing data on the CD to which you are about to record Space Available This indicates the amount of remaining space on the CD to which you are about to record Select Recording Device Record Button From the drop down list navigate to the drive or device to which you are about to record Click to begin recording
338. igital input camera DVR controller or reader For an alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form you can either select the Monitor field on the Alarm form or schedule the alarm to be monitored When set to be monitored the alarm displays and changes to an alarm condition qs 10 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Task Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Alarm groups Micro only Elevators Application Group Alarms amp Events Alarm Group Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 179 1 Alarm groups provide two things First they provide a convenient way of scheduling many alarms at once Second they provide a means of disabling monitoring in many alarms from a keypad reader When a controller record is created 16 alarm groups are also created 2 The description of the alarm group should be unique When the records are created the default description includes the controller to which this alarm group is associated and the number of the alarm group For example 0001 Group 1 which represents alarm group one on controller one All alarms are automatically assigned alarm group 0 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the alarm group number and controller number prefix to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Note Be very careful when assigning
339. iguration tab Ed Region e Description ect xoKQ71 Region Backup Regions APB Region Configuration APB Entering Region Assign M APB Exiting Region Assign Retain APB Status Across Regions Invalidate Credential Across Regions Ignore APB Status Across Regions Table 23 Form fields Element Description APB Entering Region This list box displays those readers that have been selected as APB IN readers for the selected Region Assign Click to assign APB IN readers to this region Only readers previously configured as APB IN readers are displayed for selection APB Exiting Region This list box displays those readers that have been selected as APB OUT readers for the selected Region Assign Click to assign APB OUT readers for this region Only readers previously configured as APB OUT readers are displayed for selection Table 23 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description following notification options It may not be required or significant for the controllers in a Region to report status to another Region Select from one of the Retain APB Status Across Region This is the default of three status options If selected the APB status is recognized across all Regions in the FCWnx Global system A credential can be presented at an APB IN reader in one Region and at an APB OUT reader in a second Region Enable Global APB must b
340. igured beforehand e You can bump an alarm to one or more client groups following a time lapse of an unacknowledged and unpurged alarm to the client groups selected for routing e Alarm bumping information is displayed on the Alarm Monitor form in the alarm state column Note You may want to review this Sample Scenario before you begin This is a routing and bumping schedule for a business in two buildings administration building and a factory working three shifts Figure 80 Routing and bumping scenario Time Schedules Alarms Alarms Alarms Group Descriptions Route to Bump to Bump Client Work Station WS s After 8am to Spm Group 1 Group 4 10 min Group 1 V S 1 Front Door Admin Bldg VVS 3 Front Door Factory Spm to Midnight Group 2 Group 5 5 min Group 2 VWS 4 Back Door Admin Bldg VVS 5 Back Door Factory Midnight to Sam Group 2 Group 6 1 min Group 3 N A Group 4 WS 2 Supervisor s desk Admin Bldg Sam to Spm Group 5 WWSX6 Supervisor s desk Factory Spm to Midnight Group 6 WWSX5 Supervisor s desk Factory Midnight to Sam Example An alarm comes in at 3 30am that is configured to be routed to Group 1 The alarm is not purged or acknowledged therefore itis bumped to Group 4 at 8 40am The transaction is written to Alarm History Table 103 Form fields Element Description Description Click to assign a unique title to this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facili
341. iguring a SymSuite device the bus address must be entered as a 1 for the PTZ cameras to function properly Select a Default Hostname from the drop down list that hosts the defined DVR and act as its communications server If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition you cannot re assign this DVR to any other Host computer except the Active Client that is presently hosting this device 208 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 114 Form fields continued Element Description Poll Time seconds Poll Interval Enter the length of time in seconds that elapse prior to a status request being sent to the DVR for verification of communications and processing of error and or alarm messages since the last poll Timeout Enter a length of time to wait for a response after a request prior to retrying if no response has been returned Retry Interval Enter the length of time to wait between retries Retry Count Enter the number of retries to attempt before qualifying a communications failure How to 1 2 3 Review the guidelines in Table 114 and complete the fields on this tab Click Save before you exit this tab Configure a SymNet or a Legend IP camera a b Configure both the SymNet and Legend IP using the DVR Type GE SymNet 1 In the Digital Video Recorder form select the DVR Type GE SymNet 1 The DVR Hostname field will then be enabled and the Default Hostn
342. ilhouette displays Name First name middle initial and last name of credential holder Employee Number Number assigned to this employee Department Department where person is assigned Transaction Type Valid displays green invalid displays red or unknown displays gray messages display Guard tour activity types also display See Activity monitoring on page 312 for a listing of activity types Date Time Reader transaction date and time Reader Description Description of reader where credential was presented Always on Top Right click the Swipe and Show title bar to display a shortcut option that keeps the window in the forefront of all windows displaying on the workstation If you select another transaction the window content changes to the available information for that transaction Close this window by selecting the window exit button closing the Activity Monitor form or closing this application client program Chapter 9 319 Monitor and control Alarm monitoring Note For a shortcut to the functions available within the Alarm Monitor form or to a related form right click anywhere in the area where the alarm transactions display You can access the Alarm form and Graphic Console from this menu Not all options are available to you You must click on an alarm transaction with a camera association in order to enable video options on the shortcut menu All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Contr
343. ility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Guard Tour tab Configure the specifics of this tour You cannot save this record until you have completed the Tour tab NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Guard Tour tab Configure the specifics of this tour by completing the elements displayed on the Guard Tour tab Figure 132 Guard tour tab Guard Tour e Description 2 Facility v Guard Tour Tour Host Computer de Start Tour Point v Max tour time min Route activity to printer Tour Points Assign Tour Points Tour Credentials Assign Tour Credentials w lt E Table 176 Form fields Element Description Tour Host Computer From the drop down list select the computer that hosts this tour Guard tours must be owned by a specific client host 306 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 176 Form fields continued Element Description Start Tour Point From the drop down list select a tour point as the start point of this tour e Only direct and network controller devices display in this drop down list e When you select a start point Assign Tour Points becomes available Max tour time min e Enter the maximum number of minutes that th
344. ime Alarm points are associated with a particular area Operations such as masking alarms can be performed by area thereby masking or unmasking all alarm points in an area in a single step Areas are also assigned to person records as an exception to its own access privileges For example if some employees require access to one or more areas that are not included in an access group and they are the only employees with this unique requirement these specific areas can be added to enhance the access privileges of a given employee Assign readers to an area in order to use the device functionality The defined areas have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access control by using a credential and keypad reader or manual control The Area form provides the ability to define areas for each controller that consists of the following e Keypad disarm and arm e Time schedules e SCIF ACU only sensitive compartmentalized information facility workstations e Readers e Alarms e APB anti passback e Digital inputs Assigned only for utilizing the Arm Disarm function and SCIF control e Digital outputs Assigned only for SCIF control e Arm Disarm Area Arming Disarming Areas are also used for arming and disarming and they can be triggered in different ways such as Chapter 6 239 Areas and intrusion zones e User generated using manual control e Through a keypad reader if the area is local to the panel local arming disarmi
345. ines in Table 149 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Intrusion Zones tab Chapter 7 263 Access rights departments persons and credentials Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers The Intrusion Zones tab lets you assign intrusion zone control to previously created access rights Access to a reader and access to an intrusion zone are two separate access rights Only credential holders with an Arm Disarm intrusion zone access right are able to arm and disarm zones by accessing a credential keypad reader within a zone When a zone is armed all readers within that zone go offline therefore normal access rights do not gain access into the area Figure 113 Intrusion Zones tab e fs Access Right Description Facility i Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas SSS Assigned Intrusion Zones Table 150 Form fields Element Assigned Intrusion Zones Assign Intrusion Zones Description This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned intrusion zones for the currently selected access right record 264 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 150 Form fields continued Element Description Assign Intrusion Zone Click this button to display the Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign and unassign
346. ing an ACU controller 1 2 3 4 Create a Controller record and assign the Controller type as an Elevator Controller This controller cannot manage anything else It can only manage elevators Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Create area records on the Area form e Assign readers to the area See Area form Reader tab Note The area must also be assigned to an access right for a person to gain access to that reader Now you can configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select e Method of elevator control e Readers e Floors to area association You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller 196 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Elevator tab Select the Elevator tab to create or edit elevator information Figure 85 Elevator tab Table 108 Form fields BB Elevator e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Reader 00181 01 Reader lt Floor Tracking No Floor Tracking O Floor Tracking by Input Flo
347. ing at the facility Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preferences form displays in red font in the list box on the right Table 167 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description PIN Number If this credential is used with a credential and keypad reader assign a personal identification number here This number must be entered at the keypad in order to gain access with this credential If Hide PIN Number is selected on the Security tab Preferences form asterisks display in place of numbers in this field Note For Micro controller systems this number must be four digits For systems using ACU controllers this number can be 4 to 6 digits depending on the preferences set on the ACU Settings tab of the Preferences form Use preceding zeros if necessary to create the appropriate number of digits Follow extended unlock Alarm Sense Time e Select this option to enforce Extend Alarm Sense Time for this credential record If you assigned this credential to a person from the Assigned to drop down list this person is now allowed extra time to gain access to an entry or exit point in the system Time limitations are configured on the Door Functions tab of the Reader form e If this credential is being assigned to a person whose existing record indicates that Extend Alarm Sense Time is e
348. inimum setting is one minute The default and maximum is 30 minutes Select the number of seconds to wait before bumping this alarm notification to an additional location The default is zero Comment Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review Figure 80 on page 187 and the guidelines in Table 104 to complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 189 190 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Alarms tab Figure 82 Alarms tab E Routing and Bumping e Description A Facility z Definition Alarms Alarms Assign Alarms amp Table 105 Form fields Element Description Alarms This windowpane displays the names of alarms assigned to this Routing and Bumping record Assign Alarms Click to display an Alarm Assignment dialog box that lets you assign alarms for this application to this Routing and Bumping record How to 1 Review Table 105 to complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 Devices API Connection form The API Connection form in the Gateways amp Interfaces group lets you define an interface license for external application integration by assigning a description of the API Application Program Interface service that has been configure
349. ion Zone Areas tab Click to display an Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box listing available intrusion zones in your system Those zones selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in this list box The Intrusion Zone Assignment displays when Assign Intrusion Zone is clicked on the Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form or Event Trigger form The window displays a list of all intrusion zones for the controllers in the facilities available for assignment by this operator You can assign an unlimited number of intrusion zones to an access right e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available intrusion zone e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an intrusion zone Click OK to accept the selections and display the intrusion zones in the Assigned Intrusion Zones list box Note The Areas tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers The Areas tab lets you assign areas and area transaction types that become the source for this event trigger Figure 100 Areas tab Video Event Trigger A e Description E Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intusion Zone Areas Assigned Areas Transactions lam C Disarm O Invalid Tag Selection O None O Tag only O Tag as event Table 128 Areas tab Chapter 5 Video Element Description Transactions Select any one or all of the types of Area transactions that trigger an
350. ion of information displayed on your report e Secure Area Description Enter the range of area descriptions on which you wish to report or leave both fields blank to generate a report for all areas e From Select an area description from the drop down list as the start of the range of areas on which to base this report e To Select an Area description from the drop down list as the end of the range of areas on which to base this report Credential report form Use the Filters tab to generate a Credential report Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Credential Number Select the range of credential numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all credentials leave these fields blank e Credential To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those credentials assigned a specific status Credential History report form Use the Filters tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Credential Number Select the range of credential numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all credentials leave these fields blank Employee Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you want to list all persons leave these fields blank Employee Number Select the range of employee numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all numbers leave these fields blank Device Configuration
351. ion of the transaction in the Swipe and Show window An operator is able to monitor transactions and compare the photo ID to a live image The Swipe and Show window is set to a default size and cannot be resized Tailgating Tailgating refers to a user following another user through a door without presenting a credential They follow closely enough so they can get through the door or gate before it closes Only the first user is recorded as IN or OUT weak encryption key Weak encryption implies that the key could be unscrambled with a realistic amount of processing capacity and within a reasonable amount of time In FCWnx a message displays informing you that an assigned key is too weak and therefore invalid Corrections must be made before the record can be saved We recommend entering 48 unique hex characters in three 16 character strings Do not repeat any character Do not create a pattern
352. ion status for a head of line network direct controller If the controller loses network connection and fails over to a direct connect a configured Encryption status changes to None since Encryption is available for network controllers only Note The following items apply to ACU controllers only Supports 16 Readers ACU only Indicates Yes or No whether this controller supports 16 readers Number of Cards in Database ACU only Displays the number of credentials in the controller database Supports 8K Areas ACU only Indicates Yes or No whether this controller supports 8K areas Device Type ACU only Displays the device type Preference Updates Allowable ACU only Indicates Yes or No whether this controller allows preference updates Battery Backup Memory ACU only Indicates Yes or No whether this controller has backup memory Last status date Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information from the controller It may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned Chapter 4 113 Devices How
353. ired 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the areas displayed select the area to arm 3 Select ON 4 Reader display indicates Area Secured Disarm 1 The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the areas displayed select the area to arm 3 Select OFF 4 Reader display indicates Area Unsecure Arm disarm by manual control Manual area control for arming and disarming is accomplished using the Areas and Zones tab on the Manual Control form This follows the standard Manual Control form conventions including a Purpose entry by the operator Note Because you have access to an area this does not necessarily mean that you can arm disarm You must also be configured for Arm Disarm on the Person form Overview intrusion zones About Intrusion Options This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers 250 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Intrusion functionality provides the ability to define local intrusion zones per controller that consist of Readers Alarms Arm disarm input point Intrusion DI Arm disarm output point DO The defined intrusion zones have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access control by using a credential and keypad reader DI or manual control The intended application is suited for arming and disarming intrusion zones from outside of the monit
354. ired employee numbers for each person record 25 26 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 12 Form fields Element Description Grant Access on Duress Select this check box to allow a door to open and to signal a threatening situation With a valid access right and valid credential a PIN code is entered at the reader and one of the following a Micro controllers the final digit is incremented by 1 That is 1232 becomes 1233 1239 becomes 1230 Note that only the final digit changes b ACU controllers the entire number is incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 This sequence generates a duress alarm that displays on the Alarm Monitor similar to the following 0001 1 01 Duress The Activity Monitor displays activity type as Duress Activity The default setting for your system includes this feature already selected Clear this check box if you do not want this feature Credentials Enable line coloring for suspended credentials Select this check box to enable the FCWnx system to display suspended person and credential records in red Event Notifier E mail Support Enable Select this check box to activate the e mail notification option The following e mail dialog boxes become available To E mail Address Field Select a field name from the drop down list that is assigned as an e mail address 1 Labels for these field names are assigned on the User Fields and Address Fields tab of this form 2 The content
355. irewall application identifies which ports are on or off Note If you change any setting you are opening firewall ports and changing how video communicates It is required that each computer in your FCWnx system be changed to the identical setting Then restart services Click Finish to save and close this application The settings are automatically saved to your computer Navigation Typical Microsoft Windows navigation is used in this application Selecting menu bar drop down menu workspace items and task bar options are typical Microsoft navigational procedures Color or format in text or changes in the cursor identify hotspot links to related topics 1 To make the navigation or topic panes larger e Point to the divider between panes When the pointer displays hold down the left mouse button and drag the divider left or right e Point to any corner of the window When the pointer changes to a double sided arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the corner 2 Move up or down the topic window by clicking the scroll bar on the right side of the topic pane 3 To save the position of any main application or external application window select Save Position from the Window menu Close the window When re opened the window displays in the saved position Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Log on log off or Shut down the computer Enter your log in ID and password e To log in to the program from the File me
356. is a lock down mode and no entry is allowed at this reader Example This feature may be useful during construction of a new section to an existing building An entrance is being used by construction workers for accessing the construction site Credential validation is minimal Degraded Mode Access Select this option if you want this reader to function even when communication has been interrupted between the controller and the reader RREs must be powered separately from the ACU controller The door contact and relay must be owned by the external module The reader recognizes the first five company site codes only Door Mode Access Normal No Overlap Access is allowed as usual when a valid credential is presented Overlap Door Open Any number of credentials can be presented at this reader while the door is open and before the door closes Overlap Door Closed A second credential can be presented even if the first credentialholder has not yet opened the door Door Held Open Options Select one of the following options Extend Held Open 1 Minute When this option is selected the timer is extended an additional minute after the normal Held Open timer At the end of the normal Held Open time the reader s LED signals an alarm If the door closes before the additional minute expires the alarm cancels and is not sent to the host Extend Held Open REX Active When the held open timer expires an active REX restarts the held open timer If
357. is eliminates the need for an OUT reader and prevents a credential holder from re entering for that time period e Global APB tracks the user throughout the entire FCWnx network and across all controllers No matter where a user is their APB status is recorded e Regional APB FCWnx Global configuration tracks the user within a region The user is active in that region only and inactive in all other regions APB transactions using Valid No Passage as selected on the Reader form e Transactions are not tracked if the door is not opened 406 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description ACU controllers When designated as Entering Area or Exiting Area readers the system is able to record whether a user is inside or outside of an area at any time by noting the last place a credential was presented e The area must be defined as an APB area on the Area form e To track and grant deny access using APB areas must be defined as APB on the Area form and Readers must be defined as APB in the Reader form Only Readers assigned to the areas as entering area readers or exiting area readers will be part of the APB operation e When exiting an APB area to another APB or non APB area the credentialholder must exit the other area before being allowed back into an APB area otherwise a Tailgating error occurs This error can be prevented in some cases see Reader tab on page 124
358. is field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card Issue Number This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This feature refers to magnetic stripe cards Enter or select a number that indicates the number of times that this card number has been issued to the credential holder A card may be re issued if the card is damaged reported lost or stolen The original issue of this card begins with 00 A card can be issued up to 99 times The following fields are for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers or Micro controllers Encoded number Displays the credential s encoded number Credential Alias e If you selected Manual aliasing during installation enter the new number for the credential e If you selected Automatic aliasing during installation the number is entered for you Find Credential Click to display a Find Credential dialog box select a reader and present a credential at that reader The record is displayed that is associated with the credential presented Save Click to save this record How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 171 and complete the fields on this tab e Alias credential numbers saved to
359. is tour is allowed to last When the maximum time is reached a tour is ended automatically e The default and maximum number of minutes in this field is 480 Route Activity to Printer Select this check box to route credential activities to a selected and enabled system printer at the client computer that is hosting the guard tour You must have two separate printers configured if you are using a printer for tour activities and a printer for credentials Tour Points e Displays a list of assigned tour points All tours are random A random tour is a tour where all of its points do not need to be hit in a particular order except the assigned start point e Every time this tour is executed the order of hit points can vary A random tour ends automatically when all of its tour points have been hit Assign Tour Points e Click to display a Point Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign Tour Points to this tour e Selection results display in the Tour Points windowpane The Point Assignment window displays when you click Assign Tour Points enabling you to select and assign tour points to a tour e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available point e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a point e A DI start point can exist in only one tour therefore any Dis previously assigned as Start Tour Point in any tour do not display in the list The DI point cannot be re used e All tour points mus
360. it preference information Micro only 2 Start flashing controllers 3 View edit flash files View edit preference information Micro only Controller Preference Direct Dialup This option is available for selection of a single controller When selected the Controller Preference Configuration screen displays and the configuration for the controller is retrieved allowing you to edit or change an existing setup such as controller address IP address change or phone number changes Once saved the controller resets and the new changes take effect Note If you change preference block data through this application any Universal Credential Format UBF data is erased For example if a M 5 PXN was originally configured as a direct serial controller during installation but is now a network controller select the updated controller type and complete the network information Click OK The controller accepts the changes resets and then changes the host information for this controller The Controller Preference Direct Dialup tab lets you change the connection type of the controller and its Address Idle Time and DI res tolerance The Controller Preference Networking tab displays only if the system identified your controller as a network controller and lets you change the network preferences for the controller Chapter 9 Monitor and control Controller Preference Credential Format The Credential Format tab opens to display the custom c
361. ith a valid access right for the reader and an intrusion zone assigned Arm 1 followed by a valid credential read If all alarm points are reset not in an active state of alarm and all doors closed then all readers are placed offline doors locked and alarm points are monitored on The corresponding digital output is triggered as selected on the Intrusion Zone form When the zone is successfully armed all readers in the zone provide visual indication that the zone is armed Note We recommend using GE brand readers configured to display the PIN light ON or flashing depending on the selected reader model A Zone armed transaction is generated and displays on the Activity Monitor form When a zone is not successfully armed due to an invalid zone configuration on the Access Right form an Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Access Right transaction is generated If any alarm points are set in an active state of alarm or a door is open the zone does not become armed An Arm disarm Failed Zone not secure transaction is generated and displayed on the Activity Monitor form Disarm 0 followed by a valid credential read All alarm points in the zone are monitored off and readers in the zone are placed online for normal operation Note We recommend using GE brand readers configured to display the PIN light switching from ON or flashing to OFF depending on the selected reader model A Zone disarmed transaction is generated and displa
362. ith this printer from GE the DataCard drivers are installed for you e To print credentials the default printer must be the Imaging printer However this means that the Print Preview Report File menu does not display accurately You need to select your report printer before you preview a report e To select a different printer from the File menu select Print Setup and then your report printer If your printer is networked you may be required to adjust the security properties At the computer that owns the printer navigate to the Properties window for the selected printer Click Start Settings Printers Select the printer and then right click From the shortcut menu select Properties On the Security tab of the Properties window proceed to add Anonymous Login to the Group or user names Appendix A 391 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Readers Question What is the maximum number of readers per controller That depends on the controller Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your installation manual Setup Question How do I identify the ports used for FCWnx communication We recommend that you configure your FCWnx system with the Windows firewall ON In order for your system to perform successfully FCWnx opens communication ports for you These are the default port setting values used by FCWnx for communication between servers and clients Element Description 6699 Controller Communications Port 135 Client Workstati
363. ithout a response click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm changes to Acknowledged With a response click Responses to select a predefined response or enter your own in the Response field Then click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm changes to Acknowledged To remove an individual alarm without waiting for it to reset highlight the alarm and click Remove Individual 398 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 3 If you have permission you can remove all alarms in one action by clicking the Remove All icon Question How do I troubleshoot my Global system Review the following e Global configuration regional rules on page 46 e Replication and synchronization conflicts on page 47 e Review the installation manual chapter covering Installing a Global Configuration Confirm and review your configuration options and then review the Troubleshooting section e Refer to Microsoft Replication software documentation in printed and electronic format Terminal services Question J cannot capture and print with terminal services Capturing images requires the camera to be attached to a computer where the person is located which is not the case with terminal services However images can be captured elsewhere saved to file and loaded to FCWnx Printing credentials with terminal services is similar to printing a report or Microsoft Word document If the operator has permission to access the Credentia
364. ive Open 0022 0 3 0 00 Inactive Open Number 0022 0 4 0 00 Inactive Open 0022 0 5 0 00 Inactive Open Type Alarm 0022 0 6 0 00 Inactive Open 0022 0 7 0 00 Inactive Open Active State Sense Time 0022 0 8 0 00 Inactive Open O Closed Minutes 0022 0 9 0 00 Inactive Open 0022 0 10 0 00 Inactive Open Open lo J 5 0022 0 11 0 00 Inactive Open Both a Comment 14 gt Dal Records 17 Note The Controller form contains a combination of tabs The settings selected on the Controller Definition tab determine which tabs display 92 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define controllers Use the Controller form Security Devices group to configure controllers Complete the steps in the order presented For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 49 Form fields Element Description Description The description of the controller should be unique and include where the controller is located and or how it is used Example 1 Building A2 North Telco Closet could represent Controller 1 located in Building A2 North in the Telco Closet This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new controller record from the Facility drop down list All devices
365. ization commands field verify that the field is blank e Click Change Default Preferences to open a properties window with the General tab displayed Set Data Connection Preferences as follows Port Speed to 9600 Data Protocol to Disabled Compression to Disabled Flow Control to Hardware Click OK 4 Click OK 5 Exit the Control Panel or continue to set additional modems Disconnect after idle Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait before disconnecting from the controller when the connection is idle there is no history or database information being exchanged If you select 0 the connection remains active indefinitely and the host never drops communication with the controllers How to 1 To designate a modem for use with a dial up controller enable it by clicking in the box to the left of the modem name so that a check displays If you have a modem installed for support use do not select that modem 2 Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait before disconnecting from the controller when the connection is idle If you cross a firewall to communicate with a controller review Table 16 above 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 System preferences Clear Archive tab Use the Clear Archive tab to configure your system database archive clean up Figure 7 Clear Archive tab Preferences System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Field
366. k box should be at or near the bottom of the Advanced Settings list 5 Click OK to close the Folder Options window The settings for Simple File Sharing are now updated no computer reboot is required Note 1 Enabling Simple File Sharing prohibits the ability to assign user level passwords to shares When Simple File Sharing is enabled on a computer remote users are not prompted for a password when accessing that computer s shares 2 _ If the Windows xP Professional computer is part of a Windows domain rather than a Windows workgroup this process for enabling or disabling Simple File Sharing has no effect Simple File Sharing always remains disabled for computers joined to domains Configuring firewall and DCOM settings with SecurityCnfg The SecurityCnfg utility assists you in configuring firewall and DCOM settings on your computer We recommend that you configure your FCWnx system with the Windows firewall ON In order for your system to perform successfully the following firewall and DCOM ports must be configured for server and client communication across your network For machines running Windows XP or Windows 2003 you must be logged in with local administrator rights to run the SecurityCnfg Utility If not log off and log back on as a user with these permissions For machines running Windows Vista or Windows 2008 you must be logged in as the local administrator to run the SecurityCnfg Utility If not log off and log back on as t
367. k the Web site periodically for timely information on all GE Security products qs 25 qs 26 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual How to accomplish operator tasks Table 3 Operator tasks Task Description Arm Disarm e Area Refer to Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones on page 237 1 Click the Policies Places group 2 Click the Access Right icon 3 Assign the Area to this access right 4 Swipe the credential at any of the credential keypad readers within an area or 1 Click the Manual Control icon 2 Click the Areas and Zones tab and click Arm or Disarm e Intrusion zone Refer to Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones on page 255 1 Click the Policies amp Places group 2 Click the Access Right icon 3 Assign the intrusion zone to this access right 4 To Arm 1 followed by a valid credential read To Disarm 0 followed by a valid credential read or Click the Manual Control icon Click the Area and Zones tab and click Arm or Disarm View video console Refer to Chapter 5 Video on page 213 1 Click the Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click the Video Console icon Note If an alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays in the Alarm Monitor and you can access Video Console by clicking onit 3 Capabilities include e Live video can be sent to multiple video consoles e Video Console can be automatically launched with live and recorded video when an alarm
368. kstation to this SCIF area Note Devices assigned here must be assigned to the facility created for the SCIF area e Assign readers e Assign alarms e Assign DOs When an area is designated as a SCIF area and assigned to a SCIF workstation this workstation is able to control functionality for the SCIF area Monitoring and control can be made at that SCIF workstation only Modifications to the SCIF area configuration such as unassigning the area as SCIF or unassigning the area to the SCIF workstation can be made on a non SCIF client only if the operator has SCIF facility permissions 6 Assign Access Rights Persons and Credentials Note Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be configured monitored or controlled through an API connection unless you are at the SCIF workstation services Windows uses special programs called services A service is a process that can start automatically when the system boots and remains running as a background process independently of anyone being logged in It runs regardless of whether anyone is logged into Windows or FCWnx In other words the computer must be turned on but no one needs to be logged in SQL Server 2005 2008 must be running for network clients to connect and share the SQL database FCWnx Diagnostics handles all diagnostics on all computers FCWnx System Manager manages communication between computers and licensing This service also starts the
369. l 375 Diagnostic Settings i5i04 scene eta Mads same E E ENE E bias EA E eewe ee baeaainaaexens 376 Settings LEDs a iii 376 When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object ooooooooococoommcrrrroorr roo 378 Diagnostic Viewer program ici A a A esas 380 MENUS ar oralidad aa 381 A E O AN 383 Help SYsteMinivveds ciawetiaewndas e E EEEE EN T EE E aaue Tee eas Hewat HEROES 384 OID same guigaciat O 384 User Mantal seeni tiene aoe vid bea dd bi 385 ADOUTTH AP PIIERON cec ss ccaunse nanan ad AAA A AAA eens 385 Questions and answers ccc ccc cc cece eee ee cette ee ee eee ence eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 385 A scents Aina bes sadguesiwameddhediodelaadeetaaedeas menue eeodaeeans E 385 DOCUMENLOUOMN cca rsa eaaa E ved ah i ebeuddaddaguwadua de EA needed ebay aden 386 Global configurati cia did d 386 NEW AA ANS 388 PP AO 390 Ri adas 391 SU a dd A A aaa 391 Setup RAID SV ti al 393 SOI ias a e 396 Terminal serViCe Sneen eaii ea e SA EE EARRA E EOR 398 User GUESLIONS e Ie 398 Vde Oeria a e AEE ES EAA E E E A E A A A AR 400 CUSTOMER SUPDON sissen tsr Tra EEE A ARAE VERTENE Da 400 COMPANIONS sandra ETE US 401 OVCIVIEW caro aii aia da A iS RG 402 UL Certifica A A AAA ARA ESA 402 AAN EIA AAA CARS 405 x Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual xi Preface Welcome to Facility Commander Wnx This document provides an overview of the Facility Commander Wnx product and detailed instructions for configuration and administrati
370. l Design application and photo which is taken care of based on the terminal service login printing a credential is permitted User questions Question My Diagnostics component services have started Why doesn t System Manager and Manager services start If you have just restored a database or re created a database you need to relicense and restart your system in order to start the application Question How do I put a reader online From the Application Group pane select Access and then select Reader From the right side of the screen select the reader you want to set online and check the Online and Active options Question How do I get into the Credential Design program 1 The client you are using must have a license for Imaging Select Monitors amp Controls and then Client Monitor The bottom section of the Client Monitor form contains the section Imaging Information You may need to make the window larger to display the number of Imaging licenses presently in use and number of Imaging licenses you are allowed as purchased with your system Locate the name of your computer in the Client list Then look in the column Imaging status and verify that it reads Enabled 2 If Imaging status reads Disabled and the numbers indicate a license is available for use go to the Administration menu and select Client On the Client form Client tab select Enabled in Imaging Status to enable Imaging Return to the Client Monitor form to
371. l allow access to this area for the selected time schedule Time schedule If you selected Allow access by schedule this field is now available to select a time schedule from the drop down list of previously created time schedules How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 160 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 278 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Photo tab The Photo tab lets you capture images assign credential design layouts and print credentials Figure 123 Photo tab e Last Name Facility v Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Area Control Photo Credential Taken Credential design Signature a lt gt Table 162 Form fields Element Description Photo If there is a photo associated with this person record it displays here Taken Date this photo was captured Capture Image Signature Click to run the Capture program allowing you to capture an image or signature of this person Refer to Image capture on page 280 Credential Displays the Descriptions of credentials assigned to this person as assigned on the Credential form If a printer is configured for your system you can select a credential to print Credential Design Displays the name of the current credential design Click the drop down list to select a different credential design Print If there is a printer co
372. l does not have to be a card it could be a unique number that is entered into a keypad reader Table 166 Form fields Element Description Search Click Search to display a list of previously created credential records to review or modify It is possible to change the status of all credentials for the same person using the mass update feature All records for a selected person can be assigned the identical status Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preferences form displays in red font in the list box on the right Description Enter a unique description of the credential person name or credential type This is a required field and this record does not save without an entry in this dialog box If you attempt to save a record without a description a dialog box displays asking if you want to use the credential identification number as the Description Click Yes to use the credential identification number or return to the form and enter a Description of your choice If you are entering credential records before person assignment consider entering a credential identification number as the Description This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Note If this is a converted database from an earlier version of this software that allowed blank Description fields the credential identification number now displays in the Description field of those records Fa
373. l input from the drop down list A digital input displays in this list only if it has been assigned a Type of Arm Disarm on the Digital Input tab Digital Input form Active Inactive e No Action no action is taken e Arm the area is armed e Disarm the area is disarmed e Force Arm the area is unconditionally armed This means that even if there is an active alarm in the area bypass that alarm and arm the area How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 139 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Reader tab Use the Reader tab to assign readers associated with this area record e Only available reader types of Normal anti passback APB and Elevator type readers are displayed and available for assignment e A reader can be assigned to only two areas one entering area and one exiting area or one area for neutral If the area is to be configured as APB the exiting area reader associated with this area must also be configured for APB Select APB as the logical type on the Reader form Reader tab for this reader Figure 105 Reader tab Chapter 6 243 Areas and intrusion zones eS Description Facility Area Reader Alarm Digital Output Entering Area Readers Exiting rea Readers Neutral Area Readers Table 140 Form fields A y ss Casson v amp Element Description Entering Area Readers Click Assign
374. lable for ACU controller systems only Use the Areas tab to select specific areas that form the basis of information for this report This windowpane displays the list of areas that currently apply to this report If there are no areas listed click Edit to display an Area Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and add areas Chapter 10 367 Reports External Reports The External Reports option opens the FCWNX Crystal Reports folder from which either the Reader Where When Report or the Who Has Access Report can be selected Reader Where When Report The Reader Where When report contains information on selected readers and their associated access rights and time schedules To generate the Reader Where When report 1 2 3 From the Reports menu select External From the Open dialog box double click on the FCWnx Crystal Reports folder to open it Select the Reader Where When report file and then click Open The Enter Values window opens Note Ifthe Cancel button is clicked in the Enter Values window of either the Reader Where When Report or Who Has Access Report then a message titled print error will display stating Error in file lt ServerName gt Externals FCWnx Crystal Reports lt Selected Report name gt Request cancelled by user Click the OK button to close this message Select the readers you would like to include in the report and then click OK The Preview Report window opens showing each selected rea
375. larm Monitor Alarm Short Cut Reset If selected this alarm when triggered displays all alarm conditions available to this alarm on the Alarm Monitor form You have the option to schedule alarm monitoring on the Schedule tab of this form If this option is not selected but a schedule is in place the schedule monitors alarms only for the time that monitoring is on Although the option to monitor is displayed for the 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 low battery alarm an alarm is not generated for Cut and Short e An operator can see alarms on the Alarm Monitor form only for facilities that are currently active and assigned to the current operator e The option to monitor an alarm must be selected on the Alarm form in order for a specific alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form e Alarms do not display on the Alarm Monitor form if the selection to monitor an alarm is removed even though Alarm Routing and Bumping may be configured Always monitor Short Cut Reset Note For ACU controllers this is only enabled for Supervised Exit If selected this alarm always displays Cut Short and Reset conditions of alarms on the Alarm Monitor form Select this option if a schedule prevents monitoring an alarm reset condition during certain periods of the day but you still want Short Cut and Reset to be monitored and displayed Although the option to monitor is displayed for the 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 low battery alarm an alarm is not
376. larm form Alarms amp Events group is used to modify an alarm record An alarm is a notification that something has happened within this application An alarm occurs when a defined device such as a digital input changes to a state defined as the alarm state For example if a digital input alarm state is defined as Open in the Active State then an alarm occurs when the state changes to Open Alarms can also be used for noncontroller related events such as CCTV alarms Most alarms are tied to digital output points associated with devices such as switches and motion detectors Note Not all alarms are present at the same time and are determined by the modules installed in the controller When you set up your controller some alarms are automatically set up for you However alarms for digital inputs must be set up manually using the Digital Input form Use the Alarm form to modify an alarm record With the exception of external alarms you cannot delete alarm records Alarms are managed by the owner of the alarm record The alarm owner can be an API module CCTV Interface digital input camera DVMR controller or reader For an alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form you can either select the Monitor field on the Alarm form or schedule the alarm to be monitored When set to be monitored the alarm displays and changes to an alarm condition NG Fora shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse
377. larm sound field is set for the results you anticipate either Continuous or Short Define alarm groups Note For Micro controller systems only Use the Alarm Group form Alarms amp Events menu to assign events or schedules to alarm groups Alarm groups provide two things First they provide a convenient way of scheduling many alarms at once Second they provide a means of disabling monitoring in many alarms from a keypad reader Refer to Door Functions tab on page 129 for additional information When a controller record is created 16 alarm groups are also created You cannot delete an alarm group record Alarm groups are owned by the associated controller record 180 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 97 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters The description of the alarm group should be unique When the records are created the default description includes the controller to which this alarm group is associated and the number of the alarm group for example 0001 Group 1 which represents alarm group one on controller one All alarms are automatically assigned alarm group 0 To change this description enter over the existing text and s
378. lays default values filled in for Head of line and Credential Loading Complete the following Enter the address of the controller e Enter the type of controller e If this controller is the first controller on a string of controllers select Yes in Head of line Otherwise select No and select the head of line controller If this is a downstream controller that 96 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual you are adding the controller directly upstream towards the host from it may need to be reset in order for it to recognize the controller you are adding Example If your line of controllers looks like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 And you want to add Controller 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Then you would need to reset Controller 2 in order for Controller 3 to be recognized e For connection type select Direct e Set Host keep alive time interval e Enter the PC name of the host computer or navigate and select e Select a method For Micro controller systems only On the Security tab if you do not enter passwords the default passwords one 1 two 2 three 3 and four 4 are used If you want to change the passwords you can do so at any time On the Time Zone tab a default time zone is filled in Verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary On the Comments tab enter any special consideration or reminder for this configu
379. lbar to navigate back and forth through the pages of the currently displayed document Click to go back to the previous view Click to go to the next view Use this toolbar to resize the page view You can use the zoom tool use the page fit icons QL els zoom out incrementally set a of zoom or zoom in incrementally xii Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Related documentation For more information about Editions of this software and associated hardware refer to the following documentation e Facility Commander Wnx Installation Manual Professional Enterprise or Global Edition e Facility Commander Wnx Database Triggers e Credential Designer User Manual e Graphics Monitoring and Control User Manual e Installing Facility Commander Wnx in a Clustered Environment e Facility Commander Wnx with VisioWave Setup Guide e ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide e M5 Installation Manual e M5 Quick Installation e Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Installation Guide e Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Microcontroller Quick Installation Instructions e M3000 Installation Manual e M3000 Quick Installation e DirecDoor Installation Manual e Diamond ll Installation Manual These documents and others can be found on the documentation disc included with this product in portable document format PDF The CD is included in the media kit shipped with your system You must have Adobe Acrobat Reader instal
380. ld is useful if using noisy or chattering contact interference in which you receive false exit requests ACU only Select the Termination Type from the drop down list This wiring termination describes the type of end of line resistor used on this ACU controller hardware The default selection is Dipswitch For additional information refer to the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide 103 104 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 50 Form fields continued Element Description Keypad PIN ACU only Note For Micro controllers this feature can be configured on the Reader form Max Invalid PIN Count 1 Select this check box if you want your FCWnx system to suspend credentials after an invalid PIN is entered and a credential is presented at a reader a configured number of times 2 Then enter a number between 1 and 9 as the number of times an invalid PIN code is entered at a system reader before the credential is suspended The default of this field is 3 3 If suspended the credential must be changed to active by a system administrator Keypad Extended Unlock Micro PXN Plus and DirecDoor only Select the check box and choose a keypad Pre alarm command code 10 to 99 To use this feature 1 Enter the keypad command code two digit number from 10 to 99 2 Enter the extended unlock time two digit number from 02 to 99 This is the amount of time in minutes that the door will be unl
381. le floors Digital Output Select a digital output from the drop down list of available DOs e Digital Input Select a digital input from the drop down list of available Dis e Area This control is available only if the selected reader is owned by an ACU controller Select an area from the drop down list of available areas Click OK to accept your selections and close this form Remove To remove a floor digital output digital input select an entry from the list and click this button How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 111 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Elevator control sample scenarios Two Options with Floor Tracking by keypad Option 1 Install a keypad reader in the elevator cab A user presents their badge at the reader The floor number is entered on the keypad to go to that floor Option 2 Assign input buttons associated with each floor to a 20 DI board in the Micro to do floor tracking by input Note Neither of these options requires any additional readers outside the elevator cab When you push the elevator call button the elevator is called and the door opens but does not go to any floor until a valid badge is presented to the reader in the cab and a valid floor is selected Without Floor Tracking Install a keypad reader in the elevator cab A user presents their badge at the reader Presenting a valid badge inside the elevator cab activates the buttons for all f
382. lected in the right windowpane Figure 128 User Fields tab amp Credential e Description Facility Credential Definition Credential Status User Fields Modify Field User fields Label Value Credential User Field 1 Credential User Field 2 Credential User Field 3 Credential User Field 4 Credential User Field 5 Credential User Field 6 Credential User Field 7 Credential User Field 8 Credential User Field 9 Credential User Field 10 Credential User Field 11 Credential User Field 12 Credential User Field 13 Credential User Field 14 Credential User Field 15 Credential User Field 16 Credential User Field 17 Credential User Field 18 Credential User Field 19 Credential User Field 20 Table 169 Form fields Element Description Modify Field To give value to one of the fields select a Label in the User Fields windowpane Enter the value that you want to display corresponding to this label This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric characters User Field The existing list of labels and their values is listed in the User Fields windowpane The selected label in the User Field windowpane is the label to which you are assigning a value How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 169 and complete the fields on this tab Example The Credential User Field 1 was previously defined and labeled on the Preferences form as Condition of Credential The first label listed here in the User Fi
383. led on your computer to view PDF documents For your convenience a copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader software is included on the CD Quick Setup guide id This section walks you through the basic steps needed to configure your system It should be used in conjunction with the other chapters of this document or the Help if additional and specific information is required Not all forms are described here How to prepare for your configuration Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running This includes controllers readers modems printers and network lines Refer to your installation manual documentation provided with your equipment from GE or follow specific installation instructions for your brand of hardware How to configure a system in recommended sequential order on page qs 2 Define preferences on page qs 2 Define facilities on page qs 2 Define clients on page qs 3 Define permissions on page qs 3 Define operators on page qs 3 Define schedules on page qs 4 Configure devices on page qs 7 Create on page qs 15 areas intrusion zones access rights person records credential records Back up your system on page qs 19 Professional and Enterprise systems and database backups How to accomplish frequently performed tasks aped These tasks can be accessed by the icons on the Application toolbar amp Create Persons on page qs 18 E Monitor Activities on page
384. ler is the Head of Line in a string of controllers e Select Yes if you are configuring the first controller connected to the host e If you select No you must also select a head of line controller from the drop down list A MicroPXNPlus or MicroPXNPlus2000 must be a head of line Micro to take advantage of the Integrated Configuration Tool for flashing the firmware If this is a new controller the network settings are set as the default Open a browser window such as IE enter the controller IP address such as http 192 168 6 6 and click Go Firmware download begins If a MicroPXNPlus or MicroPXNPlus2000 is downstream you have two options e You can use eFlash to download firmware e Consider obtaining a network connection and using the Integrated Configuration Tool to individually download firmware to a Micro controller ACU Controllers Refer to Multi drop configuration ACU Controllers on page 99 for additional configuration details Connection Type You must select a controller type before this field becomes available An error message displays if the selected connection type is not valid with the controller type Select e Dial up if this controller is connected by a modem e Direct if a cable connects this controller e Network if this is a network controller connected by a network e Network Dial up if this is a network controller and has a backup dial up option When the network connection is not available the host attempt
385. lick Alarms to select the appropriate digital input Enter the Event tag Click Search The Results display with number of matches found start date and time end date and time and type Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console Chapter 5 233 Video How to search by video event When investigating alarm events investigators or other operators may need to retrieve previously recorded video clips Use the DVR Event Search tab to locate video clips stored on the DVR device To search for previously recorded video 1 2 From the File menu select Video Search The Video Search window displays Select the DVR Event Search tab The search criteria includes recorder camera start and end dates and times and search type Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR Use the Cameras drop down list to select the appropriate camera Use the Start Date and End Date fields to enter the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK Use the Start Time and End Time fields to narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm
386. ll back to the controller providing additional validation that the correct host to controller communication has taken place Chapter 4 121 Devices How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 59 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Controller flash and controller preference configuration This dialog box displays only if the controller is online There are three options 1 View edit preference info Micro only Controller Preference Direct Dialup This option is available for selection of a single controller When selected the Controller Preference Configuration screen displays and the configuration for the controller is retrieved allowing you to edit or change an existing setup such as controller address IP address change or phone number changes Once saved the controller resets and the new changes take effect Note If you change preference block data through this application any Universal Credential Format UBF data is erased Example If an M5 PXN was originally configured as a direct serial controller during installation but is now a network controller select the updated controller type and complete the network information Click OK The controller accepts the changes resets and then changes the host information for this controller The Controller Preference Direct Dialup tab lets you change the connection type of the controller and its Address Idle Time and DI res tolerance
387. ller on which this digital output group is located This field becomes read only after the record is saved This is a required field Digital Outputs This windowpane displays the digital outputs assigned to this group 162 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 83 Form fields Element Description Assign Digital Outputs Click this button to display the Digital Output Assignment dialog box This dialog box lets you select and assign digital outputs you want associated with the selected record Only digital outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available digital output e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a digital output Click OK to display results in the Digital Outputs windowpane How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 83 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Schedule tab Note The Schedule tab is available for Micro controller systems only Use the Schedule tab to define schedules for turning all digital outputs in a selected digital output group ON or OFF Figure 63 Schedule tab Digital Output Group eS Description Facility i Group Schedule DO control Time schedule A 4 O Dn Oot Table 84 Form fields Description DO control Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the
388. lly checking the Event Viewer helps detect drive failures What can I do now The specifics of your error and warning messages can be determined by consulting the manufacturer s documentation or Customer Support for your brand of hardware The steps that follow are intended to be a guide in the recovery of a Dell PowerEdge system with a PERC 3 SI RAID 1 controller in the event of a system failure For specific details refer to the documentation shipped with your Dell PowerEdge system Continue with the following RAID disclaimer on page 393 RAID recovery what you need on page 394 Replacing a RAID failed hard drive on page 394 Installing OpenManage Server Assistant on page 394 Installing the operating system on page 395 Installing Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager on page 395 Installing MS SOL Server 2005 2008 on the RAID server on page 396 RAID disclaimer GE recommends that installations that implement RAID server configurations use RAID 1 configurations RAID 5 configurations are not recommended for the database due to possible transaction load issues RAID 1 configurations provide 100 data redundancy by disk mirroring Some customers may implement a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 5 configurations supported on one server This can be a valid configuration if the operating system and miscellaneous files are isolated on a RAID 5 configuration while the database resides on a RAID 1 mirrored disk drive configuration Not
389. local to this ACU controller Arm Disarm Delay provides a delay for using this reader to arm disarm an area Entry with Delay provides a delay for using this reader to gain access into the area The timer is activated when access is granted by the reader Exit with Delay Provides a delay for using this reader to leave the area The area is armed when the door closes rather than waiting for the timer to expire Comments Use this field to enter a location description or special considerations for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 68 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 143 144 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Define digital inputs Use the Digital Input form Security Devices group to modify a digital input record Digital inputs are physical sensing devices such as door sensors or motion sensors used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a controller When a controller record is created digital input records are also created Refer to DI module record creation on page 94 You cannot delete digital input records from the Digital Input form The digital inputs are managed by the associated controller record The number of digital inputs is based on the controller you set up and modules that the controller contains The alarms for digital inp
390. logies DVXi 3 1 DVXe 4 0 4 1 DS Xpress 2 1 American Dynamics Intellex DVMS8000 3 1 Nice Pro Harmony 8 0 Digital Watchdog DWPro 9016 2 3 Pelco DX8000 1 0 Panasonic HD500A 2 5 Note Increasing the processor speed and memory on the server and or client workstations may be required for optimizing performance in your specific application The DVR form Security Devices group lets you configure integrated digital video surveillance within this application This option provides event driven video recording allowing you to access and control live and recorded video and initiate camera control at any workstation within this application system e Enterprise Edition supports up to 256 licensed DVR connections e Professional Edition supports up to 16 licensed DVR connections The following order is recommended for configuration of a DVR system for this application 1 Setup operators and permissions 2 Configure the DVR Refer to the manuals received with your DVR for hardware setup and installation specifics 3 Configure DVR devices DVR devices can be hosted on the server computer for this application and or client workstations The actual number of DVR devices hosted on each server computer may vary Distributing DVR hosting across multiple computers may be required for optimizing system performance in your specific application 4 Create preset records 5 Configure cameras 6 Set up event triggers 7 Optional Set up
391. loors to which the person has access The user selects a floor from the elevator buttons Note A keypad reader is not required No readers are required on each floor A DI board in the Micro is not required 201 202 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual What s next Continue with Chapter 5 Video on page 203 if appropriate for your system Chapter 5 Video This chapter provides instructions for configuration of video options associated with video surveillance In this chapter A oi a Cita bik RR eke eae 5 204 Define digital video recorders 0 60 ccc eens 204 PISSING camer PE a Laas cla o Laces 4 214 Deine CORTS oe A 215 Define event HIGREIS cosa ca a a eae 218 Vdeo CD BUNGE lia ta ii da il da 226 POVIGATING Video Consol ot dei di A lia 228 a A AAA chouninsteecie chee weed ox 232 ARE A A nha Ne Bate Wea 234 o yoy hs Sac bee hr bs eee eed dol eee eed 236 204 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Video driver installation After installation of the video adapter card Windows automatically detects the new video card on power up Follow the installation instructions received with your video driver software then reboot your computer For VisioWave specific installation and configuration requirements refer to the FCWnx with VisioWave Setup Guide provided on the Documentation CD Define digital video recorders Digital video surveillance is integrated into the system for this application a
392. ls using this return date range Select this field if you do want to use the return date as a method of filtering the report information If this is selected you must select a starting and ending date Starting date Click the start date you want for the starting range of credential return dates Ending date Click the ending date you want for the ending range of credential return dates 366 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Guard Tour tab Guard Tour History report Click Edit to display the Guard Tour Assignment Dialog Box enabling you to assign guard tours for which this report generates The assigned guard tours display in the open window pane of this tab Readers tab Roll Call report Use the Readers tab to select specific readers that form the basis of information for this report This windowpane displays the list of readers that currently apply to this report If there are no readers listed click Edit to display a Reader Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and add readers Access report Note The Readers tab is enabled for Micro controller systems only Use the Readers tab to select specific readers that form the basis of information for this report This windowpane displays the list of readers that currently apply to this report If there are no readers listed click Edit to display a Reader Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and add readers Areas tab Access report Note The Areas tab is avai
393. lt blank gt Space Micro Wiegand B Credential identification BID bit F Facility Site Code P Parity 0 or 1 Constant Characters E Parity Layout Even O Parity Layout Odd X Space ACU Magnetic Strip N Credential identification BID bit C Company Code S Site Code Issue Code X Space ACU Wiegand B Credential identification BID bit C Company Code S Site Code Issue Code P Parity Layout X Space The following settings apply to Micro Wiegand Format only These fields are not available for ACU Wiegand controllers Parity checking is an error detection technique that tests the integrity of digital data within the computer system or over a network Parity checking uses an extra bit that holds a 0 or 1 depending on the data content of the byte Each time a byte is transferred or transmitted the parity bit is tested Even parity systems make the parity bit 1 when there is an even number of 1 bits in the byte Odd parity systems make it 1 when there is an odd number of 1 bits Parity layout 1 E O Indicates the first parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even 0 or Odd 1 parity bit Chapter 7 301 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 174 Form fields continued Element Description Parity layout 2 E O Indicates the second parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even 0 or Odd 1 parity bit
394. ltiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available readers not already assigned to a zone Readers must be active and non elevator type e A zone can be configured to contain the following An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Alarm Points only and no Readers An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Readers only and no Alarm Points Alarm Points and Readers only with no Arm Disarm Intrusion Point Readers only Note An arm disarm DO can be assigned for any of these A Status tab provides the ability to request status of the zone and each of its associated points as follows Chapter 6 251 Areas and intrusion zones e Zone armed or disarmed e Arm Disarm intrusion DI active inactive trouble e Readers online or offline e Alarm points monitored off monitored on B Complete the Access Right form Intrusion Zone tab The Intrusion Zone tab of the Access Right form lets you assign multiple intrusion zones using an assignment dialog e Only credential holders with an intrusion zone assigned on the Access Right form are able to arm and disarm zones using any of the credential keypad readers within a zone e When a zone is armed all readers within the zone go offline and normal access rights do not gain access into the area e When a zone is disarmed all readers within the zone go online and normal access rights gain access into the area If schedules were assigned then the reader follo
395. message states There is already a local server use the following sequence sp_dropserver lt old server name gt go sp_addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL go Stop and restart SQL Server Question Event Log contains the following error message What can I do The File Replication Service is having trouble enabling replication from lt remoteservername gt for lt directory gt using the DNS name lt remoteservername gt FRS will keep retrying Following are some of the reasons you would see this warning 1 FRS cannot correctly resolve the DNS name lt remoteservername gt from this computer 2 FRS is not running on lt remoteservername gt 3 The topology information in the Active Directory for this replica has not yet replicated to all the Domain Controllers This event log message will appear once per connection After the problem is fixed you will see another Event Log message indicating that the connection has been established Solution 1 System times may not by synchronized To resolve synchronize with the domain controller clock time a Run the following command on all computers to synchronize the clock time with the domain controller Net time domain controller name set y b Stop and then restart the File Replication Service on all servers that are experiencing the problem c Open Event Viewer to make sure that the errors are not longer occurring Solution 2 The domain name for the server may not be r
396. mon area without readers between With multiple exiting areas the readers exiting the common area could list all of the additional areas Thus a credential holder who was exiting the common area could be registered as IN any of the other areas and still be granted exit Note When configuring readers for multiple exiting areas careful planning is needed to maintain security and avoid unnecessary APB violations e Assign ACU only Click to display a list of areas that are available to be assigned as an alternative or additional exit when leaving the area that you entered Only areas in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator Keypad Options Max Invalid PIN Count Micro only Note For ACU controllers this feature can be configured on the Controller form 1 Select this check box if you want your system to suspend credentials after an invalid PIN is entered and a credential is presented at a reader a configured number of times 2 Then enter a number between 1 and 6 as the number of times an invalid PIN code is entered at a system reader before the credential is suspended The default of this field is 3 3 If suspended the credential must be changed to active by a system administrator Note Ifthe Preferences form is set to grant access on duress access is granted and the credential transaction displays as Valid Duress If the Preferences form is not set to grant access on duress the do
397. mpany Code on the credential and person record is correct for access to this reader 1 Review the guidelines in Table 66 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Select the Status tab to view information about the reader as currently stored in the controller s database This is a read only windowpane in two column format as follows Figure 50 Status tab El Reader e peano Facility v Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Extended Control Last status date Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete 140 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 67 Form fields Element Description Display windowpane Micro Controllers Physical Type Displays the actual reader type Normal Credential only Credential and PIN Required and Credential or Keypad Entry Logical Type Displays the reader type this reader is being used as Normal APB In anti passback In APB Out antipassback Out TSA In time attendance in T amp A Out time attendance out T amp A In Out In Required and Elevator Online Status Displays Online if the reader is currently online and Offline if the reader is currently offline Routing for Valid Transactions e History Whether valid transactio
398. mple 2 An employee is working in your facility as a temporary contract worker performing maintenance The credential is assigned a status of Active A custom credential definition Maintenance Contractor was created and assigned The transaction displays on the Activity Monitor as Maintenance Contractor Access is granted only for the duration of the contract Figure 130 Custom Credential Status form amp Credential Status DER Custom Credential Status Credential Status Custom Credential Status Select Credential Status Active Valid amp Valid Open Suspended Invalid Table 172 Form fields Element Description Custom Credential Status A display of previously created custom credential status definitions When you select a windowpane definition in the windowpane the selected definition displays in the Edit box The selected definition can be updated or deleted 298 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 172 Form fields continued Element Description Custom Credential Status Create or revise an existing custom credential status definition by entering text in this text box Following a revision click Update to complete the process Select Credential Status Active Valid Valid Open Select to assign an active status to this credential definition A Valid only status does not allow the door to open Suspended Invalid Select to assign a suspended status
399. mplete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 183 Devices Alarm Sense Time form The Alarm Sense Time form lets you add or edit the link between an event and an alarm sense time The event determines when and to what value the sense times for all alarms in the group are changed Figure 77 Alarm Sense Time Alarm Sense Time Event New time 0 Table 100 Form fields Element Description Event Note Select an event from the drop down list If there are no events listed you need to configure events using the Event Schedule form Note Event schedules can be created for Micro controllers only New time Select or enter a sense time The value is in seconds and indicates the delay before triggering an associated digital output or sending in as alarm for this application if the DI type is Alarm This number tells the system how many seconds to wait after sensing the input has changed to Active State Enter 00 to immediately send the transaction to the host notifying the host of a state change Increase the Sense Time entry if using noisy or chattering contacts How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 100 and complete this tab Example This value could indicate the delay time in seconds that elapses between the time a door contact is broken and the time the output and alarms are triggered If door contact is re established before the sense time elaps
400. mplete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save 3 Open the Diagnostic Setting form from the Diagnostics group You want to select this LogFile name from the list of files displayed and assign components for monitoring 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Diagnostic settings Use the Diagnostic Setting form Diagnostics group to select items to monitor using the Diagnostic Viewer program Note Use the Diagnostic Setting form with care The more items you turn on for monitoring the more your system performance is affected This is even more important when monitoring port communications or controller items Description Select a diagnostic object name from the list box in the right windowpane The selected component displays in the Description field as a read only entry Settings tab Use the Settings tab to enable the diagnostic settings Appendix A 377 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Figure 150 Settings tab Diagnostic Setting e Description Settings Y Enable debug messages Logfiles LogFile Computer C Program Files GEFCWns logs FCW ns spl Table 204 Form fields Element Description Enable debug messages Select this box to enable monitoring for the selected diagnostic object Logfiles Default and newly created logfile names display in the Logfiles windowpane Select a file name from the list of files displayed to which you are assigning this component for monitoring By assi
401. ms Time schedules assigned to a Public Access area on the Elevator form cannot be deleted Table 37 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters Enter a meaningful and unique description for this schedule Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Chapter 3 71 Schedules Time Schedules tab Note Deleting a schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is associated Any devices currently in a state associated with the deleted time schedule remains in that state until changed manually or by another schedule For ACU controller systems The digital outputs are reset when the time schedules are deleted Figure 20 Time Schedules tab y pi H 1 4 H 1 4 4 4 1 4 Table 38 Form fields Element Description TimeChart In line with the appropriate day of the week click the desired start time continue to hold the mouse button and drag the bar to the right until you reach the preferred stop time This creates a bar that indicates one interval of time during this time schedule Continue to create intervals on the time chart for appropriate days of the week associated with this time schedule Note The time 00 00 is the same as 24 00 of the same day For example Saturday at 00 00
402. ms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation do not display and cannot be controlled through an API connection unless you are at the SCIF workstation e Not Applicable Select this workstation type for CCTV interfaces During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Administration Save How to 1 2 3 4 Click to save this record Review Table 33 and click Search to display all existing permission records in the list box on the right Select one of the permissions Expand the Forms navigation tree to display the FCWnx forms Select a form and select one of the Actions to associate with the form and the permission you are creating Click Save Notice that the icon has changed to the associated action granted to this permission Example If you want an operator to monitor alarm and credential activity select the Operation forms and then set the following Select Activity Monitor and then select Read Select Alarm Monitor and then select the action Read Select Manual Control and then select Update Selecting Update for Manual Control allows the operator to manually change the DO state Select Digital Output Status and then select Read On the Personnel form assign actions to allow the new permission to add persons and credentials into the database 1 Select Person and then select Update 2 Select Credential and then select Updat
403. mware file MicroPXNPlus and MicroPXNPlus2000 The form opens with the latest efl network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file DirecDoor The form opens with the latest ef1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file ACUXL and ACURS The form opens with the latest s19 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file ACUXLPlus The form opens with the latest ef1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file Browse Click to navigate to another media source or directory where firmware files reside Override Block Checking Ignore this check box This selection is for Customer Support use only Secure Perfect Version 4 XX and later Micro firmware is able to communicate with this application host and continue to send alarm and credential transactions Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation without loss of data time constraints during the controller migration process or lockdowns during the database upgrade process However in order to take advantage of the new features that are dependant on the firmware the ultimate goal is to bring all controllers to current level as soon as possible following the database upgrade Chapter 9 335 Monitor and control Digital input status
404. n Selection of this option launches the User Manual for this application Help Menu Select About to display a license summary window that lists the following e Application Version of software installed on your computer e Service Pack if any e Copyright information e Detailed list of licensing features e Deployment preferences of this application on your system e List of supported DVRs enabled only if applicable to your system e Address and phone number of GE Security Status Bar The Status Bar is a toggle election on the View menu and determines whether or not this toolbar is visible across the bottom of the FCWnx screen The Status Bar indicates the current operator communication port status and whether there are unacknowledged alarms It may look similar to the following secure Controller Coms On lUnacknowledged Alarms o secure Displays the currently logged user ID that by default is secure Communication Port Status Displays the current state by the following phrases and colors e Controller Coms On Green All controllers for the operator s facility are online e Controller Coms Off Blue All controllers for the operator s facility are offline e Controller Coms Error Yellow Some controllers for the operator s facility are in error state Unacknowledged Alarms Displays the current state by color e Red There are unacknowledged alarms displaying on the Alarm Monitor form e
405. n Sec 152 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 74 Form fields Element Description Sense Time This windowpane displays which events change the sense time You can also assign events and sense times to this digital input Edit This button is available only if there are currently assigned sense time events Click this button to display the Edit Sense Time dialog box From here you can assign an event and sense time or modify the existing sense time assignment e Event Select an event from the drop down list If there are no events listed you need to configure events using the Event Schedule form Note Event schedules can be created for Micro controllers only New time Select or enter a sense time The value is in seconds and indicates the delay before triggering an associated digital output or sending in an alarm if the DI type is Alarm This number tells the system how many seconds to wait after sensing the input has changed to Active State Enter 00 to immediately send the transaction to the host notifying the host of a state change Increase the Sense Time entry if using noisy or chattering contacts Example This value could indicate the delay time in seconds that elapses between the time a door contact is broken and the time the output and alarm are triggered If door contact is closed before the sense time elapses the alarm would not come in to this application and the output would not activate Add To a
406. n a reader to this event trigger Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Transactions Select any or all of the options as types of reader transactions to trigger an event e Valid e Invalid e Unknown e Lost For additional information regarding reader transactions refer to Activity monitoring on page 312 Chapter 5 221 Video Table 125 Form fields continued Element Description Tag Selection Select one of the Tag options None No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video or manipulating record rate Tag only A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video at the cameras current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the cameras record rate to its event record rate settings How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 125 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarms tab The Alarms tab lets you select alarms and alarm transaction types that become the source for this event trigger Figure 98 Alarms tab W Video Event Trigger e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Areas a Assigned Alarms is 0018 0 01 Tamper Alarm C Res
407. n can be designated 2 This form lets you create a list of frequently used predefined responses to an alarm and reduces the need to type an entry The response entries that you create display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Complete the field on this tab Examples Police are on their way Maintenance is cleaning up 3 Click Save between each entry and before you exit o Alarms amp Events Alarm Refer to Chapter 4 Devices on page 165 1 When you set up your controller some alarms are automatically set up for you The Alarm form is used to modify an alarm record However alarms for digital inputs must be set up manually using the Digital Input form 2 When the records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmmm bb pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this alarm is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each alarm displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form With the exception of external alarms you cannot delete alarm records Alarms are managed by the owner of the alarm record The alarm owner can be an API module CCTV Interface d
408. n on guard tours defined in the system Micro only e Host Preference provides a listing of information from the Preferences form including database connection timeout database retry count e mail addresses e mails sent and duress e Instruction provides a listing of alarm messages defined in the system e Intrusion Zone provides a listing of intrusion zones defined in the system Micro only e Mode Event Trigger provides a listing of mode event triggers defined in the system e Operators provides a listing of operators and their permissions defined in the system e Permission provides a listing of permissions defined in the system e Response provides a listing of responses defined in the system e Schedules provides a listing of time and mode schedules defined on the system If this is a Device Configuration report the following options are available e Alarm provides a listing of alarms defined on the system and alarm specific information e Alarm API Connections provides a list of alarm details defined in the system received through an external interface 357 358 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Alarm Camera provides a list of camera alarm details defined in the system as well as the DVMRs that own them Alarm DVMR provides a list of DVMR alarms defined in the system Alarm Group provides a listing of alarm groups defined on the system and the controller that owns the groups Micro only Camera provi
409. n or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 140 and complete the reader fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarm tab Use the Alarm tab to assign alarms associated with this area record This is a multiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available alarm points not already assigned to another area The list box on the right displays alarms assigned to this area Four State Supervision rules apply regardless of the armed disarmed state of the area Figure 106 Alarm tab Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones eS Description Facility Area Reader Alarm Digital Output Alarms for Arm Disarm and SCIF Control Armed Area Monitoring Time Schedule O Never Monitor O Always Monitor O Monitor by Time Schedule Time Schedule Auto Arm Inactivity Timer min Arm Delay Timer sec Disarm Digital Output device number Keypad Arm Disarm O None O Local O Global Table 141 Form fields lt Element Description Control Alarms f
410. n the reader is constantly on Blink On Secure This setting causes the LED to blink when the secure area about to be entered is armed Blink On Unsecure This setting causes the LED to blink when the secure area being entered is disarmed 141 142 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 68 Form fields continued Element Description Reader Trace Instruction Select from a drop down list of available instructions in the system for this application that Message is an appropriate response to be associated with a trace on this reader If you need to create a new and appropriate instruction refer to the Alarms Events group Instruction form Access Mode Host Online Select a validation option available at this reader when the associated host is online with the controller Normal Access is granted when a valid credential is presented Company Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching company code e Site Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching site code Host Offline Select a validation option available at this reader when the associated host is offline from the controller Normal Access is granted when a valid credential is presented Company Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching company code e Site Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching site code e Secure This
411. n user level passwords to shares When Simple File Sharing is enabled on a computer remote users are not prompted for a password when accessing that computer s shares Note 2 If the Windows XP Professional computer is part of a Windows domain rather than a Windows workgroup this process for enabling or disabling Simple File Sharing has no effort Simple File Sharing always remains disabled for computers joined to domains Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description SCIF ACU only A group of rooms or buildings may be used for handling or processing classified information These areas are called Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facilities SCIF Control is limited to the SCIF client workstation assigned to the area Workstations within these areas must be configured with specific security clearance and permissions Recommended order for creating a SCIF area 1 You must define a facility on the Facility form specifically for dedicating the device configurations belonging to this SCIF area 2 On the Client form Client tab select Workstation Type as SCIF 3 On the Controller form configure the controller add to the SCIF facility if it is to be dedicated to SCIF functionality 4 If the controller is not SCIF dedicated configure the reader DI alarm and DO devices assigning each device to the SCIF facility 5 On the Area form e Assign the SCIF facility e Select Enable SCIF e Assign a wor
412. navigate through the months and years until the appropriate month displays Click the day on the calendar that this mode begins Time The time displays in the format 00 00 hours minutes Select and enter text over existing time Enter AM or PM Assigned Controllers Displays the currently assigned controllers for this record 82 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 46 Form fields continued Element Description Edit Click to display the Controller Assignment dialog that lets you add or change the controllers currently assigned You must select all controllers that this mode change effects Controller Assignment dialog This window displays when you click Edit allowing you to select and assign client group association for this form Only client groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client group Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client group Assigned Client Groups Click to display the currently assigned client groups for this record Edit Click to display the Client Group Assignment dialog box that lets you add or change the client group Controller and Client Group Modes e From Micro only Select the mode the system must be in for this schedule to occur e To Select the mode the system changes to when this schedule occurs Client Group Modes ACU only Note This field is
413. nd Guard Tour DI activity printing E Enable Printer E Enable Auto Shutdown AA TimeOut Select Printer Element Description PC Name Monitor form available for edit delete e When creating a new client record click Browse to display a Select Client window listing all computers found on your network by PC name FCWnx uses PC names only To add a client select the computer name from the list and click OK You can add as many clients as you want but you are limited to the number of licensed clients connected to the network at one time The number of client licenses presently active and connected to the FCWnx system can be found on the Client e By default when an existing client record displays PC Name is read only and not e Client computers to which devices are associated cannot be deleted The devices must be removed or assigned to another client before this client can be deleted e Client computers assigned as backup clients cannot be deleted You must first un assign this client from the Backup Clients list on the Backup Clients tab and then 51 52 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 27 Form fields continued Element Description OS Type This field is available only when you first open the Client form and before you initiate a Search To locate a particular client type you are able to select either WINDOWS or CCTV from the OS Type drop down list If yo
414. nd intrusion zones on page 238 Note The Area form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use this form to configure secure areas Your system supports up to 8 192 areas Complete the steps in the order presented 1 You must first configure ACU controllers Reader records are automatically created when you configure an ACU controller The controllers must be connected and online to arm disarm if the area spans controllers An area can contain alarm points entry and exit points readers and digital outputs relays Areas can be local does not span controllers or global spans controllers 2 Create areas The intended application is suited for arming and disarming secure areas from outside or inside of the monitored and secured areas Click the add icon Bo begin a new record 3 Assign devices to an area in order to use the device functionality The defined secure areas have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access control by using a credential and keypad reader or manual control 4 The Area form provides the ability to define areas for each controller that consists of the following e Keypad disarm and arm e Timeschedules e SCIF sensitive compartmentalized information facility Workstations ACU only e Readers e Alarms e APB anti passback e Digital inputs assigned only for utilizing the arm disarm function and SCIF control e Digital outputs assigned only for
415. nd requires its own hardware and software The system supports the following digital video multiplexer recorders Table 112 Form fields Element Model Description Version GE GE DVMRe 4CD Requires duplex PPC firmware Version 3 18 or GE DVMRe 10 CD later and MUX firmware Version 3 24 or later GE DVMRe 16 CD GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 4 Requires triplex firmware Version 5 x or later GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 10 CT StoreSafe and StoreSafe Pro series GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 16 recorders are part of the family of wavejet compression based technology products GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro Il 4 CT II and StoreSafe Pro II series recorders GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro Il 10 are part of the family of wavejet GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro II 16 compression based technology products GE Discovery 300 VOS Version 3 x GE Discovery 2400 These recorders are part of the family of VisioWave video products GE Discovery 1205 VOS Version 4 x GE Discovery 2405 These recorders are part of the family of GE Discovery 2415 VisioWave video products GE Evolution 2800 GE Evolution 2809 GE Evolution 3005 SymDec 16 1 47k SymSafe 1 28 SymSafe Pro 1 28 SymNet 1 2 001 Legend IP 3 6 These recorders are part of the family of SymSuite video products Chapter 5 205 Video Table 112 Form fields continued Element Model Description Version Integral Techno
416. nection Click to display items in the Administration group The following selections display in the Administration group pane e Preferences e Client e Client Group e Operator e Permission e Transaction Override e Region Auto update see auto update e Video CD Burner Diagnostics Click to display items in the Diagnostics group The following items display in the Diagnostics group pane e Diagnostic Setting e Diagnostic Viewer e Logfile The following tables list the options displayed in the drop down menu of each Menu bar selection Table 6 File menu Element Description Save Record New Record Click to save the current record The Save Record menu option saves changes made to the current record into the database Unsaved entries are discarded The Save Record option is available only when a form is open and you have been given permission to update records The New Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data The New Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given permission to update records The Add Record icon on the Record toolbar has the same features as the New Record menu option 13 14 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 6 File menu continued Element Description Delete Re
417. nection is in the process of being closed e Waiting for call e Dialing e Retrying call e Destroy port physical medium is being closed Status Status shows what is happening between the host and the controller Messages include the following e Alarm download e Alarm message download e Credential download e DO download e DO group download e Download start e Elevator download e Error e Flash Error See Diagnostic Log e Flashing Controller The entry includes the percent of flash download complete e Flashing Completed e idle e Incorrect controller type e Inquiry e Normal e Password download e Reader download e Reset e Schedule download e Telephone download e There are fewer than 4 passwords defined Firmware version Firmware version The version of firmware operating the controller 329 330 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 190 Form fields continued Element Description Comm device Head Of Line Comm device messages include the following e If this is a direct connect controller lists the COM port to which this controller is connected e If this is a dial up controller the text Dial Up is displayed e If this is a network controller the IP address of the controller is displayed e If this is a network direct controller the IP address displays If the controller loses network connection and fails over to a direct connect in approximately two
418. nfigure regios orgon oerna eee tse dada saa iy ds tka bia tea vasdeGedian cay ee E N 40 REGION OB sic id 41 Backup REGIONS LOB ia a e aetna Sa 42 APB Region Configuration tab 2c c aiena hada a ii 44 Global configuration regional rules ccc cece cece cen e eee eee eee ee eee eeeneeeees 46 Replication and synchronization conflicts 0 ccc cece cece eee eee e eee e occ 47 Define facilities AA A A A meine came 48 dl AA TEE E nae EEr eSa S EGRA 48 Identify and configure clientS oooooooooccrconanccc nc EEEE eee NEREA PERETE KENEEN EDS 49 NEIWOLKIMO ss ii a EOE E EENE EROE EA eea 50 Client tD isrener ino RE A elem wy NA E EREE 51 BackUp Clients taDt seson N A E E E E E S 54 TOkKeOVer andi recovery TIMING o dass 57 Client redundancy OverVieW c ccs ees eciakant i haaa A cosdssonaneddides sa 58 Define clients Groups 5 i sscodetdd a a a aaa 59 Client Group TOD A A eb die A 59 Create permissions 00 laca e deen 60 Poisson Ai 61 Determine and create OperatorS ooooccocoooccccoccncor cr 63 Operator AAA A A Rach oh dodeeeelh de 63 Multiple language Support miii nor is 65 FOGIMES MOD neida O 66 WOES Ni a wo raw ea gene Stee ow ais 67 O ION 69 OVERVIEW iii st a a Gu daa ds 70 Define time SChedUleS iia ia a di eee savages sais 70 Time Schedules TOD ccoacsuwe ea nnana nE p rer EEEE VIAA ed dan eeadimab merase eae 71 Define event schedules Micro only 0 eee c cece eee cece eee ene core
419. nfigured for your system click to print a credential for this person Signature If there is a signature capture associated with this person record it displays here How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 162 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Area Control tab Note This tab applies to person records associated with ACU controllers The Area Control tab applies to person records associated with ACU controllers Areas assigned to this person record must be configured for keypad arm disarm This person is allowed to arm disarm areas using an IKE or keypad reader designed for keypad arm disarm Figure 124 Area Control tab e Last Name E o Facility v Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Area Control Areas for arm disarm Areas for auxiliary relay control lt Jl amp Table 163 Form fields Element Description Areas for Arm Disarm This window displays a list of areas that are available to this person to arm disarm Assign Area Click to display a Secure Area Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign areas that this person can arm disarm The Secure Area Assignment window displays when you click Assign Area enabling you to select and assign an Area association Only areas in the operator s facilities are available for assignme
420. nforced this check box displays as already selected Example An extended time limit beyond normal can be configured for an employee who enters a motorized door by wheelchair or any individual that requires additional time to pass through a doorway Follow Conditional Unlock This option configures this credential to follow the conditional unlock configuration of the Person form If this is a new credential you must manually select this option Select to enable this feature if you are allowing this credential to access the facility although the facility may be locked due to a mode change or event that caused a normal schedule override such as a plant closing for inclement weather Dates Click calendar to select a date Issue The date the credential was assigned and issued to a person Expiration The first date on which the credential no longer grants access A blank value means the credential never expires Return The date the credential was returned Last Access Date Date the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Time Time the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Reader Reader at which the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Manual Control Reset APB and T amp A Status Micro only Resets the APB or T amp A status of the current credential to neutral Find Credential records
421. nforms you that communication failed Recheck your update configuration settings and try again e If no new updates are available for your system a message displays informing you that your system is up to date Configure Ports Change Password Exit Table 7 Search menu Select this option to configure firewall and DCOM settings on your computer The Change Password option opens the Change Password Dialog Box that lets you change the password of the operator currently logged in Note This dialog box is available only if this operator has permission to change the operator password as assigned on the Operator tab of the Operator form Click to display a dialog box Enter your logoff ID and Password to quit the FCWnx client program Element Description Clear Search The Clear Search option clears all data in the current form Use this option when the form has data and you want to begin a new search The option does not conduct a search nor does it affect any data in the database It only clears data from the form in preparation for a search or cancels a change to a record The Clear Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Recall Search The Recall Search option refills the current form with the last search criteria data Use this option when you want to recall the last search criteria This option does not conduct a search or affect any data in the database The Recall Search
422. ng e Through a keypad reader if the area includes more panels global arming disarming e Through a time schedule e Through digital inputs e Multiple Area Alarm Masking MAAM local and global Multiple area alarm masking unmasking MAAM The MAAM feature allows a user to arm and disarm alarms in multiple areas from a single reader or keypad There are two ways the alarms in the areas can be masked e Selection of the area by entering the area number on the keypad PIN mode and e Selection of the area from a scrollable list on the IKE reader display scroll mode In PIN mode the areas may span panels so the panel will request a global area arm or disarm operation from the Host In scroll mode the panel will perform a local area arm or disarm Local area arm or disarm will function locally Global area arm or disarm function requires a connection with the Host and the user may configure up to 120 MAAM areas at a single panel For global MAAM to work properly the area needs to have numeric descriptions Anti passback Anti passback APB is a feature that prevents a cardholder from entering a secure area and leaving their access card outside for an unauthorized user The system can perform three types of anti passback e Global anti passback allows the server to assign any number of readers to the anti passback function The host must be on line and communicating for this feature to work All access grant deny processe
423. ng digital outputs DO on or off Time schedules define intervals that include a start and an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the state of the DO changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the state of the DO returns to the nonscheduled value Example If the DO is scheduled ON the DO returns to OFF at the end of the schedule Figure 59 Schedule tab Digital Output e Description A Facility v Digital Output Schedule Manual Control amp Status Alarm Control 5 Turn DO On Off Time Schedule v On ott ES Table 78 Form fields Element Description Turn DO On Off Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list This determines when the DO automatically turns on and off The default is None On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital output to be in the Active state Select Off if the above schedule is when you want the digital output to be in the Inactive state Note OFF is not available for systems configured with ACU controllers How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 78 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 158 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Manual Control amp Status tab Use the Manual Control amp Status tab to manually set the state of a specified digital output Figure 60 Manual Control tab Digital Output eS
424. ng failure conditions Verify with Customer Support In order to diagnose a problem you may be requested to save a log file outside of the log folder so that the file is not overwritten That file can be renamed specific to a date or issue Additionally for each client there is a log located in the WINNT system32 folder Under normal system operation this log is empty It is used to log messages if the server and the database cannot be reached Diagnostic Viewer is a separate program within this application To access Diagnostic Viewer select Diagnostic Viewer from the Diagnostics group It operates in real time That is every time this application Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting writes an entry to the log file Diagnostic Viewer automatically displays the latest message By default Diagnostic Viewer displays only the latest 1000 messages The number of displayed messages can be changed on the Diagnostic Viewer Preferences form All log files should be saved in the Logs folder of this application it is easier to locate for backups and upgrades It is a shared folder which means other clients can gain access to the log files Logfiles The LogFile form in the Diagnostics group lets you select a computer in your network for this application set up a new logfile establish an identity for the file and designate a path and directory in which to place your logfile All log files should be saved in the Logs folder it is
425. ng windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer 2 Video windows displaying the current live view of the cameras associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time For additional information click Help on the Digital Video Viewer window Chapter 9 Monitor and control Client monitoring All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Use the Client Monitor form to obtain client information such as client type Imaging status and connection status A client is a computer that has all the functionality of the database server computer but does not store the database and it does not validate license information NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Figure 138 Client monitor i Client Monitor Client Active Cli ACCESSCLIEN ACCESSCLIEN HCACCESS HCCITRIX INFRA_KEMPTON Table 187 Form fields Client Type A Client App A Client App A Client App y Client App Client App Imaging status Thin Client Status Connection status Description Mode Primar
426. nique hex characters in three 16 character strings Do not repeat any character Do not create a pattern Exchange Key There are two options for encrypting an Exchange Key System When you choose this selection no additional selections are available or required This key is set at the factory Custom When you select this option the three dialog boxes become available At the controller enter the 48 character exchange key This exchange key must be identical to the key that was entered into the controller preference block at the controller Micro controllers Enter the 48 character exchange key using FlashTool or Integrated Configuration Tool ICT ACU controllers Enter the 48 character exchange key using the ACUXUtil exe utility Note To use AES encryption you must select the AES data key option and then select the Edit button AES encryption uses four 16 character strings for a total of 64 characters Note If the Custom exchange key entries do not match an alarm condition indication displays in the Reference column of the Alarm Monitor form Edit Click to re assign or revise an existing encrypted Custom exchange key for a selected controller It is possible to assign a duplicate exchange key on separate controllers in this application system When you click this button one time this button label changes to Auto Generate Auto Generate Click this button to system generate a Custom exchange key We recommend t
427. nment window enabling you to select and assign available digital output records How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 142 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Arm Disarm an Area This application supports global spans multiple ACU controllers and local one ACU controller arming and disarming of an area using the reader keypad or manual control Global operation requires host to controllers communication Local operation allows arming disarming without host communication How arming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 10 for example 1234 10 1244 the operator enters 1244 Chapter 6 249 Areas and intrusion zones 4 A message displays the state of the area arming as successful How disarming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 20 for example PIN is 1234 20 1254 the operator enters 1254 4 A message displays the state of the area disarming as successful When using the Areas for Arm Disarm feature Note The keypad arm disarm feature must be configured as Local on the Area form Alarm tab Arm 1 The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if requ
428. ns are being routed to history e Monitor Whether valid transactions are being routed to the Activity Monitor form e Printer Whether valid transactions are being routed to the printer Active Access Rights Displays a list of access rights that are currently active ACU controllers Reader Status Displays Online if the reader is currently online and Offline if the reader is currently offline Reader State Display Idle Ready if the reader is online and active Door Status Displays Open or Closed Door Mode Displays Normal Overlapped Door Open or Overlapped Door Closed Keypad Enabled Displays Disabled or Enabled Reader Firmware Version Displays a version number if applicable Last status date Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this reader from the controller It may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes CAUTION A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 67 This is a read only form 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data Chapter 4 Devic
429. nt by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Area e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an Area Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form 280 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 163 Form fields continued Element Description Areas for Auxiliary Relay Control This window displays a list of areas that are available as Auxiliary Relay Control Areas CARC Assign Area Click to display a Secure Area Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign areas that are available as Auxiliary Control Areas CARC How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 163 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Image capture Note Your photographs and signatures can be created by digital cameras video cameras and signature pads Support for certain Imaging features and functions may be product specific and not necessarily supported by all compatible peripherals Selecting an input device Follow the instructions provided by the device manufacturer for installing an input device Imaging can use any device that has a TWAIN WINTAB or Video for Windows VFW driver installed To select an input device 1 Go to the Personnel group and select Person The Person form displays 2 Select the Photo tab and then click Search to display a current list of records 3 Select one of the records in the
430. ntial T amp A status of OUT and attempted to gain access to a T amp A OUT reader e Valid Floor Elevator control with floor tracking is being used and the person was granted access to the selected floor e Invalid Floor Elevator control with floor tracking is being used and the person was not granted access to the selected floor e Duress Valid Micro only Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the Preferences form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered and one of the following With the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 e Duress Invalid Grant Access on Duress is not active on this system not selected on the Preferences form and an attempted door access with a PIN code and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 314 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 179 Form fields continued Element Description e Duress Valid Open Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the Preferences form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered
431. ntial formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol 4002 40 bit Wiegand format The 40 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 38 code bits The first bit transmitted is the first parity bit P1 it is even parity calculated over the first 20 bits The last bit transmitted is the second parity bit P2 it is odd parity calculated over the total 40 bits Code format F Facility 0 Digits B Credential Number 99 999 999 999 possible 12 digits Note This format was created to enable identical credential identification numbers to be produced in either S F 2F or Wiegand mode These numbers are derived from the 40 bit binary code in the proximity chip The credential number is comprised of the 38 least significant bits The most significant bit is set at 0 302 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 5502 55 bit wiegand format The 55 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 53 code bits The first bit transmitted is the first parity bit P1 it is even parity calculated over the first 27 bits The last bit transmitted is the second parity bit P2 it is odd parity calculated over the total 55 bits Code format F Facility 0 digits B Credential Number 16 digits P Parity Bit What s next If applicable to your system continue with Chapter 8 Guard tours on page 303 Chapter 8 Guard tours This chapter provides an overview when configuring your facility for guard tours Complete the steps as pre
432. ntials Click to display items in the Credentials group The following selections display in the Credentials group pane e Credential e Credential Designer e Credential Alias This option is only available if it was installed as part of a Custom installation e Credential Format e Custom Credential Status Places amp Policies Click to display items in the Places amp Policies group The following selections display in the Places amp Policies group pane e Facility e Area If your system is licensed for ACU controllers this item displays e Intrusion Zone If your system is licensed for Micro controllers this item displays e Access Right 11 12 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 5 Application Group pane continued Element Description Monitors amp Controls Click to display items in the Monitors amp Controls group The following items display in the Monitors amp Controls group pane e Activity Monitor e Alarm Monitor e Client Monitor e Controller Monitor e Graphics Console e Video Console e Manual Control e Digital Input Status e Digital Output Status Alarms amp Events Click to display items in the Alarms amp Events group The following items display in the Alarms amp Events group pane e Alarm e Alarm Group If your system is licensed for Micro controllers this item displays e Alarm Priority e Routing amp Bumping e Response e Instruction
433. ntrol Figure 141 Status tab Digital Output Status Status Select DO Type Select Controller Reader O Dther Oall By Controller DO Num Description Controller Current State Date Time 0018 1 01 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 02 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 03 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 04 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 05 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 06 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 07 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 0018 1 08 Reader PXN 18 Unlock 10 10 2008 11 17 30 AM 20 M0 ea w N 00000 Table 195 Form fields Element Description Select DO Type e Select Reader to display the DO points available for the readers e Select Other to display Aux DOs the two DO relays available on a 2RP module and other DO points Example DO points include lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Select Controller e Select All to display the status for the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on all controllers e Select By Controller to display the status for digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on a selected controller Click the drop down list to display active controllers Refresh Click to get an updated status on the digital outputs A refresh for a dial up controller
434. ntroller form Active Hostname The name of the computer that controls communications to the controller For those computers licensed for Client Redundancy the current Active Hostname may be a backup client and have a different name than the Default Hostname computer Default Hostname This column does not display if this computer is not licensed for Client Redundancy The hostname displayed is the computer that normally hosts this controller The icon image displays in green when the controllers are controlled by the originating host The icon image displays in yellow to signify a failed system The backup client computer listed in the Active Hostname column is controlling the dial up and network dialup controllers for this computer Table 190 Form fields continued Element Description Address Chapter 9 Monitor and control Physical address assigned to the controller when defined State Current state of the communications with the controller Online means that the host attempts to communicate with the controller e Offline means that the host does not attempt to communicate with the controller e Error means that there is a communications problem Connection Connection messages include the following e Connected controller is online and working e Shut down No connection e Create port trying to open a physical medium e Set up connection physical medium is open e Tear down connection con
435. ntroller online Chapter 4 99 Devices Controller Definition tab Configuring your FCWnx system depends on the system that you purchased and licensed For example if you purchased a system that includes Micro controllers you are licensed for Micro controllers and cannot configure ACU controllers Note System configuration must be planned in advance You must designate a physical address for your controller before you create a definition The Controller Definition tab contains the basic information on the controller such as its address and connection type When configuring a controller complete this tab first Other tabs display depending on the selections you make on this tab Upon creation the controller is offline Before the host communicates with the controller you must change it to online using the Controller Monitor form You do not see any credential or alarm transactions until this is done Multi drop configuration ACU Controllers When the ACU controller is configured as head of line controller multiple controllers can be connected to the head of line controller The multi drop feature allows the connection of multiple ACU devices in only one host link The connection between ACUs uses four wire RS 485 communications protocol Multi drop is supported on single path communication such as Dial up Direct and Network and is not supported on dual path communication such as Network Network Network Dial up and Network Direct
436. nu e To quit the program using the Close button in the top right corner of the FCWnx application window Note The default Login logout ID is secure and the default password is SecurityMaster08 case sensitive If you purchased your system from GE Security the default ID and Password are set for you UPGRADES Versions of Secure Perfect 4 0 and earlier did not require case sensitive default login passwords When upgrading from a version of Secure Perfect or earlier you may experience a problem logging in If you have never changed it your system default password may be set to initial caps as in Master and not master Logoff The Logoff option on the File menu lets you log off of the FCWnx session without closing the program A message box displays Click OK to log off of this application logging off allows an operator to log off and another operator to log in without ending the program or Cancel to cancel the logoff process While logged off no one can enter data into the application however the application continues to communicate with the controllers store alarm and credential transactions in the history database and notify you of alarms based on your facility assignment Refer to the Client form for information on turning alarm notifications on and off Note The FCWnx services are still running but you do not receive any alarm notifications Do not shut down services unless you are instructed or the system requires maintenance
437. o Area Control Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Telephone Element Description Address1 The labels of these five fields are defined on the Preferences form Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Telephone Enter the telephone number of this person You may use up to 14 alphanumeric characters There are no restrictions in format whether you use hyphens parentheses or spaces Enter in a format meaningful and understandable to your organization or application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 158 and complete the fields on this tab Note Any field can be used as an e mail address but must first be designated as the e mail address on the Preferences form as a User field or Address field entry 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 274 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual User Fields tab Use the Fields tab to enter user defined information Figure 120 User Fields tab Last Name e Facility Modify Field User fields Label Value A User Field 1 User Field 2 User Field 3 3 3 User Field 4 User Field 5 User Field 6 LJ User Field 7 User Field 8 User Field 9 User Field 10 User Field 11 User Field 12 User Field 13 User Field 14 User Field 15 User Field 16 User Field 17 User Field 18 3 User Field 19 User Field 20 User Field 21 User Field 22 User Field 23 Us
438. o the file and select it to begin playing the video Table 133 Form fields continued Preferences Description Click to display the Video Viewer Preferences dialog which displays the default Snapshot and Video Clip directories e Click to browse for e Select Display Auto P video is automatically launched due to an event By default this is not selected and each time an alarm or activity event occurs any associated live video replaces the previous video in the Chapter 5 Video an alternate location in which to store these files opup in New Window to have a new window open when live auto pop up window Exit Click to exit the Video Console View menu The View menu contains the following commands Table 134 Form fields Description 1Up Click to display video in a single video pane 2 Up Horizontal Click to divide the video viewing area into two panes side by side 2 Up Vertical Click to divide the video viewing area into two panes one on top of the other 4Up Click to divide the video viewing area into four panes 9Up Click to divide the video viewing area into 9 panes 16 Up Click to divide the video viewing area into 16 panes Custom 7 Click to divide the video viewing area into 4 panes the lower right pane is divided into 4 smaller panes making a total of 7 viewing panes Custom 11 ick to divide the video viewing area into 2 large panes 3 medium panes
439. o one tour at a time e The credential read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm e Double hit points by the tour credential along the tour result in invalid tour transactions e A tour begins when the Start Point is hit or manually started by the operator at a computer running this application e A tour ends when all points assigned to the tour are hit or at the expiration of the time assigned for the duration of the tour Also a tour can be ended manually by the operator at a computer running this application e An alarm is generated if a tour is not completed within the assigned maximum tour time e Credential transactions are stored in credential history and available to generate reports e DI tour points are assigned to only one tour e Credentials must be assigned to a tour in order to be a tour credential Table 175 Form fields Element Description Delete Delete a selected guard tour record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no longer required or applicable The associated alarm record for this guard tour is simultaneously deleted If a tour is in progress this record cannot be deleted or edited Refer to the Activity Monitor or the Guard Tour tab of the Manual Control form for tour status Description Enter a unique description for this tour The field accepts 1 to 64 characters Chapter 8 305 Guard tours Table 175 Form fields continued Element Description Fac
440. ocess the upgrade at another time e If you click OK to begin the update a Wise Update Wizard begins the update process A series of windows displays Follow the prompts When the update is completed the Wise Update Wizard prompts you to reboot e Ifthe Web site cannot be reached a message informs you that communication failed Recheck your update configuration settings and try again e If no new updates are available for your system a message displays informing you that your system is up to date Diagnostics overview This application accessed in the Diagnostics group provides an extensive and convenient diagnostic utility to turn the monitoring of the FCWnx system components on and off To display debug messages in the Diagnostics Log within this application the diagnostics for that component you want to monitor must be turned on Each client computer has a set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that computer Specific objects are particularly helpful to Engineering when diagnosing an issue For each client this application creates a default logfile others can be created for each day of the week such as FCWnxFriday spl This file is overwritten each week thus creating a new log for that day During normal operation of this application informational as well as debug messages are written to the daily log file Note Under abnormal conditions the log file may also contain warning and or fatal messages indicati
441. ocked At 60 seconds prior to the extended unlock time expiring the reader will announce locally beeping and flashing LED sequence indicating a DOOR HELD open alarm will be generated if the door is not closed or another extended unlock command and credential transaction is executed Note If the keypad extended unlock time is set to 60 seconds the reader will set pre alarm by beeping and flashing immediately 4 Configure on time for any one DO as 0 and assign this DO as output A Primary local DO for the door held alarm of a particular reader 5 Present a valid credential and enter a valid PIN The door will unlock How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 50 and complete the fields on this tab according to the controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 105 Devices Elevator digital output interface Elevator companies often choose not to allow installers to handle the elevator wiring directly They may provide contacts from the elevator circuit that can be used to interface between FCWnx and the elevator control Sample wiring scenarios are shown in Figure 33 Sample elevator digital output wiring on page 105 Figure 33 Sample elevator digital output wiring Elevator Side N C Software side Digital output wiring for either Floor Select Button Stand mode or Floor Tracking e modes Software DO Optional selected floor feed back input wiring us
442. od during installation of this application If you chose None this form is unavailable in the application Credential alias provides added security in that the encoded number is displayed only to authorized users The encoded credential number is hidden on the Credential form reports and Activity Monitor form Table 170 Form fields Element Description There are two methods of using credential alias Manual Enter the credential alias number on this form Automatic The credential alias number is chosen for you NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Credential Alias tab Use the Credential Alias tab to assign alias numbers to credential encoded numbers Figure 129 Credential alias tab Credential Alias Credential Alias Compary Code TT Card Number Issue Number 3 Encoded Number Credential Alias Eind Credential 4 al E 296 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 171 Form fields Element Description The following three fields are for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Company Code Select None or select from the drop down list of available company codes as previously assigned on the ACU Settings tab of the Preferences form Note When you select a company code number the Card Number and Issue Number fields become available Card Number Th
443. of the week Any change in the scheduling occurs immediately For example if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is revised to archive on Wednesday the archiving occurs one day later on Wednesday e Monthly The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11 59 58 p m The services for FCWnx do not have to be running The archiving process takes place independently of this application As long as the SQL Server Agent services are running the archive process occurs Chapter 2 35 System preferences Determine the status of the SQL Server Agent services by navigating to Settings Control Panel and then Component Services through Windows Explorer Check the Status of SQLAgent SPSQL for FCWnx Note Archiving is performed on the database server computer only Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions and then removes all the data from the history database The data is appended to the Archive database until you decide the Archive database has grown too large The factors in determining whether the Archive database is too large can be e The performance you receive when running history reports The length of time you need to keep data e Other factors specifically related to your installation To remove data from the Archive database 1 Back up your Archive database for this application You have to back up the Archive database using utilities provided by SQL Server 2005 2008 or by
444. ols group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations The Alarm Monitor form displays alarm activity e An operator can see alarms on the Alarm Monitor form only for facilities that are currently active and assigned to the current operator e The option to monitor an alarm must be selected on the Alarm form in order for a specific alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form Table 183 Form fields Element Description Alarm Conditions Alarm Reset Cut Short Process States This is an internal state for alarm conditions Acknowledged Unacknowledged Inactive Figure 136 applies to Micro controller systems only explains the action of alarms and how alarm states and process states relate to each other Figure 136 Alarm states a i Active i 4 A yd TN IN N Ack J 4 Rese Y N N N f Z Alarrr Alarm 4 H Z S EN NG A e pr Pending Alarm Purge Al NI Completed W A t s N J N Z Purge or Reset Ack or Purge O M a Removes from Alarm Monitor 320 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Note
445. on as deleted records cannot be recovered The Delete Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given all permissions Some forms such as the Reader form do not have a delete option Search Click to search The Search option conducts a search in the database for all records that match the search criteria data you enter in the form The records found by the search are displayed in the search results window Data can be in any number of fields in the form or any number of tables Only records that match all fields in which data is entered are displayed An asterisk can be entered in text boxes to indicate wildcard characters The Search option is available only when a form is open that contains records Examples e Enter S in an appropriate text box to display any records beginning with S e A search for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers If no search data is entered all records display Any column displaying in the list box can be sorted by clicking on the column heading Table 4 Form fields continued Element Description Recall Search Chapter 1 Introduction Click to recall a search The Recall Search option refills the current form with the last search criteria data Use this option when you want to recall the last search criteria The option does not conduct a search or affect any data in the databa
446. on controller one 16DO module one ACU Example 00001 01 16D0 would be the digital output on controller one 16DO module one Number This is a read only field and displays the physical address of the digital output Active State On Off Defines whether the digital output is turned On or Off when the digital output is activated Contact your installer on how the digital output was wired This determines the active state of the digital output 155 156 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 77 Form fields continued Element Description On time This feature is read only for ACU controllers with a DO assigned to a reader Specify the length of time in minutes and seconds the digital output remains in the active state before going inactive The time may be overridden by the manual control buttons The default setting is 10 seconds Micro controller systems e You can enter a total of 64 seconds 1 minute 4 seconds If you enter O and this is e Output A then the digital output resets when the alarm resets e Output B then the digital output remains on until it is manually turned off or scheduled off ACU controller systems With a DO assigned to a reader this field is disabled and the read only time fields display what was configured on the Reader form This field is enabled if no Digital Output Relay door option is assigned on the Reader form Door Functions tab e You can ent
447. on functions Throughout this manual reference to Facility Commander Wnx is represented as FCWnx in text content to avoid repetition Conventions used in this manual The following conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A caon Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property Po Warninc Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury Navigating a PDF file When Adobe Acrobat Reader opens your PDF file use the tools to navigate through the document Element Description Ah Use the hand tool to navigate through the document Position the hand over a linked area vd until the pointer changes to a pointing finger Click the link to jump to the linked topic or page Click to go back to the previous view Click to go to the next view Click to display a window that lets you enter a word or phrase for which to search Click Y search Search and wait as Acrobat generates the results Use this too
448. on of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom percent value reads the percent of the zoom currently being viewed 356 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Print Report The Print Report option on the File Menu lets you send the current report to a defined printer This option is available only when a Report form or report is displaying Create default template Select this option on the File menu to create a default report template This option is available only when a report form is displaying Note Ifa specific date is part of this template whenever this report is run it uses that date therefore it is important to update the calendar criteria as needed Set as default template Use this option on the File menu to select a template to use as the default template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template While the selected Report form is displaying select Set As Default Template A message displays stating the current template is now the default template for this form This template is automatically loaded whenever you open this report form You cannot undo this election however you can later display and assign another report as the default Export This option on the Fil
449. on server Communications Port RPC 1024 GE Security DVMRe StoreSafe Communication Port 8088 Server Workstation Video Streaming Port 8085 Start Video Communications Port Range 24 SQL MS SQL 2005 2008 user This port number can be obtained from your server computer At the database server computer for this client click Start select Programs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 2008 Configuration Tools and then SQL Server Configuration Manager When the SQL Server Configuration Manager opens expand the navigation tree for SQL Server 2005 2008 Network Configuration to display Protocols for SPSQL Right click TCP IP select Properties and then the IP Addresses tab The SQL port number displays in the IPAII TCP Dynamic Ports field Question J get a connection error when I try to start the client software What should I do now Make sure that your network client is defined in the Client form Check the bottom of the Client Monitor form and verify that there is at least one license available Verify that you are using TCP IP as your network protocol and that it is configured properly Verify that the network protocol you are using is installed on both the client and server computers e 2 Do hee ES On the server computer go to the Services form and check services If the Status column is blank for that service then it is not running Select the service line and click the Start button e If the status changes to Started then the service is no
450. on the left side of the chart is the same as 00 00 on the right side of the chart 72 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 38 Form fields continued Element Description Intervals Each bar on the time chart indicates an interval of time The system assigns a number to each interval as it is created on the time chart This is the number displayed in the Interval field If you select an interval on the time chart the details of the selected interval display in the Interval details Note ACU controllers support up to 16 intervals per time schedule Each interval is counted as one when it contains ranges having the same Start and End time range For example The Business Hours time schedule shown in Figure 20 contains two different time intervals within the same time ranges between 7 00 to 12 00 and 13 00 to 18 00 New Click to create a new interval on the time chart You may have to adjust the times Delete Click this button to delete an interval from the time chart e Select an interval on the time chart and click Delete e Using the arrows beside the Interval field scroll to the appropriate interval number and click Delete e Select and enter an interval number by typing over the existing number in the Interval field and click Delete Interval Details Use interval details to modify display your selections Start time Displays the time on which the selected time interval begins Stop
451. only if you currently have a list of assigned events and alarm groups An Edit Alarm Group dialog box displays and lets you modify the selection of events and associated alarm groups Add Click Add to assign events to the specified alarm group An Edit Alarm Group dialog box displays enabling you to build a list of events and associated alarm groups Remove Select an entry in the list of displayed events and then click Remove to remove from the list How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 94 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Chapter 4 177 Devices Select the Status tab to view information about the selected alarm as currently stored in the controller s database This status reflects any changes made by schedules on this alarm This is a read only windowpane in two column format as follows Figure 73 Status tab Table 95 Form fields eS Description 0018 0 01 Tamper Facility Ignore Facilities be Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTW Alarm Group 0018 Group 0 Monitor Yes Last status date Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete Element Description Status Windowpane Last status date Micro controller status Alarm Group Displays the alarm group to which the alarm is assigned Ala
452. ontroller connected to a normal reader 1 Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key which is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Present a valid credential to the reader Door Functions tab Use the Door Functions tab to define the door settings associated with the selected reader 130 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 45 Door Functions tab S Reader e N E vi a uni e z 0018 112 D0 0018 1 12 DI Table 62 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Time Maximum unlock The time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains unlocked after the reader reads a valid credential This is the amount of time that a user has to open a door based on a valid input If the time interval selected is zero the reader will toggle between lock unlock state 1 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 60 maximum minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds Example If a O is entered in this field the current state of the reader is changed or toggled to its opposite state The standard situation is the first credential read causes th
453. or communication with controllers Modem Port Queue To monitor dial up modem connections This object captures data being sent by a server to a controller using dial up communication Machine To monitor computer to computer communication API If problems exists during API activity DI If problems exists during DI activity DBTrigger If problems exist with database triggers The triggers are responsible for downloading badge access rights and related access data to the controller Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Table 205 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor continued Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages Guard Tour If problems exist during guard tour activities DO If problems exist during DO activity Graphics Management To monitor FCWnx Graphics Management on starting stopping connecting to other servers and regular processing Web Service To monitor FCWnx WebService on starting stopping connecting to other servers and regular processing GMC objects GMC Login Transactions f GMC fails to launch correctly Monitor to provide tracing of the attempt by the GMC software to connect to the FCWnx application e MC Alarm Events f alarm status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what alarm data is being received by GMC O MC Digital Input Events f digital input device status is not updatin
454. or Arm Disarm and SCIF ACU only This windowpane lists all alarms currently assigned to this area available alarm records filtered by Region Assign Click Assign to display an Alarm Assignment window enabling you to select and assign The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of system alarms for this application for the operator s facilities All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane 245 246 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 141 Form fields continued Element Description Armed Area Monitoring Time When Area Monitoring is enabled for an area an alarm event is reported to the Alarm Schedule Monitor once every hour while the area is disarmed This can be selected to be active always or during an active time schedule When the area is armed the alarm events will no longer be reported to the Alarm Monitor The Time Schedule option is used to notify that the area is disarmed in the activity monitor for every hour Note Area monitoring occurs only when the area is disarmed Never Monitor The area is not monitored Always Monitor The area is always monitored Monitor by Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list that you want to assign to this area record If
455. or Tracking by Keypad Interface Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection Trigger One DO upon floor selection Element Description Reader To tag a reader as an elevator reader select a reader from the drop down list of available readers If no readers are listed check that the readers have been marked active on the Reader tab of the Reader form Micro controllers The list displays all available readers ACU controllers The list displays available readers associated with a controller that is set as an elevator controller These readers are also associated with an area Chapter 4 Devices Table 108 Form fields continued Element Description Floor Tracking Select one of three options No Floor Tracking Floor s selected are not sent to Credential History not tracked Micro controllers Only Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection is enabled ACU controllers Only Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection is enabled Floor Tracking by Input The floor s selected are sent to Credential History Micro controllers Both Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection and Trigger One DO upon floor selection are enabled ACU controllers Only Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection is enabled Floor Tracking by Keypad Floor selection is made by using the keypad of the reader and the floor s selected are sent to Credential History Micro controllers Both Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection and Trigger One DO
456. or does not open and the transaction is Invalid Duress If set to monitor an alarm is generated in both instances Keypad Entry Card number Length ACU only The number of digits that you need to enter into the keypad to represent a Card Number From the drop down list select None or a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 9 Note Ifthe Keypad Entry Card Number Length is greater than the number of digits on the card being entered check number of digits on card number on the Credential form then Os zeros must be added before the entered card number An asterisk can be used to pad the card number entry 127 128 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 61 Form fields continued Element Description Enable Valid No This option is selected by default Select this check box if you want your system to notify you when a Passage valid credential read occurs but the door did not open within the configured unlock time This may be an indication of someone deciding not to pass through the door or an accidental read as someone passes a reader e This feature must be associated with an alarm type of Door Forced or Door Held in order to be notified of a change in state of the door e In order to notify of a duress situation Grant Access on Duress must be configured on the Preferences form How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 61 and complete the fields on this tab according to the reader type
457. ored areas Arm Disarm When the Arm Disarm is set active armed the associated secure area is armed by placing all readers offline all alarm points monitored on and the arm disarm DO goes active When the Arm Disarm Intrusion DI is reset not active disarmed the associated zone is disarmed by placing all readers online all alarm points monitored off unless on a schedule and the arm disarm DO goes inactive A Complete the Intrusion Zone form The Intrusion Zone form is required for creating a relation between readers alarm inputs the Arm Disarm Intrusion point and the arm disarm DO Perform the following 1 2 3 4 Define an intrusion zone with a description and facility assignment Select a controller selection to establish the zone source and its intrusion points Assign the following intrusion zone components arm disarm DO arm disarm Intrusion DI readers and alarms e Arm Disarm Intrusion DI This is a single record selection from a drop down list filtered by active facility that consists of all available Arm Disarm Intrusion points for the controller Only the DIs that have not been assigned are available e Alarm Points This is a multiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available controller alarm points not already assigned to a zone 24 7 4 State Supervision rules apply regardless of the armed disarmed state of the zone e Readers This is a mu
458. osed or Open Note A third option Both displays as grayed out and unavailable for selection unless the DI type is Guard Tour During a guard tour a single state trigger one time hit triggers a DO in both states Closed or Open Enabled If you selected Digital Output as the type defined above enable this field to trigger DOs For all other type digital inputs this is a read only field enabled and unavailable for modification Sense Time Micro only Minutes Enter or select a number between 0 and 60 Seconds Enter or select a number between 0 and 59 seconds If 60 minutes is already entered you cannot enter a number of seconds Note When configuring Floor Tracking by Input for elevator control applications you should set the Sense Time to 7 seconds or less Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 70 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 147 Devices Digital Output tab The Digital Output tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input tab Use this tab to link digital outputs to a digital input When this digital input is activated the digital output is also triggered Note Ifthe DI type is Alarm it is configu
459. ote Secure Perfect Version 4 XX and later Micro firmware is able to communicate with this application host and continue to send alarm and credential transactions Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation without loss of data time constraints during the controller migration process or lockdowns during the database upgrade process However in order to take advantage of the new features that are dependant on the firmware the ultimate goal is to bring all controllers to current level as soon as possible following the database upgrade Chapter 4 Devices Define readers Use the Reader form under the Security Devices group to define readers Readers are the devices that interpret the encoded numbers on credentials Readers are usually located near doors or gates that the system controls Credentials are presented to the readers in order to gain access through a door e When a controller record is created reader records are also created The number of records depends on the controller that you configure and the reader modules that the controller contains e The reader is automatically enabled as Online and Active and configured to accept credential transactions when a reader record is created The number of active readers counts against your reader limit For example if your license key allows the use of 128 readers you may have only 128 readers marked as active Note When the total of all reader records equals the maximum number of
460. our History Micro only The Guard Tour History option opens the Guard Tour History Report form that lets you generate a report of completed tours displaying tour activities such as start points hits invalid points pauses resumes tour end points tour time exceeded manual start and manual stop Time and Attendance History Micro only The Time and Attendance History option opens the Time and Attendance History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of time and attendance activity and the preferences you select Area History ACU only The Area History option opens the Area History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of secure area transactions in the system Roll Call The Roll Call option opens the Roll Call Report form that lets you create a report based on preferences selected for people who last entered a facility by way of a specified reader External The External Reports option opens a Launch External Reports dialog that lets you select an executable program or report that was not created within this application For example you can access reports you created using a third party report generator such as Crystal Reports or Microsoft Access 2002 Table 10 Window menu Element Description Cascade Tile The Cascade option lets you control multiple windows or forms If you have several forms open but not visible select this option for a cascading v
461. ouse and then releasing it on the last desired record Nonsequential rows may be added to the selection by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows are highlighted r 4 Click Delete k 22 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 5 Click Save 15 If any record dependencies exist for the record you are deleting you are not able to delete You must remove the dependencies before you return to delete this record from the database Chapter 2 System preferences This chapter provides instructions for initial setup of system preferences facilities clients permissions and operators in your Facility Commander Wnx system In this chapter A i dd She oe eS 24 Conpenre DIETOTERODES io i dae dee dies Macias Sham dhe hee eden 24 CONN OHTE PETION A le eae eee el Hews 40 Global configuration regional rules 0 es 46 Replication and synchronization conflicts 0 0 000 ces 47 Delne TOE cae inca ii tise Weave ud a se ie ee epee vom de ENEN E EEEE Be 48 Identify and configure clients 60 cc eee 49 Delne CULTS A a oto POE BERENE ARSE wien dense 59 Create permissions a oh oo a a tnin rik ca ae ea dea 60 Determine and create GDETOTORS ci wea bated Rihana a ee 8 63 WHEE SOS nhs Gated a dk we he ek a A eh Gee Rh Ree Se 67 24 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Complete initial setup of system preferences facilities client computers permissions
462. ove schedule is when you do not want to monitor alarms belonging to this alarm group Print Alarm Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms belonging to this alarm group or No if the above schedule is when you do not want to print alarms belonging to this alarm group How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 98 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 181 182 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Events tab Use the Events tab to schedule changes to the sense time on all alarms in the group by assigning previously defined events to alarm groups Figure 76 Events tab i gt Alarm Group e Description Facility Group Events Alarm sense time events Event Description Sense Time Table 99 Form fields Element Description Alarm sense time events This windowpane displays the currently assigned events and their associated sense time Edit Available only if there are currently assigned alarm sense time events This button is used to modify existing alarm sense time events The Alarm Sense Time form on page 183 form displays Add Click Add to assign events to the specified sense time The Alarm Sense Time form on page 183 form displays Remove Select an alarm sense time event to remove and click Remove How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 99 and co
463. p open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Activity monitoring Note Fora shortcut to the functions available within the Activity Monitor form or to a related form right click anywhere in the area where the credential transactions display Not all options are available to you You must click on a credential transaction with a camera association in order to enable video options on the shortcut menu Camera and reader association linking is accomplished on the Alarms amp Events Group Event Trigger form Figure 134 Activity monitor 137 Activity Monitor DER Activity Type Area Zone Location Number Table 179 Form fields Element Description Date Displays the date in the controller on which the credential transaction occurred Time Displays the time of the credential transaction occurrence in the controller Activity Type Displays the type of activity that occurred along with a graphic e Valid Person was granted access e Invalid Person was not granted access ACU controller systems An APB violation for ACU controller systems appears as Invalid Chapter 9 313 Monitor and control Table 179 Form fields continued Element Des
464. pan controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller qs 12 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 1 Task Quick setup sequence continued Element Description DVRs Camera presets Application Group page 203 The following order is recommended for configuration of a DVR system for this application a Security Devices Digital Video Recorder DVR Refer to Chapter 5 Video on 1 Setup operators and permissions 2 Configure the DVR Refer to the manuals you received with your DVR for hardware setup and installation specifics 3 Configure DVR devices DVR devices can be hosted on the server computer for this application and or client workstations The actual number of DVR devices hosted on each server computer may vary Distributing DVR hosting across multiple computers may be required for optimizing system performance in your specific application Note When you change a facility designation it changes the facility for the DVR only You receive a message displaying Do other devices change to the same facility as the digital video recorder Select Yes or No If you select Yes the alarm record and camera records change as well You need to verify the accuracy of the revised records Create preset records Configure cameras Set up event triggers ON OP e Optional Set up alarm graphics Security Devices Camera Pr
465. plete the form Set Automatic Logoff Time Refer to Table 27 on page 51 1 Click the Administration group 2 Click the Client icon 3 Set Auto logoff Minutes Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Quick Setup guide Task Description Diagnostics Refer to Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting 1 2 3 Click the Diagnostics group Click the Diagnostic Setting icon Select items from the list box on the right windowpane that you want to monitor using the Diagnostic Viewer program Select Enable debug messages Note Use this form with care The more items you turn on for monitoring the more your system performance is affected This is even more important when monitoring port communications or controller items Click the Diagnostics group Click the Diagnostic Viewer icon to open the Diagnostic Viewer program The activities of your selected component are displayed Contact Customer Support Refer to Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting 1 2 If you require assistance first contact your local Business Partner To contact GE Security use the following numbers and addresses Telephone United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287 Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 305 593 4301 Be ready at the equipment before calling FAX 561 998 6224 Web site www gesecurity com Support rs bctsupport ge com Chec
466. plication e Global Edition systems can also be configured for database redundancy at the Regional level e A Regional database server can be configured to have backup servers in the event of a failure at the default Regional server e APB options are available for configuration in the selected Region Note A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated It defines what publications are received where and when The time that it takes to complete this process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be synchronized Table 20 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Description Click Search to display a list of database servers in your FCWnx system Select one of the database servers from the list box in the right windowpane The selected server name now displays in the Description field This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Region tab Use the Region tab to identify a Global database server or Regional database server and configure synchronization intervals This tab also contains the licensing information about the Region Figure 10 Region tab E Region e Description Region Ba
467. pplicable include the Person form and Credential form Refer to Mass update on page 293 409 410 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description PDF Portable Document Files PDFs are read only electronic versions of printed documents The documents are in PDF format and included on a separate document CD Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view these documents It is also included on the CD If you do not already have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed follow the steps below 1 Copy the Acrobat executable file from CD onto your hard drive 2 Navigate to Windows Explorer and double click the file 3 Follow the on screen installation instructions To view the PDF file double click the file name or start Adobe Acrobat Reader and open the document you want to view For additional information refer to Adobe Acrobat Reader Help Save Position To save the position of any main application or external application window right click to display a shortcut menu Select Save Position Close the window When re opened the window displays in the saved position Secure Perfect Secure Perfect is a multi edition software offering of Integrated Secure Management Software designed on Microsoft Windows technology Secure Perfect Editions provide full security management functions including access control intrusion zone control alarm monitoring reporting photo ID badging and CC
468. presented to a reader or 307 308 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual DI point so that the system can track the credential progress Each time the officer presents a credential to a reader a tour point is hit e Tour points and a guard tours record must be created before a tour can begin e Tour points can be any readers or DIs that are not on a dial up controller e DIs must be configured as a DI type of guard tour e DI points can only be assigned to one guard tour e Reader tour points can be assigned to any tours and any number of tours e All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region e The credential read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm e Double hit points along the tour result in invalid tour transactions e Credential transactions are stored in credential history and available to generate reports e A credential must be assigned to the tour Additional statements relating to guard tours are listed in Define guard tours on page 304 Table 177 Form fields Element Description Search Click to display or change an existing guard tour point record Ifthis is a Global configuration points that display are limited to the active Region You cannot edit a guard tour point if it is assigned to a guard tour Add Click to configure a new Tour Point record Delete Click to delete a selected Tour Point record from the list in the windowpane on
469. ption Facility Main Campus i Assigned People Assign People Table 43 Form fields Element Description Assigned People This windowpane displays people assigned to receive an e mail alarm notification Assign People Click to display the People Assignment window allowing you to select specific people that receive an e mail alarm notification People Assignment This window displays a list of Person Records with an e mail address in the FCWnx system Only person records in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available person e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a person Note Only those with an e mail address in their Person Record display in the People Assignment list for assignment to an alarm notification Click OK and the selected people names display in the Assigned People windowpane of the Person Selection window How to 1 Review Table 43 and following the guidelines assign people 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 78 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Message Format tab The Message Format tab lets you format the appearance of the e mail alarm notification based on your Windows regional font settings Figure 24 Message Format tab P Event Notifier Description Facility v Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format
470. r ACU controller systems only Use the Alarm Control tab to link digital outputs to an alarm When this alarm is activated the digital output is also triggered Example The digital output is a siren An alarm is generated when a door forced alarm is generated Because the digital output siren is linked to the door forced alarm the siren sounds when the alarm is generated Table 80 Form fields Element Description Alarms Displays the current status of the alarms associated with this digital output Assign Click this button to display the Digital Output Alarm Assignment dialog Select the Assign button to open the Digital Output Alarm Assignment dialog From here you can select alarms to link to a particular digital output Figure 61 Digital Output Alarm Assignment Digital Output eS Description e Facility v rE _ Digital Output Schedule Manual Control amp Status Alarm Control Alarms Alarms Time Schedule Link Only If Offline Ignore Alarm Monitor State K 160 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 81 Form fields Element Description Alarms Available Alarms Windowpane Select from the Available list those alarms that you want to assign to this record The alarms that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only alarms in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator
471. r Auxiliary Relay Control selections on the Area Control tab of the Person form When the License Setup window displays during the installation sequence the option to Cancel can be selected Installation of this application completes and operation of your system continues in demo mode until you successfully license your system After each hour of login time the system shuts down and you are required to restart this application to continue operations This sequence continues indefinitely if you have not properly licensed your system Refer to the Help system in the Licensing Setup for additional information 407 408 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description DES DESIII AES Data Encryption is additional security assigned to protect the Host to controller exchange of information The data messages are encrypted Methods of Encryption DES This option uses a single pass of authentication and 16 unique hex characters are required DES III This method of encryption uses a three pass authentication process Starting at the left the first pass authenticates 16 hex characters The second pass authenticates 16 hex characters The third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters AES This method of encryption uses four pass authentication and 64 unique hex characters are required When you select this method four dialog boxes are available for input Enter 64 unique hex cha
472. r a digital input in this situation to be set to 0 seconds Floor tracking by keypad Define the floors available and define a digital output relays for each floor The reader s keypad is used to select the desired floor Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used In addition each DO can be used in only one floor The number of floors is limited by the number of DO modules that can be placed in the controller The maximum number of modules in a controller is four Micro controllers The maximum number of floors available is 64 4 modules x 16 DOs 64 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors available is 128 12 on the ACU2 controller 7 RRMs x 16 relays and 1 RRM x 4 relays Floor tab on the Access Right form This procedure applies to systems using Micro controllers On the Personnel menu select Access Right to open the Access Right form Floor tab to assign access rights to elevators and floors Select from the Available list those elevators you want to use with the form The elevators that display in this list are those that are set up on the Elevator form Floors and DOs can be assigned an access right to define which floors a person can access and what DOs a person can trigger with a valid credential Chapter 4 195 Devices Configuring elevator control using a Micro controller Note Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators See Floor tab on page 193 Configure th
473. r clients to operate differently than defined for Normal mode Monday through Sunday which is the default mode for this application Operating modes are an administrative decision as each facility has unique requirements For each mode FCWnx controllers manage their devices such as readers and doors in a predefined way e Like events there is no end time associated with a mode The mode remains active until changed by another mode schedule The Host PC and controllers may be in different modes at the same time e The maximum number of all supported schedules combined for any one Micro controller is 1 023 The maximum number of all supported schedules combined for any one ACU controller is 253 Note You may have a schedule configured but never see a schedule change if you do not have the schedule associated with an Alarm Routing and Bumping configuration Table 45 Form fields Element Description Description Enter a meaningful and unique 64 digit or less alphanumeric description Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Chapter 3 81 Schedules Modes tab Use the Modes tab to create a mode schedule Note Like events there is no end time associated with a mode The mode remains active until changed by another mode schedule Figure 25 Mode Schedule tab M Hode 8 Table 46 Form fields Element Description Date Click the arrows to
474. r entry of an e mail username and password E mail User Name Enter the user name that the e mail server uses to validate this user This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters e E mail Password Enter the user password that the e mail server uses to validate this user This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Table 12 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Access to File Share Directories Complete these fields to allow FCWnx services to access file share directories such as the firmware directory By default these fields are populated with the user name and password of the FCWnx secure user If the windows user name and password are different than the FCWnx secure user name and password unselect the Use FCWnx Operator Password for Above User Name check box and then enter the user name and password for a user who has access to the file share directories a member of the SPAdmin group Windows User Name This field is automatically populated with the windows user name Domain Name Click the Browse button to open the servers dialog box From here you can select from a list of servers to connect to Use FCWnx Operator Password for above User Name This check box is selected by default Click on the checkmark to remove it enabling the Password field Password Enter the windows password Company and site code ACU only Max number of PIN digits A
475. racters in the binary dialog boxes in four 16 character strings Diagnostic Viewer The Diagnostic Viewer application is a diagnostic tool used in conjunction with this application Diagnostic Viewer lets you view the contents of the application diagnostic log files apply filters to limit the information displayed and search for a specific log entry Each day this application writes messages to a diagnostic log file Refer to Diagnostic Viewer program on page 380 Diamond II Diamond II DI is a Browser based Facility Security System for access control alarm monitoring DIAMOND II Color Graphics photo badging and CCTV control FCWnx combines the features of Secure Perfect and Diamond II software with a whole new look Features are enabled on the application forms according to the controller hardware and system that you purchased and licensed encryption See DES DESIII AES on page 408 Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description facility The FCWnx database can be partitioned and grouped These groupings are identified as Facilities If Facilities are not defined all operators are able to access all the FCWnx records based on the permissions associated with the form Reminders e Facility partitioning does not involve access rights or who goes where e The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created e Reports can be generated bas
476. ram for changes to the Auto Logoff selection to take effect Display Alarm Notification Enable this field if you want an alarm dialog box to display whenever an alarm occurs based on facilities available to the current operator Table 27 Form fields continued Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Client Region Failover Note This check box displays only on a Global configuration This check box is applicable to FCWnx Global configurations When displayed the default state of this check box is selected and grayed out If a database failure occurs at the default Regional database server this client would automatically fail over to a configured backup Regional database server Backups are configured on the Region form Backup Regions tab Click the check box to clear and disable the automatic failover option You might choose to clear this check box to prevent nonessential client failover Enable Auto Shutdown FCWnx services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets all the Auto Shutdown criteria Services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets ALL of the following criteria 1 Does not host any controllers or DVRs 2 Does not have any API connections 3 Is not a Thin Client 4 Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own 5 Is not a CCTV client 6 Is not hosting a guard tour 7 Client fo
477. raphics maps are organized according to their facility The items that display in the navigation pane are determined by an operator s permission levels and context Initially the facilities are collapsed Expand a facility Even if the facility containing that map is collapsed the icon is red which indicates that a map in that facility is in alarm Click on a map to open it You can also open a map from the Menu bar by selecting File Open The corresponding facility in the Navigation pane expands accordingly 5 The Graphics Monitor is divided by a split bar with split pointers which can be used to change the size of the window View Remove Alarms from the Refer to Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 319 Alarm Monitor form 1 Click the Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click the Alarm Monitor icon to display the monitor Alarm messages display 3 Select one or more alarm messages that you want to remove 4 Click the Alarm Monitor toolbar icon to Purge All and remove all messages or Purge Individual to remove one alarm message All Monitors These forms are outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multiple window management for both single and multiple monitor workstation configurations Create Reports Refer to Chapter 10 Reports on page 355 1
478. ration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field On the Port Settings tab under Direct Configuration select the COM Port that the controller is connected to on the hosting PC On the Controller Configuration tab select the modules that are in the controller you are setting up Click the module you want and drag to the Configuration column To delete select a module from the Configuration column right click and select Delete Click Save If there is any required information missing a window displays listing those items that are incorrect or missing Don t forget to save the record again once you fix those items When the controller record is created the records for the associated readers alarms alarm groups and digital outputs are also created with default data based on the modules you added on the Controller Configuration tab 10 Use the Controller Monitor form to set the controller online Creating dial up controller records Set up your modem s through the server or client computer s operating system Refer to the documentation you received with your modem 1 2 Select the Administration group and then select Preferences Select the Communications tab and enable the modem s that are used for controllers You need to stop the Client s that host the enabled modem s and then restart them Once you restart this application and log in select the Controller form f
479. rce for this password Cannot begin with a numeric character Select if a password cannot begin with a numeric character Cannot end with a numeric character Select if a password cannot end with a numeric character Must be mixed case contain both upper and lower case characters Select if a password must be mixed case contain both upper and lower case characters Must contain both alpha and numeric characters Select if a password must contain both alpha and numeric characters If selected this option enables the Minimum numeric characters control field Minimum numeric characters Enter a number that represents the number of numeric characters for this password The range for this selection is 1to 18 characters with at least 1 alpha character Credential Hide PIN Number This determines whether or not the actual PIN numbers display on the Credential form and in a Credential History Report If selected the numbers are hidden and replaced by asterisks in the PIN Number field 38 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 18 Form fields Element Description Automatic Credential Suspension Enable daily scheduler Select this check box to automatically suspend credentials that have not been used for a specified number of days A daily routine automatically runs at 12 01AM to check all credentials in the database that are set to Active against the number of days selected in the field Days of Inactivity In
480. rding as a still photo Quick Launch Accesses Graphics Console and live and recorded video from cameras associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger Note In order to view live and recorded video the DVR must be online and available and not serving another request for playback of recorded video based on this event Note A message dialog displays if video is not available because associated cameras are not assigned to the currently active facility Swipe and show option Note Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time If readers have not been selected the program does not start The Swipe and Show program is a monitoring and validation option available on the Activity Monitor form When properly configured and following a credential transaction the operator is able to observe a credential photo and text description of the transaction in the Swipe and Show window An operator is able to monitor transactions and compare the photo ID to a live image 317 318 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 135 Swipe and Show window S Swipe E Show The Swipe and Show window is resizable and displays the following Table 182 Form fields Element Description Photo A photo displays in this windowpane for the credential presented to the reader If no photo is available or an unknown credential is presented to the reader a s
481. re 146 Guard tour tab W3 Manual Control DER e E i Az Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas Zones Mode Threat Guard Tour Guard Tour Tour State Time to Complete Client Description Tour Point Point Status Last Hit Time lt Set tour to Table 200 Form fields Element Description Upper windowpane e Guard Tour A list of configured tours descriptions in this application Tour State This column displays the current state of all guard tours in your system Typical states are 1 Tour Started 2 Tour Not Started 3 Tour Paused e Time to Complete This column displays the estimated time assigned for completion of a tour based on the clock time that this tour started and maximum tour time allowed If a tour is paused and later resumed before expiration of estimated completion time the remaining unused tour time is reflected in the Time to Complete column e Client Description This column displays the client that is hosting the selected tour A color indicator displays the current connection status of the client that is hosting the selected tour Green indicates online Red indicates offline 349 350 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 200 Form fields continued Element Description Lower Windowpane e Tour Point This column displays a list of points associated with the selected guard tour e Point Status This column displays a hit or
482. re is employed see 5 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an operator acknowledges a few specific alarms their process state becomes Inactive and they are removed from the Alarm Monitor form This happens when the following two conditions are met 1 If the alarm is not configured for Operator acknowledge on the Alarm form 2 Logical alarms are system generated and configurable They cannot be a cut or shorted This differs from a physical alarm that is generated by an actual input device Examples Invalid credential alarm Lost credential alarm Duress credential alarm Host Comm alarm Encryption alarms Failover alarms Figure 137 Alarm Monitor Ei Alarm Monitor Alarm State Priority Category Description O Alarm 19 Doctor call 4 0099 1 05 Reader Forced lt Instruction Chapter 9 Monitor and control Reference Process State Count Host Date Time Door Forced 2 Unacknowledged 2 03 12 2009 09 25 27 AM Using the Alarm Monitor form Note Fora shortcut menu to the functions available within the Alarm Monitor form or to a related form click the right mouse button within the first windowpane where the alarms display or the second pane where the messages display Not all options are available You must select an alarm activity with a camera association in order to enable video options on the shortcut menu There are three sections to the Alarm Monitor form
483. reader used and is recorded as such in the credential history Example This privilege may be appropriate for high level company executives Conditional Unlock ACU only Select to enable this feature if you want this person to have access to the facility although the facility may be locked due to a mode change or event that caused a normal schedule override such as a plant closing for inclement weather When this selection is enabled and saved a message displays asking the user if this selection is to be applied to all credentials currently issued to this person Find and Assign Credential Click to find the next credential presented to a selected reader Select any active reader If the credential is not in this application you can add it This is a convenient way to assign credentials Note The last reader selected will be stored with this client for easy recall How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 157 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Location tab Use the Location tab to enter location information for this person The fields accept 64 alphanumeric characters making possible exceptionally lengthy street addresses or e mail addresses Figure 119 Location tab Table 158 Form fields Chapter 7 273 Access rights departments persons and credentials eS Last Name Facility v Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Phot
484. records list and then click Capture Image Signature The Image Capture Application screen displays 4 Using the mouse point to the photo area and right click A context menu displays 5 Select Input Device from the context menu A Select Profile window displays listing the available input devices on your computer By default the input device loads from a file 6 Select the input device you are using and click OK The next time you capture a photo the program uses the input device you selected 7 Repeat these steps to set up an input device for signature pads The program recognizes a separate input device for photos and signatures To select a record and capture a new image for the selected record 1 Select Person from the Personnel group 2 Select the Photo tab on the Person form 3 Select one of the records in the Record list Note Chapter 7 281 Access rights departments persons and credentials Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image Adjust the settings and then click Save to save the adjusted settings Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays The dialog box that displays lets you crop and enhance the newly captured image You notice that a highlighting box with eight sizing handles is plac
485. red on the Alarm form Figure 53 Digital Output tab e Description A Facility v Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events Status Output A Primary Local Output B ES y 001810500 y Dutput Control Digital Output Time Schedule Link Only If Offl Ignore Disabled State w lt gt Table 71 Form fields Element Description This section displays for systems configured with Micro controllers Output A Primary A primary input assignment is not required The default is None Click the drop down list to select Local an available DO to assign as the primary e If you select an output this output must belong to the local controller e Ifthe controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO is triggered e Ifthe ON time on the Digital Output form is set to 00 this DO remains active until the digital input is reset 148 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 71 Form fields continued Element Description Output B Click the drop down list to select an available DO e The digital outputs in this list can be on a local controller or other controllers e If Output B is local it will trigger However if Output B is on another controller it is activated only if the host is online and able to communicate with that controller e The outputs that display in this list are
486. redential formats that are currently in the controller If there are no custom formats the fields are empty If a format in the database does not match what is available in the controller the window list displays a message Unrecognized Format To change the credential format e Magnetic stripe Select the type of magnetic stripe format from the drop down list e Wiegand Click Assign formats to display a list of available Wiegand credential formats from which to choose and assign to this controller e Clear formats in controller Click to clear all custom credential formats from the controller Credentials associated with those formats no longer work If you change the credential format any format that existed in the controller previously is replaced Start flashing controllers This option starts flashing the selected controllers with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller Upgrades Micro controllers This application software communicates with controllers flashed with Secure Perfect 4 X and later firmware All offline credential and alarm transactions are uploaded to the server computer after the conversion process and stored in the appropriate history table Allow all the offline transactions to be processed before flashing controllers to the FCWnx fi
487. report form Use the Filters tab to generate a Device Configuration report Filter or select specific information you want to display on the report e Device From the drop down list select a device that you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all select lt ALL gt Note The following exception applies e Ifa Camera or Digital Video Recorder was selected as Report type on the General tab the Device drop down list fills with DVRs only Chapter 10 Reports DI History report form Use the Filters tab to select or limit the criteria by which this report is generated DI State Select the state of this DI as Set Reset Open or Short If you want to use all DI states select lt ALL gt Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt DI Type Select the DI type as Alarm Elevator Guard Tour Intrusion Output or Inactive If you want to use all DI types select lt ALL gt DI Description Enter the range of device descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Controller Description Enter the range of controller descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Operator History report form Use the Filters tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated Activity Type Enable the activity types on which you want to run the report Login Name
488. resources is restored you do not have to perform the following steps e If the issue persists and you receive an error message follow these steps Click Start and then Run In the Open field enter regsvr32 systemroot lsystem321o01e32 d11 Click OK to display the following Figure 154 ole32 dll dialog box AA A DilRegisterServer in C WINNT system32 ole32 dll succeeded 9 Click OK 10 Restart your computer Question My COM port is not working as expected What should I do now Use the Controller Monitor to troubleshoot communications between the host and the controller Make sure the State field shows the controller as Online If it is Offline right click and then select Set Online If it is Error then the host is not able to communicate correctly with the controller If this is a direct connect controller make sure the Connection field shows Connected Make sure the baud rate setting on the controller matches the baud rate setting for the computer s COM port Make sure the Comm device field shows the proper communications port for this controller that is COMI for COM port 1 Use the Status and Connection fields to check the condition of the communications Refer to the Help system for information on status messages Next check the hardware settings J Click Start Settings and then Control Panel 2 From the Control Panel window double click System select Device Manager and then Ports
489. ring which an alarm can be delayed without generating an alarm This is a Delayed Entry requirement Comment Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field Chapter 4 169 Devices How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 89 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Set Instructions tab Use the Set Instructions tab to select the instructions you want to display on the Alarm Monitor form when this alarm occurs Instructions are simply directions explaining how to react to the alarm Figure 67 Set Instructions tab eS Description 0018 0 01 Tamper A Facility Ignore Facilities Y Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Instruction J v Table 90 Form fields Element Description Instruction This windowpane displays the currently selected instructions in the order in which they display on the Alarm Monitor form Move Up Click to move a selected instruction up one line it displays on the Alarm Monitor form in the modified order Move Down Click to move a selected instruction down one line it displays on the Alarm Monitor form in the modified order 170 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 90 Form fields Element Description Assign Cli
490. ription amp Facility v Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Areas Selected Areas Access Dates Activation Expiration ES Element Description Assigned Areas This windowpane displays a list of areas currently assigned to this access right Assign Click this button to display the Access Rights Area Assignment dialog box and select from a list of areas available for assignment by this operator Only areas in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Area e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an Area Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Dates Activation Click to display a calendar dialog to select the day month and year to begin this access right The default is today s date Expiration Click to display a calendar dialog to select the day month and year to end this access right The default is 20 years from today s date Note The expiration date that occurs first either the access right expiration date or credential expiration date will be applied to the cardholder 265 266 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 115 Access Rights Area Assignment dialog Access Rights Area Assignment Available Areas Selected Areas lt Area Access Allow access at all times O Allow access by schedul
491. rm The Threat Level Access feature prevents access to buildings or rooms upon certain alarms or by manual control on the Manual Control form There are four Threat Levels 0 3 the first is O Normal or no threat then 1 Low then 2 Medium and then 3 High Segment the employees into Threat Levels For example general employees are assigned Normal Supervisors Managers are assigned Low Executives are assigned Medium and President HR Fire and Safety Personnel are assigned High If a person has a Threat Level of Medium assigned to them and the building is put into Threat Level Medium only persons with a Threat Level of Medium or High can get in Controllers tab Figure 28 Controllers tab Mode Event Trigger eS Description 3 Facility Ignore Facilities Nj Controllers Alarms Assigned Modes and Threat Levels Controller Threat Level Access Table 47 Controllers tab Element Description Assigned Modes or Threat Displays a status of the controller and its associated modes or threat Levels levels Add Click to assign a controller mode and threat level access Remove Select a controller and then click to remove a mode event trigger record Edit Opens the Controller Mode Threat Level Selection dialog allowing you to change the threat level or mode Chapter 3 87 Schedules Alarms tab Figure 29 Alarms tab 1 Mode Event Trigger eS Description Facility
492. rm Enable Auto Shutdown is selected Licensing controls the number of computers that can host FCWnx sessions If a particular client is shut down that license is now available for another client computer to be designated an FCWnx client and run the FCWnx application If not all clients require a license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers Form Search Limits Enable this field if you want to limit the number of search results that display on all forms for that client This field does not accept an entry more than nine digits long Note The default value is 500 results and the limit is enabled Ping Time msec e Interval This is the interval of time a broadcast message is sent indicating a client is online Default is 20 000 This field does not accept an entry less than 5 000 msec e Timeout The amount of time that elapses between broadcast message and response before the system considers a client offline The client status display on the Client Monitor form Default is 60 000 This field does not accept an entry less than three times the Interval amount specified ACTIVITY PRINTING CAUTION WinxP Professional Operating Systems If the printer you have selected is hosted by a computer running a WinXP Professional operating system you must add permissions to share this printer to the FCWnx network At the host computer navigate to your printer property settings
493. rm Monitor Displays whether this alarm is routed to the Alarm Monitor form ACU controller status Status Displays the status of the alarm Monitor Displays whether this alarm is routed to the Alarm Monitor form Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested 178 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 95 Form fields continued Element Description Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this alarm from the controller It may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 95 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data CCTV tab Select the CCTV tab to assign CCTV alarms to alarms for this application The windowpane displays the CCTV alarms already assigned to this alarm Figure 74 CCTV tab e Description 0018 0 01 Tamper Facility Ignore Facilities s Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Add Remove Chapter 4 179 Devices Table 96
494. rm user field select a label and enter the new or edited text in this dialog box The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Credential User Fields Credential User Field Labels Displays a list of 20 currently assigned labels for the Credential form user fields New label To assign or edit the label of a Credential form user field select a label and enter the new or edited text in this dialog box The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long How to 1 Select a label in the Person User Fields windowpane Edit the label by entering over the text in the New Label field below this windowpane Select a label in the Credential User Fields windowpane Edit the label by entering over the text in the New label field below this windowpane Repeat for each label field that you want to edit Oy TO E i Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 29 System preferences Mode Threat Labels tab Use the Mode Threat Labels tab to change the labels of modes and threat levels These labels are used in scheduling Refer to the Event Time and Mode Schedule forms for configuration of the modes or threat levels you have created and labeled here Figure 4 Mode Threat Labels tab E Preferences PITT System Settings User Fields Mode Threat Labels Address Fields Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Mode 1 Mode 1 Mod
495. rmware to minimize data loss The duration of time to upload is dependent on the number of transactions stored and the length of time that the server computer does not communicate with the controllers This might be a few minutes or several hours ACU controllers There are two ways of getting the FCWnx firmware into the ACU panels following a conversion from a Diamond II system 1 Copy the firmware file from the FCWnx CD to the folder where the DII firmware resides 2 Use the AcuxUtil exe utility The functionality of this utility is described in the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers Hardware Installation Manual View edit flash files Use this option only when it is necessary to selectively flash an older version of firmware on a controller This application automatically selects the latest version by default The flashing process takes approximately two to 334 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual three minutes it varies with the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller Click OK to begin the flash When flashing is complete the controller resets and requests a database Note Micro 5 PX and Micro PX 2000 The form opens with the latest efl firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older firmware file Micro 5 PXN and Micro PXN 2000 The form opens with the latest efl network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network fir
496. rom the Security Device Application Group When you click Add to add a controller record the Controller Definition tab displays default values for the Head of line and Credential Loading Chapter 4 97 Devices e Select the type of controller e Enter the address of the controller e If this controller is the first controller on a string of controllers select Yes under Head of line Otherwise select No and select the head of line controller If this is a downstream controller that you are adding the controller directly upstream towards the host from it may need to be reset in order for it to recognize the controller you are adding Example If your line of controllers looks like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 And you want to add Controller 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Then you would need to reset Controller 2 in order for Controller 3 to be recognized e For Connection type select Dial up e Select a Credential Loading method 5 Micro only On the Security tab if you do not enter passwords the default passwords one 1 two 2 three 3 and four 4 are used If you want to change the passwords you may do so at any time 6 On the Time Zone tab verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary 7 On the Comments tab enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is
497. rom the template combo box Report Templates window With any report form displayed click Templates A list box displays a list of available templates To use select the desired template and do one of the following Element Description Save As Select an existing template and then click to save with a new name A dialog box displays enabling you to enter a name for the new template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Save Select a template and click to save any changes made to the template preferences An update message displays Remove Select a template and then click to delete it from the list A Delete Template dialog box displays to confirm your choice and the template is deleted Make Default Select a template and then click to automatically load this template whenever this form is opened A Default Template confirmation message displays Close Click to close this window without taking any action New Template dialog Use the New Template dialog box to create a new template You are prompted to enter the name of the template you want to create Keep in mind that any information currently on the report form is saved under this name Preview The Print Preview Report option on the File menu lets you preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is displaying A printer must be added to your FCWnx system in order for this feature to be available Following completi
498. rop down menu of the main application toolbar Reports are filtered so that supplied information pertains only to the selected facilities of the current operator A list of standard reports is provided below Seven are history reports In addition FCWnx has the ability to access reports created by using a third party report generator The following is a brief description of each report 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Person Provides person information such as address and department on all or a subset of persons in the system Credential Provides information in areas you select on all or a subset of credentials in the system Administration Generates reports about the administrative areas of the system Reports cover alarm instructions events event triggers preferences operators permissions responses schedules clients e mail notification and intrusion zones Device Configuration Generates reports about the devices in the system such as readers alarms cameras and digital video recorders Schedules Lists the schedules and events assigned for each controller Access Provides a list of access rights and persons who have access to specific areas that is who has access where Floor Access Provides a list of floors defined in the system and the access granted to each one Area ACU only Lists the details of secure areas configured in this application Alarm History Generates reports on alarm
499. rror message or have a problem with your configuration contact your local network administrator The Event Notifier form Alarms amp Events group lets you e Assign those alarms and reset conditions that trigger an e mail message e Assign people who are to receive that e mail notification of the alarm reset condition e Format the style and content of the e mail message Table 41 Form fields Element Description Description Assign a unique title to this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made y NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button 76 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Alarm Selection tab The Alarm Selection tab lets you assign alarms in this operator s facility that trigger an e mail message Figure 22 Alarm Selection tab P Event Notifier e Description Tamper Facility Ignore Facilities v Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format Assigned Alarms 19581 00 01 Tamper Transaction Type Y Alarm V Reset Table 42 Form fields Element Description Assigned Alarms This windowpane displays any previously assigned alarms Assign Alarms Click to display the Alarm Assignment dialog box
500. rt Groups list Up Select a field and click to increase the priority of this field which determines how the groups are sorted Down Select a field and click to lower the priority of this field which determines how the groups are sorted Chapter 10 Reports Fonts tab The Fonts tab displays in all reports and is used to change the fonts on selected text in a report Note Be careful when selecting font styles and sizes Some styles may not display as desired when printed and some sizes may be too large for the page Use the Print Preview option to check how the font style and size prints on a page e Title To change the current font of the report title click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes Header Fields To change the current font of the report headings and or field descriptions within the report click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes e Group Fields To change the current font of the group headings click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes e Data Fields To change the current font of the report information click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes e Page Footer To change the current font of the report footer click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes The report footer contains the report title current system date and the page number
501. rticular operator e Facilities can be moved to the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate arrow e Facilities can be removed from the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate arrow Chapter 2 67 System preferences How to Review the guidelines in Table 36 and complete this tab Click Facility Assignment to display a list of facilities Assign those facilities that you want associated with this operator If you remove a facility from this operator record that facility now displays in the Available list Click OK to accept and close the Facility Assignment dialog box DAR wn Click Save before you exit this tab What s next Proceed to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 69 68 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 3 Schedules This chapter provides an overview of Facility Commander Wnx time event and mode schedule configuration In this chapter D d fics Shatin bie Pea e ete Pee te ee 70 Delne time SCHORR 00d a A ee 70 Define event schedules Micro only 0 0 0 0 0c eens 73 CONPIQUIE VERE ROUTE 66 6 bos ce han ae a a 75 Define mode schedules a a ae ca 80 Mode Event Trigger form 0 00 0 c cc enn nes 86 A cle leo cbse E E inten ha tea esate a sb oo E hacia 87 70 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview This chapter provides an overview of Facility Commander Wnx schedule configurations e The maximum number of combined schedules time event and mo
502. running when you attempt a backup of images signatures graphics or video You should back up this data more often since it changes so frequently While your internal policies may dictate your backup requirements we recommend that you create a backup at least every week Entire Installation of this application e The entire application folder should be backed up when you first set up the system and have confirmed that it is working and any time you upgrade It is very important that you also back up the registry settings In most backup programs you are prompted to back up these settings e Always maintain a current backup Should you have any problems with your system you can always restore from your backup Note Enterprise Edition systems use SQL Server utilities to back up the database History and Archive Professional Edition systems use the FCWnx Database Maintenance Utility to back up the Database History and Archive information tables and queries Archiving An archive is a history of transactions The archive is created automatically by this application based on the time interval that you selected on the Preferences form Daily Weekly or Monthly When you select Weekly you must also select a day of the week If you select e Daily The archive is appended every day beginning at 11 59 58 p m e Weekly The archive is appended every week on the day that you select beginning at 11 59 58 p m You must select a day
503. s Communications Clear Archive Security ACU Settings Earliest Date in Current Archive DB Latest Date in Current Archive DB Archive clean period October 2008 4 w October 2008 4w Sun Mon Tue wed 3 E Sun Mon ae Thu Fri Sat 2 13 j4 5 llos fo 5 fr fe fo 12 13 14 15 19 20 21 anun 26 27 28 29 30 a1 i 26 Press oar Start Date End Date Table 17 Form fields Element Description Earliest Date in Current Archive DB If you have an Archive database this date displays when you click Show Date Latest Date in Current Archive DB If you have an Archive database this date displays when you click Show Date Show Date If you have an Archive database click Show Date e The Earliest Date in Current Archive DB and Latest Date in Current Archive DB displays e If you do not have an Archive database the two date fields state No Record Archive Clean Period e Start Date Select the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by selecting the month and then the day to begin your archive End Date Select the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by selecting the month and then the day to end your archive Delete Click after selecting the Start Date and End Date to remove from your database Note Archive database deletion takes place in the background Progress is indicated on the status bar This may take hours to complete and is
504. s This is a multiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available controller alarm points not already assigned to a zone 24 7 4 State Supervision rules apply regardless of the armed disarmed state of the zone Readers This is a multiple record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available readers not already assigned to a zone Readers must be active and nonelevator type Azone can be configured to contain the following An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Alarm Points only and no Readers An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Readers only and no Alarm Points Alarm Points and Readers only with no Arm Disarm Intrusion Point Readers only Note An arm disarm DO can be assigned for any of these 4 A Status tab provides the ability to request status of the zone and each of its associated points as follows Zone Armed or Disarmed Arm Disarm Intrusion DI Active Inactive Trouble Readers Online or offline Alarm Points Monitored Off Monitored On Table 1 Task Quick Setup guide qs 17 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Access rights departments Application Group To complete the intrusion zone functionality you also need to complete the Access Right form Intrusion Zones tab 1 The Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form lets you assign multiple intrusion zones using an assignment
505. s continued Element Description Imaging Status Shows whether the client currently has Imaging capabilities e Enabled This client has Imaging capabilities that is you can capture design and print using this computer e Disabled This client does not have Imaging capabilities Connection Status Current status of the connection between the client and the server e Connected The client and server are communicating e Not Connected The client and server are not communicating Description Displays the description of the client Region This is a Global configuration and this is the name of the Region for this client Active Region This column displays an entry when a Regional database server has failed and a backup server is now hosting the database e The column displays the currently active Region e Following a recovery to the default host this column is blank File Server Hosting Display name of the file server that is hosting the database for this client Mode Displays the status of the Mode for this client Primary Com Port Displays the primary communications port used for CCTV serial interface Secondary Com Port Displays the secondary communications port used for CCTV serial interface Connection Information Licenses Used The number of clients currently connected to the server CCTV interface clients do not count against client licenses Client Licenses The total number of licenses authorized
506. s closed for an exit request Unlocks door Both Micro and ACU Select this check box if you want the door to unlock when an exit request button is pushed Follows extended unlock Micro only Select this check box if you want this REX to follow the time limits as configured for Extended unlock Report Real Time REX Status ACU only Select this check box if you want REX transactions to display in real time When the REX changes state it is reported on the Activity Monitor and in Credential History Extended auxiliary digital output Select an output from the drop down list of available digital output points This output follows the Extended unlock time configurations and must be on the same controller as this reader Link to this reader Micro only Note When configuring paired readers door contacts and the REX input points are the same Paired readers are used to control a door from both directions Use this field to link this reader to another reader on the same controller Select a reader from the drop down list Table 62 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Door Configuration ACU only Complete applicable selections in this grouping Relay Digital Output Select from the drop down list of available DO points This output operates the door strike for this reader The door strike DO is built into the unit The default is O e Default The DO number for the RRE
507. s configuration This field accepts 500 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field Figure 36 Comments tab e Description Facility Status Controller Configuration Controller Definition Security Time Zone How to Global Area Control Comments Events 1 Complete the comments field on this tab by placing your mouse cursor in the window and entering text from your keyboard 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 110 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Events tab Note The Events tab is enabled for systems with Micro controllers only Use the Events tab to assign events to this controller Figure 37 Events tab e Description amp Facility a J x Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Reset APB event A Reset TRA event El da lt Table 53 Form fields Element Description Reset APB Event Select an event from the drop down list of available event records that resets the anti passback status for all credentials in the controller Reset T amp A Event Select an event from the drop down list of available event records that resets the T amp A status for all credentials in the controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 53 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 111 Devices St
508. s field is now available to select a time schedule from the drop down list of previously created time schedules Note If you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an intrusion zone due to a schedule in that access right you are not able to arm disarm a zone How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 147 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Floor tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers The Floor tab lets you configure controls for elevators and floors by assigning them to access rights Figure 111 Floor tab tx Access Right eS Description 8 Facility v Assigned Elevators Assign Elevators Assigned Floors Assign Floors Table 148 Form fields Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Assigned Elevators This windowpane displays a list of the elevators assigned to the current access right Assign Elevators Click this button to display the Elevator Assignment dialog box and select from a list of elevators available for assignment by this operator If no elevators are listed check that the elevators have been configured on the Elevator form The Elevator Assignment window displays when you click Assign Elevators enabling you to select and assign an elevator association for this form Only elevators in the operators fa
509. s for points in global APB are performed at the host not ACU level e Local anti passback brings the function down to the ACU level The advantage is that anti passback will continue to work even the server goes offline e Timed anti passback will not allow the cardholder to re enter the same access point or reader for a user defined period 4 When an area record is modified and saved all related controllers are updated with the new configuration Note Before you can delete an area record 1 Access rights must be removed 2 Devices associated with this area must be removed 3 This area must be removed from the Area Control tab of the Person form as assigned for Arm Disarm Table 138 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters 240 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Element Description Facility A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made gt For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Area tab Use the Area tab to configure the area record Figure 104 Area tab eS Description Facility 4rea Reader Alarm Digital Output Enable APB Local Re Entry Timer min Enable SCIF SCIF Area Workstation Time schedule Arm Disarm by Time
510. s lit s 293 Criteria for using Mass Update Mode ooooooccococcoconcoro rr 294 Define credential dlidS es srssirirrsin ter iS tE EEE ENEE REEE a EE PEKEE ERE 295 Credential Alla ti cria dido 295 Create custom credential status oocoionsniriir a do ds 297 Create credential formats a da eed dis 298 Credential FOnMatte Dir serrer tek taemencaarerncaacwenniaane illa 299 Credential formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol 0 0 c ccc cece cence eens 301 What SEX AAA 302 Guard tours cedieron 303 OVETV IEW 2 oi A AAA A A TER E 304 Define guard tOUlS iio rodri A AA 304 Guard IU asi data 305 Define tour points siii A A A ned wie ames 307 Tour POUT LOD ani A tds 309 WINS NEKI ocio iii A e A A id vee ead 309 Monitor and COMO cadrrsrrrarard ra AAA 311 OVEFVIEW coviasosopita aria patata 312 Activity MONITOFING 6 0 ss ti A O ida 312 Activity Monitor Shot bc 316 Swipe OMA SHOW OPI AAA aid 317 Alarm MOnitoring vto adria irte 319 Using the Alani Monitor OM ii adela 321 Alarm Monitor OD aucraarae s eria Sik aan duane gaia ah aalalesdeiecna dewalt ese aa 323 Alarm Monitor shortcut MOR aii 323 Client MOnitoring ooo citan A A a EEEE EINER ear 325 Client Monitor toolbar satis 327 Client Monitor shortcut MENU 0 di A EA i iie 327 Controller Monitorings 2 304 aic 25 5c c8e nes Key ocd weet is suse See ice 328 COMMA FE OCINGS ita de 328 Controller Monitor toolbar sessir wane eacedele yeah a as 330 Search criteria dind controller sele
511. s to reach the controller via a dial up modem e Network Direct if this is a network controller When the network connection is not available communication fails over to the secondary direct connection and communication continues e Network Network if this is a network controller When the network connection is not available communication fails over to a secondary network communication through another IP address assigned on the Port Settings tab For ACU controllers only Using a device that converts IP protocol to serial communication your network communication is converted to serial protocol communication This product supports the Lantronix MSSLite device Note Dial Up and Network Dial Up Controllers If the host computer of this controller is licensed for Client Redundancy and has assigned a backup client a dialog box displays reminding you to complete the Client form by configuring telephone numbers for backup clients to reach this controller ACU Controllers Refer to Multi drop configuration ACU Controllers on page 99 for additional configuration details Table 50 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Host Keep Alive Enter or use the up and down arrows the number of seconds that the host waits before sending the next message to a controller Enter a number between 10 and 3600 In general you want a large number when you have many controllers on the same line or have
512. save the record 5 Click Save kd If you are unable to save or additional information is required a message displays informing you of the additional requirements in order to save this record Complete the additions or necessary changes and click Save again Editing records To edit a record 1 From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item and then click the appropriate tab For example the Personnel Person or Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty 2 From the tool bar click Search A record list window displays with all of the existing records or displays the results of search operations and lets you quickly navigate through the records found by a search Chapter 1 21 Introduction 3 Select a record from the list e Click a single record in the record list to select that record for editing The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next The field values display in the various tabs of the form e More than one row can be selected in order to change a value for multiple records at one time for example updating a Department value for all selected records Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record dragging the mouse and then releasing it on the last desired record Nonsequential rows may be added to the selection by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse
513. se The Recall Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Clear Search Click to clear a search The Clear Search option clears all data in the current form Use this option when the form has data and you want to begin a new search The option does not conduct a search nor does it affect any data in the database It only clears data from the form in preparation for a search or cancels a change to a record The Clear Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Table 5 Application Group pane Element Description Application Group Pane Personnel e Select any Application Group title in the Application Group pane to display the items in that group e Click on the X icon or right click and select hide in the Application Group title bar to hide the Application Group Pane To display it again select the View menu and then Application Group e Right click within a group to display a shortcut menu and select Large Icons or Small Icons default e The license that you purchase determines what items display For example if you are not licensed for guard tours the Guard Tours group does not display e The docked pane can be dragged to an alternative position on your application window Click to display items in the Personnel group The following selections display in the Personnel group pane e Person e Personnel Type e Department Crede
514. se server PC before diagnostics can run on client computers System Diagnostics Manager Diagnostics System Webservice System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts API Diagnostics System System Manager This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Question I shut down my license domain server cold boot My clients are reporting database errors that is they have lost their network connection Why This can occur when the network goes down for any purpose common examples hub loses power temporarily network cable cut or broken It is best to either have clients use the Client Monitor form to force users off or notify all clients to restart after a cold boot of the server is complete and after services have restarted on the license domain Question My services do not shut down What can I do Run the program spstop exe found in the FCWnx folder Click Start and then Run At the Run window click Browse and navigate to spstop exe Click Open to display the file name in the command line of the Run window and enter a11 The Run window now displays as follows Program Files GE FCWnx SPstop exe all Click OK to stop the services 400 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Question What should a normal startup of services look like in the logfile It should look similar to the following with the exception of machine name and machine encoded seed and con
515. sented In this chapter A oo a la UGA haa th RG hee Eo Pde ea He 304 Delne SHARE TOWT oak ooh nba ae ee oe awoke Ho aw edn oe ewe eae as 304 Deine tour POUND oi pira Yond dale a Maw tia Dhaai 307 What sneri oo ok ob Bb ohh we oh Sa a Gee wn Gee wee 309 304 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Note The guard tour feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers only A guard tour is an inspection of your facility premises made by a security officer at random intervals The officer stops at pre determined tour points along the way where a credential must be presented to a reader or hit a DI point so that the system can track the tour progress Each time the officer presents a credential to a reader a tour point is hit Define guard tours Note The Guard Tour form Guard Tours group is enabled if you are licensed for guard tour Also see the Manual Control form Guard tour tab on page 349 Conditions of the guard tour feature e Tour Point form must be configured before a guard tour record is configured Refer to Define tour points on page 307 e A guard tour must be configured before a physical tour can begin e All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region Refer to Global configuration regional rules on page 46 e Tour points can be both readers and DIs e The same credential must complete the entire tour A credential can only be assigned t
516. signment window displays when you click Assign Tour Credentials enabling you to select and assign tour credentials to a tour e Multiple credentials can be assigned to a guard tour but if a credential is assigned to a tour the same credential cannot be assigned to any other tours e The same credential must be used to complete the entire tour e When a credential is assigned to a guard tour the credential is downloaded to all controllers that have reader type tour points for that guard tour e If any reader is assigned as a tour point at least one credential must be assigned to the tour e If all tour points are Dis you do not need to assign a credential to the tour Click OK to display the results in the Tour Credentials windowpane Save e Click to save this tour record and simultaneously create a new alarm Guard Tour Max Time Exceeded e If you have not completed the required elements you cannot save How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 176 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define tour points Note This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Note The Tour Points form Guard Tours group is enabled if you are licensed for guard tour A guard tour is an inspection of your facility premises made by a security officer at random intervals The officer stops at pre determined tour points along the way where a credential must be
517. signs Video You should back up this data often since it changes so frequently We recommend that you create a backup at least every week 2 Back up entire Facility Commander Wnx installation Always maintain a current backup Should you have any problems with your system you can always restore your backup This includes your database as well as your files If you purchased your system from GE and then your system contains a CD drive acceptable for backup purposes In Microsoft Windows Explorer navigate to the Facility Commander Wnx program folder Copy the Facility Commander Wnx folder to your backup media Table 1 Quick Setup guide qs 21 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task Application Group This list assists in backing up databases in Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Note Although there are other methods we have included the following steps as a guide to assist you in performing one type of backup 1 From your Start menu navigate to Microsoft SQL Server 2005 2008 Server SQL Server Management Studio At the Connect to Server window verify that the Login and Password are correct and then click Connect Open the Databases folder Right click one of the databases and select Tasks and then Back up from the shortcut menu 4 When the Backup Database dialog box displays select Full In the Name field you can keep the default or choose a different name Under Destination choose Disk or Tape
518. sions for the current operator Chapter 9 347 Monitor and control Figure 145 Mode Threat tab EA Manual Control e Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas Zones Mode Threat Guard Tour Select Display Type Controllers O Clients Select All Controller Description Curent Mode Current ThreatLevelAccess State Controller Address Controller Type ACUXL 19581 Offline 19581 ACU Offline 18 Micro Set Mode to Set Threat Level Access to Normal Threat Level 0 Normal Apply Mode Apply Threat Level Access Purpose Table 199 Form fields Element Description Select Display Type Controllers Select to display real time description current mode and address of online controllers Clients Select to display real time current mode for configured Clients Set Mode to From the drop down list select one of the available modes to which you want to change e The Current Mode status as displayed in the list refreshes automatically following a change of mode by schedule or manual control e Updates for controllers display in the Mode column of the Controller Monitor form e Updates for clients display on the Client Monitor form Apply Mode Click Apply Mode to send the command to the controller or client Available modes include Normal Mode 1 Mode 2 and Mode 3 Modes are created and labeled on the Mode Threat Labels tab of the Preferences form 348 Fa
519. so thot a check displays Note If you have a modem installed for support use do not select that modem For systems using ACU controllers The modem must be a US Robotic Sportster modem at the host For systems using Micro controllers The modem must be a Star Comm modem or Hidex modem at the host Modems used with FCWnx must have a Windows modem driver If there is no modem matching what is currently on your system you must add the appropriate modem Note If the modem is already installed begin with Step 3 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel and then Phone and Modem Options 2 When the Options window opens click the Modems tab Click Add to open the Wizard You can allow Windows to detect your modem or select from a list of manufacturers Complete the windows to add your modem Exit the Wizard when finished 3 When you are returned to the Modem list of the Modem tab select the appropriate modem and click Properties e Inthe Properties window click the Modem tab Set the maximum port speed to 9600 Click OK 32 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 16 Form fields continued Element Description e For systems using ACU controllers In the Properties window click the Advanced tab In the Extra initialization commands field enter the following SMO amp KO amp N6 amp U6 e For systems using Micro controllers In the Properties window click the Advanced tab In the Extra initial
520. social security number This is a required field and the record does not save if the Employee number is left blank or if the number is not unique to this application The field accepts up to 12 alphanumeric characters Conversions only The following information addresses conversions During the process of converting a database the system checks for possible blank or duplicate employee numbers in the database Results of this check display on the Administration group Preferences form Open the form to display the Settings tab e Ifthe Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box is selected and unavailable all converted person records have unique employee numbers All future person records must have a unique employee number before the record can be saved e Ifthe Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box is not selected this is an indication that duplicate or blank employee number records exist in the database At this time you have the option to choose one of two preferences e Do nothing and continue to allow blank or duplicate employee numbers in person records the Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box remains clear e Seta control that requires all person records to have an entry in the Employee number field If you choose to require all person records to have a unique employee number select Enable unique amp required Employee Number 1 A message displays informing you The Employ
521. ss Report form that lets you create a report based on persons in this application that have access rights and to any of the specific areas Floor Access The Floor Access option opens the Floor Access Report form that lets you create a report based on the floors defined in the system and the access granted to each floor Area ACU only The Area report option opens the Area Report form that lets you create a report based on the secure area transactions in the system Alarm History The Alarm History option opens the Alarm History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of alarm activity Credential History Operator History Zone History Micro only DI History The Credential History option opens the Credential History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of credential transactions in the system The Operator History option opens the Operator History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of operator activity The Zone History option opens the Zone History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of intrusion zone transactions in the system The DI History option opens the DI History Report form that lets you create a report based on the history of digital input transactions in the system 17 18 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 9 Reports menu continued Element Description Guard T
522. ss wea ea ak a dees ak E 280 Design credential co A oh ER a Ce e 283 Credential Des SET TORE boi A EEE AG aw ead ws 284 a A 4 hae dna HER Hea weal da ae 4 286 WEE ERIE boone AAA Oe wae OR SOR Bn 293 Define credential olig cc s a haw ha enw ae ea ies See eds 295 Create CUSTOM credendi Status id ia 297 Create credential formal oore cect ee a HOM RK Eas 298 Hoo A E 302 258 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview We recommend that you complete the forms described in this chapter in the order presented The forms described in this chapter create access rights to define where with readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry Following the creation of access rights and departments you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image Define access rights Use the Access Right form Places amp Policies group to define where with readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry For Micro controller systems To define which floors a person can access and what digital output groups a person can trigger with a valid credential Note Floors and elevators are assigned to an access right Allow the ability to arm disarm an intrusion zone and access a particular Zone Intrusion zones can be assigned to an access r
523. ssign the digital outputs to them For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form all schedule records display Table 82 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Assign a unique title to this record Chapter 4 161 Devices Element Description Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Note If you assign DOs that belong to a different facility you may be creating an undesired result not all DOs are visible under certain facilities Group tab Use the Groups tab to assign digital outputs to a selected digital output group on a specified controller Figure 62 Group tab lt Digital Output Group eS Description Facility Group Schedule Number Controller v Digital Outputs Assign Digital Outputs Table 83 Form fields Element Description Number Displays the number assigned to the digital output group This field becomes read only after the record is saved This is a required field The number can be 1 64 for systems using Micro controllers and 1 255 for systems using ACU controllers Controller Displays the description of the contro
524. ssword v lt gt Table 116 Form fields Element Description Resolution From the drop down list select your video display resolution as Low 12K per image Medium 20K per image or High 28K per image Black and White Select if you choose to further reduce the size of images transmitted over the network for display purposes Video displays in black and white however the video remains locally stored on the DVR in its original recorded resolution and color settings Note This option is disabled for Sym and Visiowave recorders Max Search Time for Select or enter the number of seconds This selection is the length of time a search request for Recorded Events secs recorded video waits before timing out Search times may vary depending on network traffic DVR processing load and number of recorded events Video Standard Select PAL or NTSC e PAL Phase Alternating Line is a European TV standard NTSC National TV Standards committee is the U S TV standard administered by the FCC Note If your DVR is a GE Kalatel brand the video standard is auto detected How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 116 and complete the fields on this tab 212 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Perform a search select a DVR from the right list box and click Status Note The DVR must be online in order to display a Status pane Figure 92 Status t
525. st be set to Address 2 and so on Question What do I need to know about dial up connections Dial Up Troubleshooting Tips While some information is automatically saved to the logfile you can decide whether certain items ports lines controller or forms are sent to the logfile Select Diagnostic Setting from the Diagnostics group For more persistent problems this application provides an extensive diagnostic utility Diagnostic Viewer The Diagnostic Viewer application lets you view the diagnostic log file apply filters to view information and search for a specific log entry Diagnostic Viewer has its own Help system for additional information Your Diagnostic Viewer program Logfile indicates modem status by displaying one of two possible messages Message 1 The following modem is not functioning properly lt modem name gt Message 2 The following modem is functioning properly lt modem name gt Where lt modem name gt is the name of the modem such as Hayes Accura 33 6 Message 1 displays on the Logfile every 90 seconds following a period when the modem is not operating until the modem is available and operational again Verify the following e Selected modem on Preferences form is identical to the modem you want to use If the modem you want to use is not on the list of available modems you may have to reinstall the driver for the modem or select another modem Modem is turned on e Comm port connection is complete
526. st of available company codes as previously assigned on the ACU Settings tab ACU only of the Preferences form Note When you select a company code number the Card Number and Issue Number fields become available 287 288 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 167 Form fields continued Element Description Card Number ACU only This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card Issue Number ACU only This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This feature refers to magnetic stripe cards Enter or select a number that indicates the number of times that this card number has been issued to the credential holder A card may be re issued if the card is damaged reported lost or stolen The original issue of this card begins with 00 A card can be issued up to 99 times Number This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card If you are using credential aliasing The alias displays here as a read only number and cannot be changed An alias number is assi
527. st software running for days eventually memory is going to be filled up at the controller end The redundancy feature in FCWnx is designed to address this condition Clients can be configured to be backed up by other clients so that in case of the default hosting client called the primary client being disabled one of the backup clients takes over all its devices This is designed to work automatically without any operator intervention so the system continues to work efficiently One of the backup clients performs the role of the default client until the default client is back up and running The devices that can be taken over at present are all DVRs network controllers dial up controllers and network dial up controllers Direct controllers cannot be hosted by any other than the default client computer The table below assists you to find the areas in this manual that relate to the redundancy feature Table 29 Configuring client redundancy Element Description Configuring Client Redundancy Reference Topics Am Licensed for Client Redundancy Licensing on page 3 How do configure backup clients for redundancy Backup Clients tab on page 54 What controllers are supported Backup Clients tab on page 54 Assign Controller Phone s What are the limits on controllers and DVRs What is not permitted When a Failover Occurs Backup Clients tab on page 54 Backup Clients tab on page 54 Messages Displaye
528. start the hosting client s services Adding a controller in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then restart services on the remote client Mode Schedule form Yes Yes Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes Override form Yes Yes No action required Reader form No N A Time Schedule form Yes Yes Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes Tour Point form No N A All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region Replication and synchronization conflicts Conflicts with this application replication are rare but can occur A conflict occurs whenever two users in different Regions simultaneously update a field on an individual record or update a record at a Global database server computer and a Regional database server computer during synchronization Example Region 1 revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 5544 SW 8th St Region 2 revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 6544 SW 8th St 47 48 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual There are now two different values in the same field of the same records in two different regions Each region s scheduled SQL Server Merge Agent activates the merge process and the changes are sent to the Global server e If both updat
529. stem searches and displays results in the list box e All displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on all controllers e By Controller displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on a selected controller Click the drop down list to display a list of controllers Select DO type e If you select Reader the windowpane displays the DO points available for the readers e If you select Other the windowpane displays Aux DOs the two 2 DO relays available on a 2RP module and other DO points Example DO points include lights and sirens that may be connected to the controller e If you select Floor the windowpane displays the DO points available for the floors Table 196 Form fields continued Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description Columns in Windowpane Set state to Description Description of the reader DO in the database Controller Controller on which the reader DO is located On Time Displays the On Time in the database The On Time is the number of seconds this DO remains in the active state when activated Door Status Displays as Open Closed Cut or Short Reader DO Status Displays Locked or Unlocked if its a reader and ON or OFF if it is a DO Area ACU only The secure area associated with the controller SCIF Workstation ACU only If a SCIF area is assigned the name of the S
530. system Using the Controller Monitor form you have the capability to select sort and display only the controllers that you want to view and then save that view Column headings Default columns display Drag and drop capability lets you re arrange the columns You can also choose to display only a few columns NO For a shortcut menu to functions available within the Controller Monitor form select a controller from the list and right click Figure 139 Controller Monitor Controller Monitor Active Hostname Default Hostname Address State Status Connection Firmware version Comm device Head OF L Mode Threat Level Access INFRA_KEMPTON INFRA_KEM O Offline Idle Shutdown 7 5 14 10 40 254 60 Normal Threat Level O Normal HCACCESS HCACCESS Offline Idle Shutdown 7 5 14 172 16 50 9 Normal Threat Level O Normal HCACCESS HCACCESS Offline Idle O Shutdown 7 5 14 172 16 50 11 Normal Threat Level O Normal HCACCESS HCACCESS Offline Idle Shutdown 7 5 14 172 16 50 7 Normal Threat Level 0 Normal HCACCESS HCACCESS Offline Idle Shutdown 7 5 14 172 16 50 68 Normal Threat Level O Normal HCACCESS HCACCESS Offline Idle Shutdown 7 5 14 172 16 28 11 Normal Threat Level O Normal INFRA_KEMPTON INFRA_KEM Online Idle Connected 7 0 00 10 40 254 Normal lt Not Supported gt Table 190 Form fields Element Description Description The Description is assigned to the controller when defined on the Co
531. t available Figure 125 Design tab Credential Designer e Description GE Landscape Facility Ignore Facilities be Design Select default layout O Portrait O Landscape Select import layout Import Layout C Program Files GE FC Wns Designs Landscape dgn Table 165 Form fields Element Description Select one of the following Select Default Layout Select a credential default layout as Portrait or Landscape Select Import Layout Select to make available the option to Browse to the designs folder and import an existing design If you have already chosen a default layout this option is unavailable Save Click to enable the Edit Credential Design button Edit Credential Design Click to open the credential designer program that lets you draw the graphics that comprise the credential design If you had a previous version of credential designer that created files with a gdr extension you are prompted to save the file as a dgn when you edit a credential design for the first time Access the extensive Help system from the Credential Designer toolbar Additionally refer to the Credential Designer User Manual and review the What s New section A PDF file of the manual is provided on your documentation CD How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 165 and complete the fields on this tab e Each workstation where credential design or credential printing is to be p
532. t be associated with controllers within the same Region e Tour points can be readers or Dis that are not on a dial up controller 1 If a reader is selected as the start point Dis not assigned to a tour display in this list 2 DI points can only be assigned to one tour 3 Reader tour points can be assigned to any tour and any number of tours A reader as a tour point can be re used e The number of points assigned to a tour is limited to 64 e If any reader is assigned as a tour point at least one credential must be assigned to the tour e If all tour points are Dis you do not need to assign a credential to the tour Click OK to display the results in the Tour Points windowpane Move Up Select and click to move this Tour Point up the list This tour point order displays on the Manual Control form Guard Tour tab Move Down Select and click to move this Tour Point down the list This tour point order displays on the Manual Control form Guard Tour tab Tour Credentials Displays a list of assigned tour credentials At least one credential must be assigned to a tour Chapter 8 Guard tours Table 176 Form fields continued Element Description Assign Tour Credentials e Click to display a Credential Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign credentials to this tour e If a reader is assigned as a tour point a credential must be assigned before this guard tour record can be saved The Credential As
533. t host any controllers or DVRs Does not have any API connections Is not a Thin Client Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own Is not a CCTV client Is not hosting a guard tour SOY moe po p e Client form Enable Auto Shutdown is selected Chapter 1 Introduction Licensing controls the number of computers that can host FCWnx sessions If a particular client is shut down that license is now available for another client computer to be designated an FCWnx client and run the FCWnx application If not all clients require a license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers Simple File Sharing on WinXP Simple File Sharing is a feature in Windows XP that removes file sharing security options available in other versions of Windows This setting must be disabled for FCWnx to operate successfully between servers and clients Once the user sets the permission the user and clients have access to shared files and the ability to assign passwords to shares To disable folder shares 1 Double click My Computer on the Windows XP Desktop 2 From the Tools menu select Folder Options to open a Folder Options window 3 Click the View tab and locate the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box in the list of Advanced Settings 4 To disable Simple File Sharing ensure this check box is not selected Select the check box to disable the option The Simple File Sharing chec
534. t only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com Contents Preface ii iaa nee ae es xi Conventions used in this manual 1 2 0 2 cece cece eee eee eee eee e tenet nee eee n eens xi Safety terms and SYMDOIS ssi5 656ccie seca ntwaes na a e pde xi Navigating POF fille comicos ccave de sede Veer a A di be it beads xi Related documentations as disecenwds cuesaerene a A xii RN NR xii QUESOS lt ice 30 es nase aE EO IS 1 How to accomplish frequently performed tasks cece cece cece eee eee e ence rr 1 How to configure a system in recommended sequential order cece eee e eee e eee eeeeees 2 How to accomplish administrator tasks cece cece eee cece eee eee e eee eee eeeeeeenes 22 How to accomplish operator tasks cece ccc eee n eee nent ee ee eee eee eeenes 26 Chapter 1 Introduction cc ccc ccc cece ce eee eee e rc 1 OVCIWVIEW di A AS eee Nee ee Desi eased a EY 2 Professional Editio Matsa sien acacia au seh A A SS A lidad 2 Enterprise ECU OM sanan dla a cele id SIRS EAA A Ea da 2 GlOBOl Editio Neses ner s VEE S E ate O E A 2 Product CONTENTS oi A a a iia 3 Before you begin configuration 0 cece cece cence eee nen rr rr 3 LicensiNOi imc is tama EE a 3 Client server architecture comoda di EEEE evades cetera ncevedaneay ed
535. t to review the messages generated to an IntegrityCheck html file in your application Logs folder Review the file to determine if database errors were detected Click Close to close the window and exit Note The Replication tab applies to systems that have Global configuration installed We recommend that you call GE Security Customer Support for assistance in setting the preferences for the Global configuration database replication Question Why did my services shut down unexpectedly The log reports with a message Database is down This indicates a problem with connectivity to the database In order not to lose any transactions FCWnx saves all credential and alarm messages by writing them to a file and read the file back in when the services start up again Correct the connectivity problem with the database and restart services Question Why is performance sluggish and why does it seem to hang The Windows Task Manager indicates an excessive level of memory usage The diagnostic log indicates Server is too busy to complete operations or Too many resources are allocated SQL Server can be configured to use a fixed amount of memory or to dynamically adjust the amount of memory based on demand We recommend that you set the SQL Server memory as follows SQL Server Management Studio 1 On the selected server computer click Connect and wait as the Server Management Studio opens Select and then right click the FCWnx data
536. te If you change your controller passwords you must enter the changed passwords in FlashTool by typing over the existing entries As you enter the password in FlashTool the characters are replaced by asterisks to ensure the security of the host access system This only applies to PX and PXN Micro controllers and does not apply to PXNPlus or DirecDoor Micro controllers Table 51 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Communication Encryption This feature lets you configure additional security encryption that scrambles data into an unbreakable code for public transmission Encryption protects the Host to controller exchange of information The Host uses the Exchange Key to send the Data Key to the controller Once the Data Key is received the Host to controller communication is encrypted using that key Enable Encryption This check box is available only for head of line network network dialup network direct and network network controllers Note This check box and all selections in the Communication Encryption grouping are not available on downstream controllers Weak encryption implies that the key could be unscrambled with a realistic amount of processing capacity and within a reasonable amount of time In FCWnx a message displays informing you that an assigned key is too weak and therefore invalid Corrections must be made before the record can be saved We recommend entering 48 u
537. te if zone is currently armed this update disarms and rearms with your new configuration Do you want to continue If you select Yes the new configuration saves to the database If you select No your changes are not saved 252 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 143 Form fields Element Description Facility A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Intrusion Zone tab The Intrusion Zone tab lets you edit or create an intrusion zone record and associate DI DO and devices such as readers and alarms in the operator s selected facilities Figure 108 Intrusion Zone tab Intrusion Zone e Description Facility Intrusion Zone Status Number Controller Arm Disarm DO Arm Disarm DI Devices Last Status Date Time Status Assigned Readers Assign Readers Assigned Alarms Arm Delay sec Arm Delay Table 144 Form fields Element Description Number Assign and enter a number for the intrusion zone between 1 and 96 Duplicate numbers are allowed but not on the same controller Controller Select a controller from the drop down list of available controll
538. ted by computers in their same time zone The hosting computers synchronize their DVR clocks at the interval selected as well as immediately manage any system date and time changes including daylight savings time Select one e None default e 1 Hour e 4 Hours e 8 Hours e 12 Hours e 24 Hours If DVRs are required to be synchronized with the system for this application date and time clock 12 Hours is a recommended setting for most systems How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 115 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 5 211 Video Video Display tab Select the Video Display tab to set up your DVR video window display options These options are configurable per DVR and are intended for optimizing system performance based on your network bandwidth and computing hardware This application can be configured to request and process video from DVRs in reduced resolution and color for display purposes while the video remains locally stored on the DVR in its original recorded resolution and color settings All video is transmitted over the network in a compressed Wavelet format Figure 91 Video Display tab Digital Video Recorder Description Facility v Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status Resolution Medium i C Black amp White Max Search Time for Recorded Events 158 secs A Video Standard Username O PAL ONTSC Pa
539. tem A language must be selected prior to saving the operator s record e Multiple language logins are supported without having to restart the application Log out and log back in as the new operator There is a slight delay in bringing up this application main menu since the new language Help files must be copied to the main directory This application along with the Help files display in that operator s language e Any data entry done after the operator s login is in the operator s language For example when adding a controller all the attached device descriptions are in the operator s language e There are several areas that are not translated such as certain Windows messages and certain parts of the reporting functions e Ifa particular language is not provided by GE Security the installation takes place in English and the application runs in English Facilities tab Use the Facilities tab to assign facilities to an operator Figure 19 Facilities tab Table 36 Form fields amp Operator e Facility y gt Operator Facilities Assigned Facilities Assign Facilities Element Description Assigned Facilities Assign Facilities This list displays the facilities assigned to the current operator Click to display the Facility Assignment dialog box that lets you assign facilities to this operator Facility Assignment This dialog box lists the facilities available for assignment to this pa
540. ters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the areas displayed select the area to arm 3 Select ON 4 Reader display indicates Area Secured Disarm 1 The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the areas displayed select the area to arm 3 Select OFF 4 Reader display indicates Area Unsecure auto update Use this form to configure your network computer for this application for automatic notification and installation of the latest quick fixes and service packs This feature must be coordinated with your IT Department They may have certain procedures restrictions or security policies in place backup A backup is a copy of selected data Since this application does not contain a backup option you can use any method you like to back up the data Refer to Backing up data on page 34 calendar Select the day month and year such as the controls of credential issue return or expiration Click OK to accept the selected date displayed and close the form Click Cancel to close the Calendar form without making any changes Click None to clear the date currently in the field CARC demo mode The cardholder auxiliary relay control CARC feature allows relays to be fired after a successful card read based on the cardholder s Area fo
541. th other types of modules For example if you add an RRE1 module additional modules can be RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 and RREIKE deleted Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you must click Save for the appropriate records to be generated or How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 55 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Select and then drag the Modules to the Configuration window 3 If you receive an error message for a violation evaluate your selections and add the appropriate modules for your configuration 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 115 Devices Global Area Control tab Note The Global Area Control tab is enabled for systems with ACU controllers only This tab is only used for the PIN mode of area control The Global Area Control tab lets you assign previously defined areas to an ACU controller Figure 40 Global Area Control tab a e Description Facility Ignore Facilities he Controller Definition Security TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Port Settings Global Areas for Keypad Arm Disarm Table 56 Form fields Element Description Global Areas for Keypad Arm This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned areas Disarm Assign Area Click this button to display the Global Area Control Assignment dialog box A list of available areas displays enabling you to select an
542. that you are configuring Also see e Credential and PIN type reader on page 128 e Credential or Keypad reader on page 129 e Normal type reader on page 129 e Door Functions tab on page 129 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Keypad alarm shunting Note This feature applies to Micro controllers only The keypad alarm shunting feature lets you turn the monitoring of a group of alarms off or on using the keypad This can also be accomplished by setting up a schedule for an alarm group using a time schedule Note Only reader module door inputs and 20D module input points can be shunted from a keypad e To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 Reader e To identify a 20DI module input point look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 DL Credential and PIN type reader Note Only reader module door inputs and 20D module input points can be shunted from a keypad To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 Reader To identify a 20DI module input point look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 DI Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a controller connected to a credential and PIN reader 1 Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model
543. that lets you select specific alarms that trigger e mail notifications Click OK and the selected alarms display in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Alarm Assignment dialog box This window displays a list of alarms in the FCWnx system for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Transaction Type Select one or both transaction types that trigger an e mail alarm notification e Alarm E mail notification is sent at onset of the alarm e Reset E mail notification is sent when an alarm is reset By default no type is selected when you create a new Event Notifier record A transaction type must be selected in order to save this record How to 1 Review Table 42 and assign alarms that are to trigger e mail notifications 2 Select one or both Transaction Type options 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 3 Schedules Person Selection tab The Person Selection tab lets you assign people available in this operator s facility that receive an e mail notification of the alarm reset condition Figure 23 Person Selection tab FR Event Notifier e Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format Descri
544. the controller back online e Indefinite Unlock The door is put into an unlock state Schedules cannot override the current state e Lock The door locks and valid credentials can unlock the door Auxiliary DO Actions Active Inactive e On Indefinite The DO is put into active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller e Off The DO is put into the inactive state indefinitely Schedules can override this state on a controller On for Duration The DO is put into the active state for the duration defined Schedules can override this state on a controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 72 and complete the fields on this tab Note Be aware that Invalid Credential alarms and Lost Credential alarms do not reset If you assign a DO Group to either of these alarms the alarm goes inactive or turns off when acknowledging or purging 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Schedule tab Note Ifthe DI type is Alarm it is configured on the Alarm form The Schedule tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input tab Use this tab to assign a schedule Time schedules define intervals which include a start and an end time for different days of the week and modes Figure 55 Schedule tab Digital Input e Description Facility Y Time schedule A y O Enable O Disable Chapter 4 151 Dev
545. the drop down list associated with this operator 6 Using the guidelines in Table 35 complete the Facility Commander Wnx Password Authentication grouping or remove the selection and complete the Active Directory Password Authentication Click Save before you exit this tab Multiple language support Some items you should note about national language support English is the default language and is always installed The Windows operating system should be installed for the specific language chosen for this application For example if you are running this application in Spanish Windows Spanish should be installed This application starts in the language of the operating system For example if Windows Spanish is installed this application starts in Spanish Initially there is only one operator provided with the system an English language operator with the login ID of secure and a password of SecurityMaster08 case sensitive The very first login to this application must be done under this operator If the operating system is in a language other than 65 66 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual English there is a slight delay in bringing up this application main menu since the English Help files must be copied into the main directory e To set up a different language operator you must go to the Operator form and add an operator with the desired language A combo box on the operator form lists the available languages for the sys
546. the right that is no longer required and is not assigned to an existing guard tour If this is a Global configuration points that display are limited to the active Region Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description for this tour point Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Tour Point tab Configure a reader or digital input You cannot save this record until you have completed the Tour Point tab NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Chapter 8 309 Guard tours Tour Point tab A tour point can be a reader or digital input You must select one option before you can save this point record Figure 133 Tour Point tab Y Guard Tour Point e Description A Facility v Tour Point O Reader is O O Digital Input v 4 lt Table 178 Form fields Element Description Reader If you selected Reader this field is available Select a reader from the drop down list of available readers Note When reader records are created we recommend that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix and add text to the description field A complete and accurate reader description aids in assigning the reader points from this drop down list Digital Input I
547. the system are automatically preceded with a 1 if this is the first Region 2 if this is the second Region and so on e If this is a Global configuration the credential alias number is preceded by the Region ID number that uniquely identifies the Region Therefore the same alias number can be assigned across regions because the number is uniquely identified by the Region ID 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 297 Access rights departments persons and credentials Create custom credential status The Custom Credential Status form Credentials group lets you create custom credential status definitions that more closely describe active valid or suspended invalid credential transactions When assigning a credential this status displays in the drop down list of the Credential Definition tab Credential form When the credential is swiped this custom status displays on the Activity Monitor and the credential status displays in reports Example 1 An employee is suspended for a week pending investigation following a disagreement with a Manager The credential is assigned a status of Suspended A custom credential definition One Week Suspension was created and assigned to this credential During the week the employee attempts to enter the building The credential holder presents the credential at a reader The transaction displays on the Activity Monitor as One Week Suspension Access is denied Exa
548. this option is not selected the Held Open timer starts counting as soon as the door opens and the timer expires even if the REX stays activated with the door open At the end of the time period a Held Open alarm is generated Extend Held Open REX Toggle If the REX is pressed or released toggled before the Held Open timer completes its countdown the timer restarts until the REX is released long enough for the timer to expire If this option is not selected the Held Open timer starts counting down as soon as the door opens and expires even if the REX is released and reactivated Table 68 Form fields continued Element Description Door Lock Options Keypad Readers Chapter 4 Devices Select one or both of these options Enable Lock Monitor This selection indicates if this reader uses door strikes equipped with Lock Monitor switches If this option is not selected the reader does not monitor the lock Enable Magnetic Lock Bond Sensor This feature makes special provisions for compatibility with Bond Sensor outputs of Locknetics mag locks If this option is not selected this door does not use the lock sensor Note This feature is only supported on readers controlled by ACU2 controllers using the RRE Reader module It should only be used with the Locknetics Model 101ATSDSMMBS Magnetic Lock or approved equivalents IKE Readers e Basic Keypad Display Functions When this option is selected the reader displays a 3
549. those that were previously configured and not currently assigned e This output does not communicate if offline This section displays for systems configured with ACU controllers Output Control Note This digital output will activate only on an Alarm Active state It will not activate on Trouble Tamper state Cut or Short Available Output Windowpane Select from the Available list those outputs that you want to assign to this record The outputs that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Selected Output Windowpane The outputs that display are those that are currently assigned to this record Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an available output Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list If no time schedule is assigned None will be selected by default Link Only If Offline The default of this check box is not selected and this link functions during the time schedule regardless of the status of the digital input If selected the link between the digital input and output relay functions only when the controller is offline This output relay does not function during the selected time schedule Use this when multiple relays are to be linked to a single input Ignore Disabled State If selected the output relay triggers even when the digital input
550. tial Designs Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 283 1 Click the Credentials group 2 Click the Credential Design icon 3 Click the add icon Eto begin a new record and enter a unique Description and then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application Select New from Imaging File menu Proceed to design your credential Click Save Create Access Rights Create Person Records Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 258 1 Click the Places Policies group 2 Click the Access Right icon 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the type of controllers in your system Following the creation of access rights create departments 5 Now you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records Refer to Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 269 1 Click the Personnel group 2 Click the Person icon 3 Create a record of an employee s personal information Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image Select the Photo tab on the Person form Select one of the records in the
551. tial does not grant access Max Invalid PIN Max Invalid PIN Count is active on this reader and the number of invalid credential counts has reached the maximum as configured on the Reader form Reader tab The credential did not grant access and the credential is suspended The following are Intrusion Zone and Area activities e Armed By reader DI manual control or ACU by inactivity e Disarmed By reader DI manual control or ACU by inactivity e Arm Disarm Failed Not An alarm is in alarm state Device or credential transaction failed Secure e Arm Disarm Failed Time No credential transaction The 10 second time period allowed for completion of the arm Expired disarm process at keypad and reader has expired For ACU controller systems this is a 30 second time period but can be modified Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Intrusion Zone Area not assigned to access right or is invalid Access Right e Arm Disarm Failed Not in Reader is not assigned to the zone area Zone Area The following are guard tour activities Micro only e Tour Started Security officer has started a guard tour Table 179 Form fields continued Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description Tour Ended Security officer has completed a guard tour All tour points have been hit e Tour Started Manually A guard tour was started manually at the control station and not by presenting a credential
552. tic Viewer application is a diagnostic tool used in conjunction with this application Diagnostic Viewer lets you view the contents of the application diagnostic log files apply filters to limit the information displayed and search for a specific log entry Each day this application writes messages to a diagnostic log file There is a default log file created for each day of the week such as FcWnxFriday sp1 This file is overwritten each week thus creating a new log for that day During normal operation informational as well as debug messages are written to the daily log file Under abnormal conditions the log file may also contain warning and or fatal messages indicating failure conditions Diagnostic Viewer operates in real time That is every time this application writes an entry to the log file Diagnostic Viewer automatically displays the latest message By default Diagnostic Viewer displays only the latest 1000 messages The number displayed can be changed on the Preferences form Select this option to set options for the program such as automatically opening the current day s default log file Figure 151 Diagnostic Viewer Diagnostic Viewer FCWNXMONDAY SPL DER B 10 13 08 Menus 07 18 27 07 18 27 07 18 28 07 18 28 07 18 28 07 19 53 07 19 53 07 19 53 07 19 53 07 19 54 07 19 54 07 20 37 07 23 11 07 23 11 07 23 15 07 24 06 07 25 37 07 27 50 07 27 50 07 27 50 0 Module INFRA KEMP INFRA KEMP I
553. ties are available for assignment by this operator Selected Digital Outputs Windowpane The outputs that display are those that are currently assigned to this alarm record Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an available output Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list e None is selected by default e If there are none listed create a time schedule on the Time Schedule form Link Only If Offline If selected the link between the alarm and output relay functions only when the controller is offline Ignore Alarm Monitor State If selected the output relay triggers even when the alarm that has the digital output is not monitored 171 172 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 69 Alarm Digital Output Assignment dialog ACU display shown Alarm Digital Output Assignment i Digital Output Digital Out Time Sche Link Only I lt Time Schedule lt None gt Y Link Only If Offline Ignore Alarm Monitor State How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 91 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab DO Groups tab Use the DO Groups tab to link digital output groups to an alarm When this alarm is triggered the linked digital output groups are also triggered The digital outputs follow the settings selected under either Reader DO Actions or Auxiliary DO Actions If you selected a primary loc
554. tifying and installing the latest FCWnx Quick Fixes and service packs on your FCWnx computers This feature must be coordinated with your IT Department as there may be certain company procedures restrictions or security policies that must be followed Items needed To publish an update three things are needed 1 FCWnx patch update install file 2 FCWnx readMe file that goes with the installation optional 3 The FCWnx ini file that is the update file for WiseUpdate The update file is a text file that needs to be manually created with the name FCWnx ini See the next section for instructions on creating the file Creating the FCWnx ini file Use the following format WiseUpdate Version 7 5 1 Size 1095391 Install http www myserver com updates FCWnx751 exe ReadMe http www myserver com updates ReadMe txt Where version is the version of installation that is available on the server Size is the size of the installation in bytes Install is the URL to the installation of the patch upgrade and ReadMe is the URL to the installation s ReadMe file If you don t have a ReadMe file the ReadMe line is omitted from this file Placing the files 1 With the help of your IT department determine which network computer on which you will place the installation file ReadMe file and FCWnx ini file While we recommend that you place all three files in the same place on the same server you can place the installation file and ReadMe at any
555. time before FCWnx transactions are saved FCWnx services shut down and a message advises you to repair your database Retry The default is 3 retries The minimum is 0 the maximum is 5 retries Photo Aspect Ratio Select or enter a number for the height and the width The aspect ratio controls the relationship between the height and width of the photos This setting controls the photos displayed in the Capture program on the Person form and in the Credential Designer program Console alarm sound Continuous Short Select Continuous to sound a continuous tone when alarms are detected Select Short to sound a short tone when alarms are detected Enable global T amp A Select this check box if you want the entry status either IN or OUT for all credentials using T amp A readers to be sent to and enforced by all controllers Disabling the check box requires each controller to enforce T amp A independently Enable global APB Select this check box if you want the entry status either IN or OUT for all credentials using anti passback readers to be sent to and enforced by all controllers Disabling the check box requires each controller to enforce anti passback on readers within each controller Enable unique amp required Employee Number Selected and unavailable by default This check box is only available after converting and upgrading a previous database This feature enforces assignment of unique and requ
556. tion When a hosting client is communicating to multiple ACU controllers that are further than 50 Ft 15 m then RS 485 must be used The installer must connect a RS 232C to RS 485 converter The maximum overall length of this cable is 4 000 feet from the converter to the last ACU in the string not the head of line With the Multi drop serial settings additional panels must be configured in the controller settings with the same COM Port as the Head of Line panel Figure 32 Controller Definition tab Description MicroPXNPlus2000 a Facility Ignore Facilities v Controller Configuration Global Area Control Port Settings Controller Definition Security TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller type MPx2000 v Hardware address 22 Description address 3 roll Head of line O No O Yes Connection type Host keep alive seconds Direct v 30 El Host computer Default hostname INFRA_TECHWRITE v Credential loading Polling Force Additional poll delay ms O Leam a Exit request debounce Y Report real time digital output status DI Alarm termination type Keypad PIN Keypad extended unlock pre alarm Local keypad command code 10 to 99 v Table 50 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Controller Type Select the controller you are configuring from the drop down list FCWnx operates with the following controller types Micro Controllers e Micro 5
557. tivity is manual control the operator name displays e If this credential is a guard tour credential the name of the person displays e If this hit is a DI point this field is blank Number e Ifthe credential is unknown or not assigned to a person the credential number or if aliasing is used the credential alias number is displayed e Otherwise this field is blank Reference e If this is an elevator reader Valid Floor or Invalid Floor displayed in the field this field displays the floor selected e If this is a guard tour the guard tour description displays e If Max Invalid PIN Count displays in the activity type then Credential Suspended displays here e For any other activity type this field is blank e ACU only Access logging information codes display The Activity Monitor form toolbar consists of the following options 315 316 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 180 Form fields Element Description Resume Resume or restart the scrolling of credential transactions This icon is active only if you clicked Pause All credential transactions display that occurred while the Pause option was on once you select resume Pause This option pauses or suspends the scrolling of credential transactions on the Activity Monitor form Clear Clear all credential transactions Reader List Display an Edit Readers List dialog This selection is empty by default When the selection is
558. to 1 Review the fields on this tab This is a read only windowpane in two column format 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data Controller Configuration tab Use the Controller Configuration tab to assign the appropriate modules to this controller Note Before continuing verify that the controller type is correct The modules that display in the Modules column depend on the type of controller you have selected Figure 39 Controller Configuration tab e Description ACUXL A Facility Ignore Facilities Y Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Global Area Control Port Settings Modules ACUZXL Configuration g s 5 9 A El J 19581 00 ACU RIM 19581 00 01 Tamper 2 19581 00 02 Power 19581 00 03 Low Battery ARE 1951 00 00 Aux DI 19581 00 01 Aux DI 19581 00 02 Aus DI ne 19581 00 03 Aux DI E 19581 00 04 Aux DI RRE4 19581 00 05 Aux DI 19581 00 06 Aus DI E 1951 00 07 Aux DI 3 RREIKE 19581 00 08 Aux DI gt 19581 00 09 Aux DI gt 19581 00 10 Aux DI RRM 19581 00 11 Aux DI 19581 00 00 Aux DO Relay 19581 00 01 Aux DO Relay vi a I Table 55 Form fields Element Description Lists all modules supported by this application and the controller type you have selected To add a module to the current controller record click and drag to the Con
559. to Define alarm groups on page 179 Configure digital outputs Refer to Define digital outputs on page 154 Configure digital output groups Refer to Define instructions on page 163 Configure elevators Refer to Define elevators on page 193 Configure DVRs Refer to Define digital video recorders on page 204 Configure cameras Refer to Define cameras on page 215 12 13 14 15 Start controller communications Refer to Client monitoring on page 325 Verify client configurations Refer to Identify and configure clients on page 49 After creating schedules return to the applicable device records and assign schedules If your system is using ACU controllers you must assign devices to an area Refer to Define areas on page 238 In case of a default host computer that has failed devices that have been added to the default host computer during the failover cannot come on line until the default host has recovered and a system recovery notification is received Controllers overview Note Controller records can be created within FCWnx without having the controllers attached and configured Additional device records can be configured after creating controller records Controllers manage access through the use of devices such as credential readers alarm points and output points physically wired to the controller which are then connected to the host by one of the following methods Directly Using RS 232 cabling through a modem Throug
560. to assign as the primary If you select an output this output must belong to the local controller If the controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO is triggered If the ON time on the Digital Output form is set to 00 this DO remains active until the digital input is reset Output B Selected Outputs Windowpane Click the drop down list to select an available DO The digital outputs in this list can be on a local controller or other controllers If Output B is local it will trigger However if Output B is on another controller it is activated only if the host is online and able to communicate with that controller This output does not communicate if offline Output Control ACU only Note This digital output will activate only on an Alarm Active state It will not activate on Trouble Tamper state Cut or Short Displays a status of assigned digital outputs Assign button ACU only Click the Assign button to display the Alarm Digital Output Assignment dialog see Figure 69 Here you can select digital outputs to assign to a Time Schedule for this alarm Available Digital Outputs Windowpane Select from the Available list those digital outputs that you want to assign to this alarm record The outputs that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only outputs in the operator s facili
561. to select it Selecting this option reloads the original image Design credentials Complete the Credential Designer form Credentials group to create credential designs Credential designs are the graphics printed on credentials You may want to use different graphics for different types of personnel such as a specific graphic for regular employees and a different graphic for contract employees within your organization Note The Credential Design application has an extensive Help system to assist in designing your credential layout import graphics link designs to credentialholder information and add barcodes or encode magnetic stripes This section is an abridged summary of the credential design process To create your own credential design 1 Select Credential Designer from the Credentials group The Credential Designer form Design tab displays 2 Click Add and enter a unique Description and then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled 284 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 3 Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application 4 Select New from the Imaging File menu 5 Draw a shape in your design window the size of your credential 6 Fora background color select Edit Background and then select a color from the Color dialog that displays 7 Add one or several bitmaps inside the credential design preferences 8 Add one or several text boxes 9 Move or resize the photo and
562. to this credential This credential does not grant access The Activity Monitor displays the user defined custom credential format in the Activity Type column Example 1 On the Custom Credential Status form a status of Pregnancy leave is created and assigned a Status of Suspended 2 Jane Doe goes on leave and her credential is assigned a Status of Pregnancy leave as selected from the Credential form Status drop down list 3 While on leave Jane swipes her badge at a valid reader Access is denied 4 The Activity Monitor Activity Type column displays Pregnancy leave Add Click to add to the list box following creation of a new definition Update Click to update a definition Delete Click to delete a selected credential status definition from the list You are not able to delete a credential status that is currently assigned to a credential Help Click to access the Help system Cancel Click to close this form without making any changes How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 172 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Create credential formats Note If you experience difficulty with the Credential Format form contact GE Customer Support for assistance The Credential Format form Credentials group allows an operator to do the following e Import or export custom credential records in a Wiegand or magnetic stripe format into the controllers on your system e
563. transactions Credential History Generates reports on credential transactions Operator History Generates reports on operator actions relating to operations on FCWnx forms Zone History Micro only Generates reports on intrusion zone transactions DI History Generates reports on digital input transactions Guard Tour History Micro only Generates sets of guard tour activities containing start points hits invalid points pauses resumes tour end points and tour time exceeded Time amp Attendance History Micro only Generates reports on the number of hours employees were at a facility Area History ACU only Generates reports on secure Area transactions and activity Roll Call Provides a list of the last access granted to any or all persons in the system that is who last went where based on individual credential activity External Reports The External Reports option opens the FCWnx Crystal Reports folder from which either Reader Where When Report or Who has Access Report can be selected Chapter 10 355 Reports Designing reports Template defined The Template drop down list on the report forms displays the name of the currently loaded template if there is one To load select from the drop down list of the available templates and load the details to the form Report templates are useful when you run a certain report frequently After you select a report it can be saved as a template and revised by loading it f
564. trollers that may show up in the log The following sample startup script displays a sequence of key events in the startup process Note in bold SYSTEM SERVICE STARTED STARTING MANAGER SERVICE etc Video Question What can I do when a video session does not launch If you select Video Console from the Application toolbar or in the Monitors amp Controls Group of the Application Group pane and a video session does not open 1 Review your diagnostic log file entries for errors or warnings Refer to Diagnostic settings on page 376 2 You may have to restart your computer to restart your FCWnx services Customer Support Note If you require assistance first contact your local Business Partner To contact GE Security use the following numbers and addresses e Telephone United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287 Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 305 593 4301 Be ready at the equipment before calling e Web Site www gesecurity com e Support rs bctsupport ge com Note Check the Web site periodically for timely information on all GE Security products Appendix B Certifications This appendix provides information about certifications for a UL Listed system In this appendix P a a cnn ee een ep atk dale p ot E 402 TECNICA a 402 402 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Overview Your installation must adhere to the requirements listed in the Certific
565. trusion zone The reader cannot be assigned to an elevator Click Assign Readers to display a dialog box that enables you to assign active readers The Reader Assignment window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Assigned Alarms This list box displays a list of intrusion alarms in the same zone not already assigned on the selected controller This cannot be an external DVMR or a logical such as Host Comm or Lost Credential alarm Click Assign Alarms to display a dialog box that enables you to assign alarms This is an optional assignment The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of alarms in the system for this application for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Arm Delay sec How to Arm Delay Enter the number of seconds to delay the arming of this intrusion zone This field accepts up
566. ty A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 188 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Definition tab The Definition tab lets you configure the routing of alarms to selected client groups according to a schedule or at all times Additionally you can select client groups and set a time to bump the alarm to an additional location e You can configure both Routing and Bumping only a Routing record or only a Bumping record e client groups can be part of any Region in a Global configuration Figure 81 Definition tab Routing and Bumping e Description Facility v Definition Alarms Routing Client Groups O Always O Time Schedule y Bumping Client Groups Time To Bump Seconds Minutes Comments Table 104 Form fields Element Description ROUTING Client Groups This windowpane displays the names of client groups assigned to this routing record Table 104 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Assign Client Groups Click to display an Alarm Routing Client Group Assignment dialog box that lets you assign client groups to this routing record Only client groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator
567. type 4 x 5 for photos 5 x 1 for signatures When the cropping area is sized to your satisfaction move the highlighting box so that it covers the portion of the image that you want to capture Click OK The Image Capture Application screen displays with the selected image in place To print the photo your credential design must include photo image keylines When you print the credential from the application the keylines are replaced by the image The photo can be placed on either the front or the back of your credential design Click OK The selected image is moved to the Photo tab of the Person form Click Save The image capture is saved to the database 282 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Displaying existing images During normal operations images are not downloaded from the server In order to view an existing image for a credential record the image s must be loaded to the computer 1 Onthe Person form select the Photo tab and then click Search and highlight a record from the record list 2 Click Capture Image Signature button to enable the Image Capture Application screen 3 Move the mouse pointer to the existing image and right click A shortcut menu for the image appears The available image options on that menu are discussed in the paragraphs that follow Capture Based on the input device you previously selected the appropriate interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new imag
568. u can t delete on those forms you do not have permission to delete Question No readers display in the reader list box Why Only readers assigned Active are displayed in the list box Go to the Reader form and click the Reader tab Verify that the readers you are using are assigned Active Question Why are there no alarms displayed on the Alarm Monitor form Go to the Alarm form and click the Alarm tab Make sure that the Monitor option is On Also check the schedules There may be one in effect that does not route certain alarms to the Alarm Monitor form Question Our site uses this application in two languages Sometimes when we log in the Help files are not in the correct language Why This occurs when you are using either a non English operating system or this application in non English and you did not correctly shut down this application To eliminate this problem you must select the File menu and then Exit to correctly shut down this application Question How do I remove an alarm from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor form appropriate action should be taken For example you may want to send a guard out to check that a door is secure Once the alarm has been investigated and reset if necessary it should be removed from the Alarm Monitor form 1 Some alarms may require an acknowledgment before they can be removed This feature is set on the Alarm form To acknowledge the alarm W
569. u click Search immediately after you open the Client form this field displays WINDOWS and is unavailable for selection Region This field is available only when you first open the Client form and before you initiate a Search To locate a particular server or client you are able to select a server name from the Region drop down list The field default displays the database server computer name The clients associated with the selected Region display in the right windowpane If you click Search immediately after you open the Client form this field displays the default server name and is unavailable for selection Workstation Type Select from the drop down list of available workstation types e Administration This is the default for new installations and new client workstation records This configuration allows full functionality except monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF ACU only configuration Operator This configuration allows this client workstation to monitor alarms activity functions Graphics Console and Video Console e SCIF ACU only If this is a SCIF workstation enable SCIF on the Area form This configuration allows this client workstation to do everything that an Administration workstation can perform as well as monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration
570. ult host and retry the recovery Region Recover Region To display the Region form to add a Region record to this Global system To initiate recovery of a Regional database server host that failed was taken over by a backup Regional server and is now able to host its database Also refer to Backup Regions tab on page 42 A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery Recover FileServer To initiate recovery of a file server host that has failed and is now recovered and online This selection is enabled and used in a custom Global configuration where one or more database components are installed on a second or separate computer from the database server Manual Control To display the Manual Control form for this operator to manually perform operations on the system 327 328 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Controller monitoring All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations The Controller Monitor form lets you view all types of controllers the activities of those controllers monitor communications and control each controller in the
571. ultiple areas can be selected e Click Undo to remove the selected area from the grid e Click Clear All to remove all selected areas e Click Select All to select the entire area Click Search The Results display with number of matches found camera name start date and time end date and time and type Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console Define CCTV interfaces The CCTV Interface form Gateways amp Interfaces group is used for serial interfaces that are interfaced to this application Following installation of hardware and the CCTV interface software you must create CCTV alarm records This form is used to set up CCTV alarms Table 136 Form fields Element Description Description This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Chapter 5 Video CCTV tab Use the CCTV tab to set up a CCTV alarm Figure 103 CCTV tab CCTV Interface eS Description Fecity i CCTV CCTY Interface J CCTY Alarm lt gt Enable Message Disable Message Reset CCTW Alarm O when the alarm is cleared from the Alarm Monitor O when the alarm Resets Table 137 Form fields Element Description CCTV Interface CCTV Interface Select the Interf
572. unction Table 193 Form fields Element Description Edit Open the Controller form and edit the settings for the selected controller 331 332 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 193 Form fields continued Element Description Change State Set Offline Set Change the current state of the selected controller Online Download Credentials Reload the credential database records for the selected controller Download Database Download the controller s database Reset Controller Physically reset the controller Reset T amp A Micro only Set the time and attendance status to neutral for all credentials in this controller Reset APB Set the anti passback status to neutral for all credentials in this controller Dial Hang up Controller Dial that controller immediately Flash Controller Click to open the Controller Flash amp Controller Preference Configuration window that lets you download the latest firmware to the selected controller Refer to Controller flash and controller preference configuration below Remove Controller s Remove the controller from the Controller Monitor form window Refresh Refreshes the view Controller flash and controller preference configuration The Flash Controller option is available as an icon on the Controller Monitor form toolbar and shortcut menu This dialog box displays only if the controller is online There are three options 1 View ed
573. update changes are now enabled and blank Refer to Criteria for using Mass Update mode on page 294 Select the records you want to adjust from the list box on the right Typical Microsoft Windows selection deselection process is used in this application Make the required adjustment to the form Click Save The update of records begins immediately A window displays with a progress bar indicating the update progress Click Abort if you want to stop the update in progress e You cannot close a form during the Mass Update process Note Right click shortcut menu navigation is unavailable when you are in Mass Update mode e If you modified a preference but did not click Save a message reminds you to discard or save your changes e Smaller batch updates are recommended to prevent performance issues during a mass update e A Mass Update Complete dialog box displays indicating completion or failure Note When mass updates are processed to an access right a log file is generated and a View Results key displays in the dialog box Click to view the completion log We recommend that you rename and save this file to another location for reference purposes Renaming the log prevents an overwrite The questionable log is available for Customer Support to review and locate discrepancies Be aware that this log file is automatically overwritten every 7 days in order to prevent unnecessary data that would accumulate on your hard drive When the process
574. upon floor selection are enabled ACU controllers Only Trigger One DO upon floor selection is enabled Note Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record If you want to change an existing record delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking method Interface Select one of two options Option 1 Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate Option 2 Trigger One DO upon floor selection All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate The user can select only one floor How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 108 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Public Access tab Note The Public Access tab is available for ACU controller systems Use the Public Access tab to assign an area and time schedule associated with this elevator record during which public access is allowed 197 198 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Figure 86 Public Access tab EE Elevator e Description Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Diaital Input Area Time Schedule Time Schedule Table 109 Form fields Element Description Area Time Schedule This windowpane displays the area description and associated time schedule for public access to the area using this elevator Edit Select an area or time schedule and then click Edit
575. urce of the alarm point may be unclear It is recommended that you rename API alarm points to correspond to the actual physical point to assist in processing and acknowledging when an alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor 165 166 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 88 Form fields Element Description Facility A facility option can be assigned for the area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Note Itis possible to change the behavior of more than one alarm using the Mass Update feature see Mass update on page 293 Alarm tab The Alarm tab configures the behavior of the alarm Figure 66 Alarm tab eS Description 0099 1 05 Reader Forced Facility Ignore Facilities xj Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Group Owner Type Category Settings C Monitor Alarm Short Cut Reset Priority 2 C Always monitor Short Cut Reset E v C Controller dial host C Operator acknowledge Route alarms to history C Print alarms at host Delay Time Comment Table 89 Form fields Element Description Group Micro only Displays the alarm group to which this alarm was assigned The default is alarm group 0 You can change to any other alarm group available on t
576. urrent condition in green font State The current state of the displayed elements Refresh Click to refresh the status of the elements displayed in the windowpane Expand Click to expand a single selected element Expand All Click to expand all levels of the navigation tree Collapse All Click to collapse all levels of the expanded elements in the navigation tree Set state to These buttons are enabled when an Area or Zone description is selected Arm Immediately arms the selected Area or Intrusion Zone Disarm Immediately disarms the Area or Intrusion Zone Force Arm Arms the selected Area even if an alarm is already in an alarm condition Purpose This field accepts 255 characters When you select an Area or Intrusion record this box is enabled Enter an explanation for arming disarming These comments are written to the operator history file and display in the Purpose Field on the Operator History report How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 198 and complete the selections on this tab Mode Threat tab Select all or individual controllers or clients for immediate change of mode or of threat level access Example The change of mode for controllers is helpful for an immediate lockdown or to open all doors immediately The change of mode for clients applies to alarm routing and bumping When you select this tab a windowpane displays a list of available online controllers or client groups in your system based on facility permis
577. using the Database Maintenance Utility in this application After you perform the backup label and store the media in a safe place WARNING If you do not back up the SecurePerfectArchive you lose all the data stored in it 2 Select the Administration group and then Preferences The Preferences form opens with the System Settings tab displayed 3 Select the Clear Archive tab The Earliest Date in Archive DB and Latest Date in Archive DB fields indicate dates once you have clicked the Show Date button If you do not have any records in your Archive database the two date fields state No Record 4 Choose the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your Archive database by selecting the month and then the day to begin your archive 5 Choose the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your Archive database by selecting the month and then the day to end your archive 6 Click Delete 7 Click OK Note The deletion of an Archive database is taking place in the background Progress is indicated on the status bar in the lower right side of the screen The process may take hours to complete The length of time is dependent on the size of the Archive database and the hardware components of your computer 8 Upon completion a message displays The records from the Archive database has been successfully deleted Click OK Appending Archive databases If you have a backup of a SecurePerfectArchive 3 x or later database
578. uts are not created automatically when you set up a controller Set the Type field to Alarm and then save the record The associated alarm record is created Refer to your Controller Installation Guide for information on how to connect a digital input device to the controller For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display When reader records are created the default description is in the format Table 69 Form fields Element Description Description When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmmm bb pp where mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital input is associated bb represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number Micro controllers mmmmm bb pp ACU controllers mmmmm na pp Example 00001 01 01 DI This digital input is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change or add to this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmmm bb pp prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Facility A facility can be assigned for the new Digital Input record from th
579. vailable telephone numbers to reach the backup client Click to display an Assign Controller Phone Numbers dialog box Assign Controller Phone Numbers Dialog Box This dialog box lets you select a controller from the Dial Up Controller drop down list and assign telephone numbers used by this controller to reach the selected backup client e Click to display a list of only Dial Up and Network Dial Up controllers for the client record displayed e When you select a controller from the drop down list the Phone numbers to reach backup client xxxxxx fields become available for entry where xxxxxx name of selected client in the Backup Clients list box e When you enter a number in the first field the Save button becomes available e All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits If there is only one telephone number for this controller to reach the backup client repeat this number in all four fields If you click Save after completing the first Number field the system automatically completes all Number fields with a duplicate number e Click Save to save the list of telephone numbers The controller dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the others in numerical order until connection it made e Click Close to exit the dialog box e Repeat the process for each controller in the Dial up Controller drop down list e Click Save to save this client record Table 28 Form fields continued Chapter 2 S
580. ve An archive is a history of transactions The archive is created automatically by this application based on the time interval that you selected on the Preferences form Daily Weekly or Monthly Refer to Archiving on page 34 Table 213 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description arm disarm an area This application supports global spans multiple ACU controllers and local one ACU controller arming and disarming of an area using the reader keypad or manual control Global operation requires host to controllers communication Local operation allows arming disarming without host communication How arming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 10 for example 1234 10 1244 the operator enters 1244 4 A message displays the state of the area arming as successful How disarming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 20 for example PIN is 1234 20 1254 the operator enters 1254 4 A message displays the state of the area disarming as successful When using the Areas for Arm Disarm feature Note The keypad arm disarm feature must be configured as Local on the Area form Alarm tab Arm 1 The operator en
581. vent schedules can be created for Micro controllers only Use the Event Schedule form in the Schedules group to create event schedules Events define the days of the week or modes and times an action starts e An event schedules when an action occurs such as resetting an anti passback status dialing a controller or changing a physical reader type e There is no end time associated with an event e Events are comprised of one or more times on one or more days of the week and modes Events differ from time schedules in that events define when an action occurs and time schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs e An event can schedule an action multiple times even within the same day e Once an event is defined it may be applied anywhere events are used Note Deleting an event schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect of the deleted event schedule An event remains active until another event occurs to change it Table 39 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters Enter a meaningful description for this event Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Event Schedules tab Note Event Schedules can be created for Micro controllers only Use the Event Schedules tab to create an event schedule If you need to use facilities in your system create an event for each fa
582. w running Try to start the program now If the program still won t start the network may be down Check the current day s log on the network client e If the status does not change to Started check the current day s log of the server log It should display an error message providing a reason for shutting down 392 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Question System Service does not start What is the reason e The service cannot access the database e The client machine name is not in the client table e The services on the database server are not running e System service on the local machine does not start e The local machine did not receive a ping from the license domain machine within the ping timeout interval check that the license domain services are running e Client license count may have been exceeded Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your installation manual for supported capacities Question What does this message mean Maximum Number of Clients Limit Reached The maximum number of clients are already connected to the server Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your installation manual for supported capacities Question Why aren t the supervised DI points on my 2SRP module working Check the module addresses on the reader modules in your controller They must be consecutively numbered This means that the first reader module must be set to Address 1 the second reader module mu
583. ws the schedule Note If you expect to arm disarm by using any one of the readers within a zone e That reader must be assigned on the Access Right tab of the Access Right form and be an assigned reader in the intrusion zone listed on the Intrusion Zone tab e Individually created access rights must be assigned to the person that arms disarms the intrusion zone One right allows access to the readers and another right allows access to the intrusion zone Arm Disarm by Manual Control Manual zone control for arming and disarming is accomplished using the Intrusion Zone tab on the Manual Control form This follows the standard Manual Control form conventions including a Purpose entry by the operator Define intrusion zones Note The Intrusion Zone form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers This option opens the Intrusion Zone form Places amp Policies group that lets you create or edit an intrusion zone record and then assign related devices based on the current operator s facilities and permissions If you are modifying an existing zone configuration it is recommended that you verify the state of the zone by obtaining a current status Table 143 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description for the intrusion zone in this field In the process of saving a modified configuration a dialog box displays Please no
584. y Com Port Secondary Com P Enabled Disabled L Not connected ACCESSCLIENT Normal NULL NULL Disabled Disabled MM Not connected ACCESSCLIENT Normal NULL NULL Disabled E Enabled OG Not connected HCACCESS Normal NULL NULL Disabled Enabled MM Not connected HCCITRIX Normal NULL NULL Disabled Disabled w Connected INFRA_KEMPTON Normal NULL NULL Element Description Client Name of the networked computer To delete client must have a connection status of Not Connected Note When adding clients on the Client form the PCName must exactly match the network name of the computer in order for connection to be made Active Client Client Type This column displays an entry when a client failed and a backup client is now hosting its devices e The column displays the currently active hostname e if a backup attempt to a backup client failed the column displays Hostname Backup Failed where Hostname the backup client that was unable to host devices for the failed default host e During the process of recovery to the default client the column displays Hostname lt recovering gt This only displays at the default client computer Following a recovery to the default host this column is blank Type of client ClientApp or CCTV This client can be one of the workstation types as assigned on the Client form See Workstation Type on page 52 325 326 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Table 187 Form field
585. you must select a printer in order to save this record e Printer Displays the currently selected printer to which credential transactions prints This may be the same or a different printer than that used for alarm activity e Select Printer Click to select a printer to which credential transactions prints Note 1 Printer options must be selected on the Reader form in order for credential transactions to print 2 All zone activity transactions print and do not follow routing or schedules assigned to a reader How to 1 Review Table 27 on page 51 before you begin completion of this form 2 Click Browse to display a Select Client window 3 Proceed to complete the remainder of the options according to your system this client and the guidelines in Table 27 on page 51 4 Repeat these steps for each client that you are defining Backup Clients tab Note The Backup Clients tab displays only at client computers that are licensed for Client Redundancy Use the Backup Clients tab to configure your backup clients that would take over the devices in case of a failure at the default client computer Chapter 2 System preferences Figure 15 Backup Clients tab e e Description de Facility v Client Backup Clients Backup Clients Database Connection Heartbeat Heartbeat Interval seconds Redundancy Memibest Relies E Display redundancy notification 4 E Perform Backup on
586. ys listing those items that are incorrect or missing Do not forget to save the record again once you fix those items 98 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual 12 Micro only When the controller record is created the records for the associated readers alarms alarm groups and digital outputs are also created with default data based on the modules you added on the Controller Configuration tab 13 Use the Controller Monitor form to set the controller online Creating network controller records 1 When you click Add to add a controller record the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form displays default values filled in for Head of line and Credential Loading Complete the following e Enter Select the type of controller Enter the address of the controller e If this controller is the first controller on a string of controllers select Yes in Head of line Otherwise select No and select the head of line controller If this is a downstream controller that you are adding the controller directly upstream towards the host from it may need to be reset in order for it to recognize the controller you are adding Example If your line of controllers looks like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 And you want to add Controller 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Then you would need to reset Controller 2 in order for Controller 3 to be recogniz
587. ys on the Activity Monitor form When a zone is not successfully disarmed due to an invalid credential an Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Access Right transaction is generated When a zone is disarmed all normal access control rules apply for gaining access Arm Disarm an Intrusion Zone Using Arm Disarm Intrusion DI All of the same rules apply as if arming or disarming using an access right When the zone is successfully armed all readers in the zone should provide visual indication that the zone is armed and a Zone Armed transaction is generated on the Activity Monitor form When a zone is not successfully armed an Arm disarm Failed transaction is generated When a zone is disarmed all normal access control rules apply for gaining access and a Zone Disarmed transaction is generated What s next Continue with Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 257 255 256 Facility Commander Wnx 7 5 User Manual Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials This chapter provides an overview of the forms used to create and assign access rights and create department person and credential records In this chapter VEIN A O et dead tad oe ee ee a 258 DEMERE BI GRID cise ck hc ed i Wie Bid ed w ead hen a eaten tec 258 Dejine personnel ype gt ook a Ca Ce as 267 Delne CED MA a Stok Bowie Beale dead ebre a wb went 268 DIRE persons 0 ica bad Rew han beh oka ide Gad Ge aid 269 A a og bonele
588. ystem preferences Element Description Redundancy Display Redundancy Notification By default this check box is checked If licensed for Client Redundancy this check box must be selected to generate a notification message that displays at all clients based on facilities available to the current operator when e A client failure occurs e A device takeover succeeded e A device takeover did not succeed Select Details button for explanation If the first in line backup client is not available a second backup client takes over control of devices and a notification message displays updating you e Recovery of the default client and transfer of devices failed Select Details button for explanation e Recovery succeeded If you clear this check box you do not receive a notification message however indication of a takeover displays on the Client Monitor form Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown This check box is clear by default Select this check box to trigger the takeover by a specified backup client of devices associated with a client during a normal shut down If your system is not licensed and you are operating in demo mode this option is not available for selection How to Verify that you are licensed for Client Redundancy Review Table 28 before you begin configuration of this form 1 2 3 Proceed to configure your backup clients according to your system and the guidelines in Table 28 4 Click

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SériesIS,ISL,IC,H SeriesIS,ISL,IC,H OPERADOR DE PUERTAS    Manual de Usuario Amacén  TP Informatique industrielle 2    Samsung Galaxy Brugervejledning  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file